User Manual

Air Interface Measurement Tool

Version 5.80.00

© 2011 by Anite Finland Ltd. All rights reserved. This manual, as well as the software described in it, is furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license. The information in this manual is intended for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Anite Finland Ltd assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this user manual. Except as permitted by such license, no part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Anite Finland Ltd. Windows®, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® 7, Outlook®, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of the Microsoft® Corporation in the United States and other countries. MapInfo® and MapX® are registered trademarks of MapInfo® Corporation. CDMA 2000® is a registered trademark of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA -USA). The license management portion of this Licensed Technology is based on SentinelLM* © 1989-2003 Rainbow Technologies, Inc. All rights reserved.

Revision 5.80.00, Last edited April 2011

CO NTE NTS

3

CONTENTS
QUICK GUIDE
SETTING UP THE SYSTEM VOICE MEASUREMENTS CS DATA MEASUREMENTS PS DATA MEASUREMENTS USING NEMO OUTDOOR Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options

10 
10  11  11  12  13  13 

BEFORE YOU BEGIN
COPY PROTECTION Technical Support Expiration IMPORTANT End-User License Agreement Traffic Safety Operating Environment NOTES

15 
23  26  27  27  27  27  28 

NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW 29 
VOICE TESTING CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE INDOOR MEASUREMENTS 29  30  30  32  33  34 

INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM35 
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Connecting SAGEM OT 260/268 Mobile Connecting a GPS Receiver Connecting a Scanner Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Connecting Voice Quality Devices GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING 35  35  37  37  37  38  39  39  40  41 

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR Configuration through Welcome page Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually

42 
42  42  45  47 

4

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Use Case 1. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES CONFIGURATION MANAGER VIEW Handler Information User Interface Notifications Scripts Device Configurations Devices 50  51  52  53  60  64  65  66 

48 

MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES 72  Measurement Properties – General 72  Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings 74  Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles 77  Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners 86  Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning 98  Measurement Properties - Script 101 

75  79 

MEASUREMENT MODES
CALL MODE MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY SCANNING MEASUREMENTS IN GSM Scanning with a Mobile Scanning with a Fast Frequency Scanner SCANNING MODE MEASUREMENT IN UMTS Frequency Scan Mode Pilot Mode SPECTRUM ANALYSIS

102 
102  102  102  102  103  103  103  103 

DURING MEASUREMENTS
MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner With a Mobile MAKING VOICE CALLS Voice Call Properties Voice Call Properties – TETRA VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS MAKING VIDEO CALLS DATA TRANSFERS Configuring the Data Connection Configuring the FTP Protocol Configuring the SFTP Protocol Configuring the HTTP Protocol Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol Configuring the POP3 Protocol Configuring the SMTP Protocol Configuring the WAP Protocol

104 
105  105  105  105  106  108  109  111  114  114  120  123  125  127  129  131  135 

CO NTE NTS

5

Configuring the Streaming Protocol Configuring the Trace Route Protocol Making Data Transfers STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING VOIP CALLS SMS TESTING SMS Testing with CDMA terminals MMS TESTING Packet Session Settings for MMS MMS Editor Making MMS Measurements MMS Settings for Nokia 6630, 6680, and N80 MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 START EXTERNAL APPLICATION ICMP PING IP PACKET CAPTURING MAKING SCRIPT FILES Script Transfer Stop Commands Add Menu Wait Settings Advanced Running Scripts MEASUREMENT LISTS FORCING FUNCTIONS Channel Locking Band Locking Handover Control Cell Barring CELL TESTING

136  138  139  140  141  143  144  145  146  147  148  148  151  154  155  157  162  164  167  168  171  175  176  178  178  180  181  186  186 

MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION 188  Missing neighbor detection with a mobile 188  Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile 190  PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS 191  UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone 192  UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements 194  CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis - Mobile Phones 194  CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis - Scanners 195  GSM Interference Analysis 195  TIMESLOT TESTING VIEWING GRAPHS Graph Popup Menu Zoom - Scatter Graph Graph Side Panel - Layers Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter Graph Layer Color Configuration VIEWING GRIDS 198  200  201  204  206  214  216  222 

6

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message Grid Popup Menu 223  VIEWING MAPS Map Side Panel Route Plans Map Popup Menu Color Set Editor Map Example 1 Map Example 2 Map Example 3 Map Example 4 Map Example 5 VIEWING FLOORPLANS Multiple Routes and Floorplans Indoor Route Planning Indoor Map Popup Menu 250  252  254  259  278  280  281  282  283  284  286  287  288  290 

223 

ENDING MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT REPORT

298 
299 

MEASUREMENT RESULTS
ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Selecting Playback Files During Playback Viewing and Moving Markers Closing Playback Files

301 
301  301  301  302  303  304 

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER304 

USER INTERFACE
VIEW GROUPS MENU BAR TOOLBAR STATUS BAR NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS File Menu Edit Menu View Menu Measurement Menu Playback Menu Data Menu Window Menu Help Menu CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS Custom Windows Parameter Tree Search Functionality Device Info Window for Mobiles

307 
307  308  308  308  309  309  310  310  311  313  313  315  315  316  320  321  322  322 

CO NTE NTS

7

Device Info Window for Scanners Output Window Script Status Window Controlling Windows

324  324  325  325  326 

HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW

TROUBLESHOOTING
LOW THROUGHPUT All Windows Versions Windows XP Windows Vista/Windows7 DEVICE INFO WINDOW CANNOT ADD DEVICES CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION

327 
327  328  329  329  331  331  331  332  332 

NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS
TOOLBAR BUTTONS DIALOG BUTTONS GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS

333 
333  334  335  336 

SHORTCUT KEYS NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT
INTERNET SUPPORT USER CLUB PHONE, EMAIL, AND FAX SUPPORT

339  340  343 
343  343  343 

APPENDIX 1
INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD

345 
345 

APPENDIX 2 APPENDIX 3
MAKING MAPINFO RASTER MAPS Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW
®

346  348 
348  348 

CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET347 

APPENDIX 4 APPENDIX 5
NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Common Components

350  354 
354  355  355 

CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR350 

8

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Optional components MMAC3 WITH CASE Lid Carrying case MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION Without Carrying Case With Carrying Case

359  360  360  362  363  367  367  369 

APPENDIX 6
NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components Setting Up the System Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs. Nemo Outdoor Multi

375 
375  375  378  382  388 

APPENDIX 7 - VOICE QUALITY GUIDE 389 
VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line Mobile-to-Mobile 392  392  393  393 

NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ) Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing 393  Disassembling the EVOQ Module 414  Assembling the EVOQ Module 415  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD 415  Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data 415  Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP 416  Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card

423  434 

TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 433  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications 434  Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver 436 

MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI 439  MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements 441  441  447 

APPENDIX 8 - SCANNER USER GUIDE453 
CONNECTING DEVICES 453  Connecting Nemo FSR1 Scanner 453  Connecting Anritsu Scanners 456  Connecting the DRT Wimax 4301A+ Scanner 466  Connecting the PCTEL LX CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA Scanner 468  Connecting PCTEL EX scanners 470  Connecting the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA Dual-Mode Scanner 474  Connecting the PCTEL MX GSM/WCDMA Scanner 477  Connecting PCTEL PCT Scanners 479 

CO NTE NTS

9

Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML Scanner482  Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Scanner 486  STARTING DEVICES Starting Nemo FSR1 Scanner Starting Anritsu Scanners Starting DRT Scanners Starting PCTEL Scanners Starting Rohde & Schwarz Scanners STARTING MEASUREMENT Nemo FSR1 Scanner Anritsu Scanners PCTEL Scanners DRT Scanners Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML/TSMW Scanner TROUBLESHOOTING 490  490  491  493  494  500  501  501  505  517  537  541  551 

APPENDIX 9 - TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES 552 
PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings Antivirus Filtering Low Data Throughputs 552  552  552  553 

APPENDIX 10
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

557 
557 

10

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

QUICK GUIDE
This quick guide will explain briefly how to set up the Nemo Outdoor measurement system and how to start the actual measurements. Check the cross-references for more detailed explanations on using Nemo Outdoor.

SETTING UP THE SYSTEM
 From Nemo Outdoor 5.8 onwards the software is protected with a copy protection module and it is not possible to install Nemo Outdoor without it. Software-based copy protection licenses are no longer valid. 1. Installing the software. Check the manual for hardware requirements if necessary (p.34). Run the Nemo Outdoor installation program Nemo Outdoor 5.xx.xx.exe from the Nemo Outdoor CDROM. The Nemo Outdoor SW and handlers are installed in the same setup. 2. During the installation, Nemo Outdoor will ask you to insert the copy protection module on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor (p.23). Please insert the copy protection module and wait until Windows has completed installing the device drivers. Press OK to continue the setup. 3. When the installation is finished, restart the computer. 4. The measurement mobiles, GPS receiver, and scanner are connected to the computer’s COM and/or USB ports. If you are using a laptop, you will probably need a PCMCIA card or a USB serial converter to create additional COM ports. Install the PCMCIA card or USB serial converter and the required driver (p.345). Connect the devices to the COM ports with the specified cables and switch the devices on. Especially with GPRS mobiles that have two cables, be sure to use the correct cable. 5. If you are making a data measurement, you need to create a dial-up connection. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide provided in the Nemo Outdoor package to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.  Choose one of the following steps: Select step 5 if you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. Go to step 6 if you are an older user of Nemo Outdoor and would like to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. Go to step 7 if you would like to set up the system manually. 6. On the Welcome page, the Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations, and start the devices in online mode, or decide to work offline first and connect and start them later by clicking the work offline button in Nemo Outdoor. In addition, the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool automatically detects devices connected to the computer and assigns the appropriate, previously created COM port and dial-up information to them. 7. To view the Load Device Configuration dialog, click the Other.. button in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor dialog (see p.45).

Q UI CK G UI DE

11

8. If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode, select a premade device configuration and click Start Devices. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline, that is, without connecting and starting the measurement devices, select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device later. When you want to activate the devices, connect the devices to the measurement system and click the work offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. 9. If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually, close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor. You can go to File | Open Measurement, and select a saved measurement for playback, or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online of offline mode. Alternatively, you can go to Measurement | Add New Device, select a device and configure it for measurements. You can also do this from the configuration manager (Ctrl+M) (see step 9). In addition, you can also use the Autodetect devices functionality by going to Measurement | Autodetect Devices, which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection. 10. Open the Configuration Manager dialog (Ctrl+M) (p.51) to add measurement devices manually. Select the Device item and click the Add button . Select the device type (phone, scanner, GPS) that you want to add and select the device model from the list. Click Next. In the Device Properties dialog, select the correct COM ports and click OK. 11. If you are using a GPS receiver, you will also need a map. Use the Windows® Explorer to copy all the required map files to the maps folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\maps. Define the default map file and map folder as follows: open the Configuration Manager dialog, double-click the User Interface item and select the Paths tab. In the Map field, browse the folder where map files are stored. In the Default map field, browse the default map file (p.57). 12. If you have base station files (.nbf), copy them to the BTS files folder, for example, C:\Nemo Tools\BTS files. When you want to view a BTS file on a map, open the Measurement Properties dialog for the measurement mobile used, and browse a file in the BTS File field. Click OK. Open a map through the Data menu and the BTS icons should appear on the map.

VOICE MEASUREMENTS
 Setting up voice measurements:
1. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p.67). Define the Trace Port. 2. Go to the Measurement Properties dialog. 3. Click OK. You can now start voice measurements.

CS DATA MEASUREMENTS
  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Settings related to the dial-up server (number, username, and password) are operator-specific. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.

To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). In the Measurement Properties. 117). Select the Data Protocol. You can now start CS data measurements. You can now start PS data measurements. Click OK. double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Testing Settings (p. 6. E-Mail Settings (p. Configuration dialog (p. double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p. 4.121). Depending on you selection. 124). To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). 117). To set up MMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). click the PDP Context Properties button. double-click the Short Messaging Service field and define the SMS Settings (p. FTP Transfer Properties (p. Click OK.137) dialog. 139). WAP Transfer Properties. To set up ICMP Ping measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). 3.67). PS DATA MEASUREMENTS  Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 7.116). HTTP Transfer Properties (p. SFTP Transfer Properties (p. E-Mail Settings (p. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p.143). 2. the Properties button will either open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf) (p. Configure the measurement device in the Phone Properties dialog (p. double-click the Multimedia Messaging Service field and define the MMS Settings (p. Depending on you selection.130).155). Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a Circuit Switched Dial-Up Connection. Configuration dialog (p. double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p.130). 5. To set up Trace route measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). 155). 7.67). Streaming Properties (p. SFTP Transfer Properties (p. click the Properties buttons next to the Data Number field to define Data Call Properties (p.12 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Setting up CS data measurements: 1. double-click the Trace Route field and define the Trace Route Properties (p. . or Streaming Properties (p. 4.  Setting up PS data measurements: 1. Define the Trace and Modem Ports and select a Packet Switched Dial-Up Connection.145). 2. To set up SMS measurements (can be performed simultaneously with the data measurements). 124). FTP Transfer Properties (p. HTTP Transfer Properties (p.126). In the Measurement Properties. double-click the ICMP Ping field and define the Ping Settings (p. 145). Define PDP Context Settings to establish a data connection (p. 3.121). Select the Data Protocol. 5.137) dialog. 143).132). the Properties button will either open the TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf) (p.126). 6. 8.72).72).

These command lines will enable the user to enter a certain profile in Nemo Outdoor. Click the Device Settings button in the Device Info window and select Script Properties.hwc /M SIMPLE . To finish both the recording and the script.140) to generate a sequence of actions that Nemo Outdoor will execute automatically. First. start voice call or send MMS message. During playback use the Pause button to freeze the playback and observe the different measurement windows for that particular point in time. such as. You can playback the measurement file by clicking the Playback button in the Report dialog. Stop the recording by clicking the Stop button . open some measurement windows through the Data menu for monitoring the measurement. Click the Rename button to change the file name. or you can create a shortcut to Nemo Outdoor on the desktop and enter the command line to the shortcut’s Properties | Shortcut |Target field. 60). If you want to be notified about certain events during the measurement. Nemo Outdoor has recorded a measurement file of the performed test calls/scan on the computer’s hard disk. First. With mobiles. You can also open and close windows during the playback (p. Select a map file and click OK to open the map. the device is connected properly and is ready for measurements. 5. To perform measurements manually. The buttons will zoom in and zoom out respectively. Select an existing script in the Script File field or create a new one by clicking the Script Editor button. Organize the windows by selecting Windows menu | Tile Horizontally / Tile Vertically. in which the user is not able to save any changes made to the hardware configuration or workspace. 1. the following command line  Outdoor5 /W test. Click the Expand Device Info Window button device related parameters (p. 2. 9. Hence. Nemo Outdoor will start the recording automatically. 3. 6.301).    /W <workspace> will directly open the specified workspace in Nemo Outdoor /H <hw config> will directly open the given hardware configuration in Nemo Outdoor /M SIMPLE will open Nemo Outdoor in limited mode. Use the Pan tool to position the map.322). use the Notifications function (p. 8. click on the button to activate the tool and then on the map. from the Device Commands menu. click the button again. Click the Configure Notifications button in the Device Info window to access the Notifications dialog. To stop running the script. Using Nemo Outdoor with Command Line Options Outdoor supports the following command-line options. you can use Scripts (p.Q UI CK G UI DE 13 USING NEMO OUTDOOR When a green light is blinking in the Device Info window. Run a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button . Click the Start Playback button to playback a file.wor /H N95. select the appropriate actions. You can enter the command lines either with Command Prompt through Start | Run | cmd. Select Data menu | Map| New. in the Device Info window to display some 4. 7. click the Stop button .

N95.14 Nemo O ut door User M a nual will start Nemo Outdoor. and prevent any changes possibly made to them from taking effect.hwc hardware configuration. . load the test.wor workspace.

see the Nemo Outdoor product description): GSM Mobiles Nokia N85 GSM GSM Scanners PCTEL LX GSM PCTEL LX GSM/UMTS PCTEL PCT-510 PCTEL PCT-520 Anritsu ML8720C Anritsu ML8740A Anritsu ML8740B EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 All GSM frequencies GSM 900/1800. The supported network standards are: cdmaOne 450. UMTS 2100 GSM 900/1800. UMTS 2100. UMTS 2100 GSM 900/1800. 800. 1900 MHz GPRS HSDPA HSUPA HSPA+ LTE FDD bands TD-SCDMA TETRA UMTS (FDD mode) WiMAX Nemo Outdoor is an effective tool for tracing digital networks.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 15 BEFORE YOU BEGIN This manual explains how to set up and operate the Nemo Outdoor Air Interface Measurement Tool Software for Windows® XP Professional and Windows® 7 developed by Anite Finland Ltd. Nemo Outdoor uses licensed technology from various manufacturers. Nemo Outdoor collects measurement results and geographical coordinates (when used with a GPS receiver) and stores them on a hard disk.1900 MHz CDMA2000 1xEV-DO AMPS DVB-H EGPRS GSM 850. 1800. 900. Nemo Outdoor is a portable engineering tool for measuring and monitoring the air interface of digital networks. verification. Measurement results provide useful information for network optimization. UMTS 2100 . Results can be efficiently and easily viewed with the Nemo analysis tool Nemo Analyze for Windows®. GSM/UMTS 850/1900 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 GSM 900/1800. The supported measurement device models are (for a complete list of supported devices. and maintenance purposes. UMTS 2100 GSM 900/1800.

430 MHz 851 .869 MHz 390-400 MHz 851-870 MHz 380-400 MHz 806-825 MHz. 851-870 MHz THR 880i 350-360 MHz 380-390 MHz 380-390/410-420 MHz 410-420 MHz 450-460 MHz 806-825 MHz 360-370 MHz 390-400 MHz 390-400/420-430 MHz 420-430 MHz 460-470 MHz 851-870 MHz 350-370 MHz 380-400 MHz 380-400/410-430 MHz 410-430 MHz 450-470 MHz 806-825 MHz 851-870 MHz THR880i Ex 380-390 MHz 410-420 MHz 806-825 MHz 390-400 MHz 420-430 MHz 851-870 MHz 380-400 MHz 410-430 MHz 806-825 MHz 851-870 MHz THR880i Lite 380-390 MHz 806-825 MHz 390-400 MHz 851-870 MHz 380-400 MHz 806-825 MHz 851-870 MHz EGPRS Mobiles Nokia 6230i Nokia 3500 EGSM/GPRS/EGPRS 900/1800/1900.390 MHz 410 .16 Nemo O ut door User M a nual TETRA Mobiles Terminal THR 850 (Nokia) TX RX Direct Mode 380 .400 MHz 420 . GSM 850/1800/1900 1xEVDO & CDMA2000 Mobiles GTRAN GPC-6420 CDMA 450 data card LG LHD-200E CDMA 450 Motorola V3C CDMA 800/1900. PoC Quad band EGSM 900. AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) LG VX8100 CDMA 800/1900.420 MHz 806 . AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1X compliant) LG C270 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) LG KX206 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) LG C676 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) LG C680 CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) LG VX8000 CDMA 800/1900.824 MHz THR 880 380-390 MHz 806-824 MHz 390 . AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) .

GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS band IV 1700UL/ 2100 DL. B) 1XEV-DO Scanners PCTEL LX PCTEL LX PCTEL LX PCTEL LX PCTEL LX PCTEL EX 1XEV-DO 450 1XEV-DO 850 1XEV-DO 1900 CDMA 850/1900. AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant. Rev. A) CDMA 850/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant. GSM/EDGE 850/1800/1900 UMTS 2100. Rev. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. Rel. A) CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. Rev. GSM/EDGE 900/1800/1900 UMTS 2100. EV-DO 850/1900 CDMA/EV-DO 850 CDMA/EV-DO 850/1900 UMTS Mobiles Nokia 6630 Nokia 6680 Nokia 7376 Nokia N80 Nokia N92 Motorola V3X Samsung SGH-Z105 Samsung SGH-Z107 Samsung SGH-Z140 Samsung SGH-Z500 Samsung ZV10 Samsung P920 Samsung SGH-T639 (T-Mobile) Qualcomm TM 6250 Vodafone 3G data card UMTS 2100. GSM 900/1800 UMTS 2100. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 Merlin U530 data card UMTS 2100. Rev. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 . AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) CDMA 450 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) CDMA 800/1900 CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant. A) CDMA 850/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. 0) CDMA 850/1900. A) CDMA 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant. GSM/GPRS 900/1800/1900 UMTS 2100. A) CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 17 LG VX8300 LG VX8350 LG VX8360 Kyocera KPC650 data card UTStarcom/ Audiovox PC5740 data card Zapp Telemodem Z020 Pantech PX-500 PCMCIA Novatel Wireless Ovation MC727 Novatel Wireless Ovation MC760 Huawei EC169 Huawei C7600 Sierra Wireless 597 Huawei EC367 CDMA 800/1900. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100 AWS. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS 1900. Rev. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. GSM/GPRS 850/1900 OR UMTS 2100. Rev. Rev. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS 2100. AMPS 800 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant) CDMA 800/1900. A) CDMA 800/1900 (CDMA2000® 1XEV-DO compliant.

Dual-mode GSM 900/1800 UMTS 2100. GSM 850/1900 UMTS 900/2100. 4. 1900. GSM 900/1800 UMTS/ GSM 850/1900 UMTS 850/1900/2100/2100 (AWS) UMTS 850/900/1800/1900/2100 UMTS 2100. 1800. GSM 850/1900 UMTS 2100 AWS. 14 and 17) . 2100.18 Nemo O ut door User M a nual UMTS Scanners PCTEL LX PCTEL EX PCTEL EX PCTEL EX PCTEL EX PCTEL EX PCTEL EX Mini 06110 PCTEL EX Mini 06111 PCTEL EX Mini 06112 PCTEL EX Mini 06113 PCTEL LX PCTEL LX UMTS PCTEL LX GSM/UMTS PCTEL LX UMTS PCTEL LX UMTS PCTEL PCT-505 UMTS PCTEL PCT-520 GSM/UMTS PCTEL MX GSM/UMTS UMTS 850 UMTS 850/1900. 5. 3. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS 2100 UMTS 2100. GSM 1900 UMTS 2100/GSM 900/1800 UMTS 2100 UMTS 900/2100 UMTS 850/1900 UMTS AWS UMTS 900 UMTS 1900 or UMTS 2100 UMTS 2100. Dual-mode GSM 900/1800 UMTS 2100. 13. 2. 8.A/ B/ C/ D. 7. GSM 900/1800 UMTS 850/900/1800/1900/2100/2100 (AWS). 850. 2100 AWS and 2600 (E-UTRA bands 1. 900. 12. Dual-mode GSM 900/1800 Anritsu ML8720B Anritsu ML8720C Anritsu ML8740A Anritsu ML8740B Nemo FSR1 Scanner GSM 850/900/1800/1900MHz UMTS 850/900/1900/2100/2100AWS CDMA/EVDO 850/1900 LTE 700. GSM 900/1800 UMTS 2100 AWS.

CW scanning. spectrum analyzer HSDPA Mobiles Qualcomm TM 6275/6280 Merlin U740 data card Merlin U870 data card Merlin X950 D Express data card Motorola RAZR2 V9 Motorola RAZR2 V9US Nokia C5-03 Nokia N85 Nokia N85US Nokia N95 Nokia N95US Nokia N96 Nokia N96US Nokia N97 Nokia N97US Nokia 6120 Nokia 6121 LG TU550 Sierra Wireless AirCard 850 data card Sierra Wireless AirCard 860 data card Samsung Omnia 7 Samsung Focus Samsung Z560 Samsung ZX20 UMTS/HSDPA 1900. spectrum analyzer. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. EVDO 450/800/1900 WCDMA 850/900/1900/2100/2100AWS LTE FDD bands 700. GSM/GPRS 850/1900 UMTS/HSPA 900/2100 MHz. EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100 MHz. E800. GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900. EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 900/1900/2100. 2. 2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. CW scanning UMTS 850/900/1900/2100/2100 AWS. 20) All LTE TDD bands (E-UTRA bands 33. spectrum analyzer. 35. CDMA2000. 900. Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/2100. 36. EGSM 900. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 . GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA 900/1900/2100. 17. 34. GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 900/2100. EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. EGSM900. 38. EGSM900. GSM-E/-R 850/900/1800/1900 TSMQ TSMW GSM 850/900/1800/1900. EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. 3. 1900. spectrum analyzer. GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 900/2100. GSM/GPRS 900/1800 UMTS/HSDPA 1900. 5. 37. EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 900/1900/2100. 1800.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 19 Rohde & Schwarz Scanners TSML-C TSML-G TSML-W TSML-GW CDMA/EV-DO. GSM/GPRS 850/900/1800 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. 8. GSM/GPRS 850/900/1900 OR UMTS/HSDPA 2100. 850. spectrum analyzer. EGSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. WCDMA 850/900/1900/2100/2100AWS CDMA/EVDO 450/800/1900 Spectrum analyzer. GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900. CW scanning GSM 850/900/1900/1900. 7. GPRS/EGPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900. 12. 2100 AWS and 2600 (E-UTRA bands 1. EGSM900. EGSM 900. 39. 4. CW scanning UMTS. 13. 14. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. CW scanning GSM. GSM/GPRS 850/900/1800 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. 40).

GSM 900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. GSM/EGPRS UMTS/HSPA 850/2100AWS/1900/2100. GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA 900/1900/2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. Quad-band GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 MHz UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 Option Globetrotter HSUPA UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 885 Compass Sierra Wireless Compass UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100. Quad-band EDGE/GPRS 850/900/1800/1900  . GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 Nokia 6720(RM-424) UMTS/HSPA 900/1900/2100. Quad-band EDGE/GPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 2100/1900/900/850. GSM 900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 HSUPA Mobiles Huawei E180 Huawei E270 USB modem Huawei E870 Express data card Icera Espresso 300D Novatel Ovation MC930D USB modem Novatel Ovation MC990D USB modem Qualcomm MSM7200TM UMTS/HSPA 900/2100.2 Ready data card Option Globetrotter EXPRESS 7.20 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Samsung Z720 Samsung A 707 Samsung G800 Samsung SGH-U800 Soul Option GlobeTrotter 3G+ data card Option Globetrotter GT MAX E data card Option GlobeTrotter GT MAX 7. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 Sierra Wireless AirCard UMTS/HSPA 850/1900.2 data card Huawei E169 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+ Mobiles Huawei E182E Huawei E270+ Huawei E1820 Novatel Ovation MC545 Novatel Ovation MC996D UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/HSPA/UMTS . GSM 850/900/1800/1900 Nokia 6720US (RM-564) UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100. GSM/EGPRS UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100. GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA 850/900/1700/1900/2100. GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 Sierra Wireless AirCard 881 UMTS/HSPA 850/1900. GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 850/1900/2100. GSM/EGPRS UMTS/HSPA 850/1900/2100.2 Ready data card Option Globetrotter HSDPA 7.900/1900/2100 MHz. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 Option iCON 452 UMTS/HSPA Quad band 850/AWS/1900/2100 Sierra Wireless AirCard 880 UMTS/HSPA 850/2100. GSM 900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA 2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 2100. GSM/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. GSM 850/900/1800/1900 Nokia C5 (RM-645) UMTS/HSPA 900/2100.

GSM/EDGE 900/1800/1900 UMTS 2100.496 – 2. Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 900/1900/2100 Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100.690 GHz 2. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/900/1900/2100. Quad band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100. TD-SCDMA 2000 TD-SCDMA 2000. HSDPA/GSM/EGPRS 900/1800 TD-SCDMA Scanners PCTEL EX GSM 900/1800 TD-SCDMA 2000 UMA Mobiles Nokia 6136 GSM 850/900/1800/1900. GSM 900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSDPA 2100. Quad-band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/900/1900/2100. DVB-H 470-702 MHz. GSM 900/1800/1900 UMTS 2100.X-3. GSM 900/1800/1900 WiMAX Mobiles Zyxel MAX-100 Motorola PCCW200 Motorola USBw 25100 Beceem BCS 200 Beceem BCSM250 2. WLAN 802.11b/g 2. GSM/EDGE 900/1800/1900 UMTS 2100. DVB-H 470-702 MHz. Quad-band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100. Quad-band GSM 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 900/2100. GSM/GPRS/EDGE 850/900/1800/1900 Qualcomm MD8220 TD-SCDMA Mobiles Datang DTM8101 Datang DTM 8120 Leadcore LC8130E TD-SCDMA 2000 GSM 900/1800. DVB-H 470-702 MHz.500-2.X GHz .4GHz for UMA DVB-H Mobiles Nokia N92 Samsung P920 Samsung P940 LG U800 LG KU950 Anritsu MS 2721B+ DVB-H Analyzer DVB-H 470-702 MHz. Quad-band EDGE/GPRS 850/900/1800/1900 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100.X-3. DVB-H 474-850 MHz UMTS 2100. DVB-H 470-702 MHz.X GHz 2.700GHz 2.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 21 Novatel Ovation MC998D Sierra Wireless 306 Sierra Wireless 307 Sierra Wireless 308 Sierra Wireless 309 Sierra Wireless 310U Sierra Wireless 312U Bandrich Bandluxe C320 UMTS/HSPA+ 850/1900/2100.

22 Nemo O ut door User M a nual WiMAX Scanners PCTEL EX DRT 4301A+ ZTE TU25 WiMax USB modem LTE Scanners PCTEL EX 2. 40) LTE Terminals Huawei E398 Pantech UML290 LG VL 600 LG LTE L1000 LG G7 LG G13 LG G17 Qualcomm MDM9200 Qualcomm MDM9600 E-UTRA bands 1. 14. 18. 13. 850. 3300-3800 MHz. 34. 8. 1900. 2496-2690 MHz. Block B) E-UTRA bands 4 and 17 E-UTRA bands 1. 4. Block C) E-UTRA bands 4 and 17 (2100AWS/700MHz. 5. 5150-5825 MHz 2. 4.69 GHz 2300-2360 MHz. 7. 36.496 GHz-2. 19. 2100 AWS and 2600 (E-UTRA bands 1. 20. 12. 11. 7. 5. 3. 21 LTE FDD bands 700. 2100.496-2. 35. 3. 14. 900. 3 and 8 E-UTRA FDD band 13 E-UTRA FDD band 13 Different variants E-UTRA bands 1 and 7 (2100MHz/2600MHz) E-UTRA band 13 (700MHz. 17. 2100 AWS Mini LTE Dual Band 2100/2600 MHz LTE Single Band E800 Mini LTE Dual Band E800/2600 MHz LTE Single Band 2600 MHz Mini E-UTRA bands 1. 2. 2. 1800. 17) All LTE TDD bands (E-UTRA bands 33. 38. 13 and 17 . Lower 700-A/B/C / Upper 700-C / 2100 AWS LTE Single Band 1600 (E-UTRA band 24) LTE Dual band 1800/2600 MHz LTE Single Band 2100 MHz LTE Single Band Scanner. 8. 37. 39. 13.690 GHz PCTEL MX R&S TSMW LTE Single Band Upper 700C LTE Dual Band Upper 700-C/AWS 2100 MHz Mini LTE Dual Band Lower 700-B/C/AWS 2100MHz Mini LTE Single Band Lower 700MHz-A/B/C Mini LTE Tri-Band Scanner. 12. 4.

80 will not be backwards compatible with the older versions of Nemo Outdoor.Helpdesk@anite. please contact Nemo Technical Support at Nemo. If you have problems starting Nemo Outdoor. Plug in the copy protection dongle in a USB port on your PC. and if the following error messages appear. . A new dongle with a valid technical support and maintenance agreement option will be in use with Nemo Outdoor 5.  Note that the new dongle introduced in Nemo Outdoor 5.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 23 LTE frequency bands and channel bandwidths COPY PROTECTION From Nemo Outdoor 5.80 and later versions. either the dongle key is not plugged in or the dongle key is an unsupported model. No Valid License Detected If the error message “Error: No valid license detected….” appears when the application is started. only hardware-based copy protection is used.8 onward.com. A USB copy protection dongle will be delivered in the Nemo Outdoor package.

To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the old dongle key.80. Before updating Nemo Outdoor application please make sure that new dongle key is available. See the instructions below for updating your Nemo Outdoor dongle. it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5. To be able to use the Nemo Outdoor application supported by the dongle key without information about the technical support agreement. it means that the dongle key type is correct. when the SPS 00868 dongle key is in use.4. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version.g. it is recommended that you uninstall Nemo Outdoor version 5. . The example above is seen. but that the dongle key is missing valid technical support & maintenance agreement information. e.80. The old dongle key The new dongle key The dongles are updated using the Remote Update Utility software. Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key with the Remote Update Utility. No Valid Technical Support Agreement If the error message below appears.24 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Please follow the instructions for how to read the license information from the existing dongle key. After un-installation reboot the computer and re-install the previous version. or it can alternatively be downloaded from Nemo User Club. Note that you must use the latest version of the software which comes with Nemo Outdoor version 5.

. Please add the following information to the e-mail using the following subject “Nemo Outdoor dongle update”:         Company name First name Surname Street address Zip/ Postal Code Country Telephone number Mobile number 6. After you have received the V2C file containing the update.helpdesk@anite. Click Collect Information and select a location where the C2V file is saved. 3. 2. Start the SecureUpdate by selecting Start | All Programs | Nemo Tools | Remote Update Utility. 5.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 25  Updating the dongle (Nemo Outdoor version 5. Send the C2V file to Nemo Technical Support at nemo.80 and later) 1. Connect your copy protection module 4. select the Update File in the Apply License Update tab and click Apply Update.com. The Collect Key Status Information tab opens.

After this date it is not possible to start the new version of the Nemo Outdoor application. After the technical support & maintenance agreement is renewed. . the dongle key can be updated remotely and the customer can update the application to the latest version.80 with a 1-year technical support maintenance agreement in April 2011. Example: A customer has purchased Nemo Outdoor version 5. The customer is entitled for free updates until April 2012. Nemo Outdoor versions released after April 2012 cannot be used with the dongle key without renewing the technical support & maintenance agreement. Nemo Outdoor can be installed and is ready for use. Technical Support Expiration The new dongle keys used with Nemo Outdoor 5. The dongle is now updated.26 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. The technical support expiration date defines the date the agreement ends.80 and later versions include a compulsory technical support and maintenance agreement option.

fuel depots. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in gas stations. Operating Environment Do not operate Nemo Outdoor without reading the User Manual. Remember.BEFO RE Y O U BEG I N 27 IMPORTANT End-User License Agreement The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of that agreement. Finland assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the failure to comply with local legislation. Traffic Safety Do not operate Nemo Outdoor and drive (or walk) at the same time. . Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) in a hospital. Note that in some countries it is illegal to drive a car and operate a computer at the same time. see Appendix 8 on page 453. Always stop using Nemo Outdoor and switch off the Nemo Outdoor test device(s) when it is forbidden to use radio equipment or when it may cause interference or danger. traffic safety comes first. including its warnings. for the devices used by Nemo Outdoor. Never use Nemo Outdoor in an aircraft. The use of mobiles in an aircraft may be dangerous. Please observe the legislation of the country where the measurements are performed. For full details of this agreement. It may interfere with nearby electronic devices. or sites where blasting operations are in progress. chemical plants.

Especially note at this time that Anite Finland does not recommend using Toshiba laptop computers with Nemo Outdoor. The best operation times will be achieved when the batteries are regularly charged and discharged as instructed in the mobile user manual. . the battery operation time is reduced from normal use. GPRS. TM6200. and TM8200 chipset-based terminals that have not been verified by Anite Finland. Please check the Nemo Outdoor product description or the compatibility list in the user manual for a list of measurement terminals verified and approved by Anite Finland. Do not use the Nemo Outdoor test mobile’s keypad to make or answer calls when the Nemo Outdoor system is running. With Nokia GSM. and EDGE terminals the test display (Net Monitor) must not be activated. With Samsung terminals the key tone volume should be turned off. included with the Nemo Outdoor. These terminals can be used with Nemo Outdoor but Anite Finland does not guarantee that the terminals will work flawlessly. The Qualcomm handlers enables the use of Qualcomm CDMA2000. MSM6500. This is due to certain incompatibilities that may cause the USB port not working as desired. for connecting the Nemo Outdoor test devices to the computer’s serial port. TM6250. TM6275. the mobile can dial a wrong number. Otherwise. TM6275US. Do not place stickers containing metal on the mobile because it may lower the transmission power of the mobile. In voice quality measurements the volume of the mobile headset must be adjusted to correct levels. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page 389. After the measurements have been completed and it is desired to take the Nemo Outdoor test mobile into normal use. MSM6800. When using the Nemo Outdoor test mobile for measurement use. it must be powered off and on again to deselect/deactivate the Nemo Outdoor triggered events in the mobile. Use only the supplied connecting cable. TM7200.28 Nemo O ut door User M a nual NOTES The Nemo Outdoor user must be appropriately trained and should be familiar with the signaling behind wireless technologies.

The package also includes the necessary connecting cables. a GPS receiver.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 29 NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM OVERVIEW VOICE TESTING The voice testing environment consists of Nemo Outdoor compatible mobiles and a PC (user provided or. provided by Anite Finland with all the software installed) with the Windows® XP Professional or Windows® Vista operating system. Also the Nemo Voice Quality option is available. serial or USB port adapters. optionally. . and fast frequency scanners if applicable.

During the measurement. the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using a FTP server. the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server. HTTP. HTTP. The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP. It is a Linux-based administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. In the Send mode. If you are using an HTTP server. It is a Linuxbased administration-free server having up to four public IP addresses and it can serve multiple simultaneous TCP/IP connections from test terminals. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server. which in turn define the desired transfer rate. as well as certain parameters. Ping. the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers. SFTP. the measurement unit can only receive files. SMTP. IPerf for UDP/TCP. . Nemo Data Test Server supports FTP. such as coding scheme and number of timeslots. CS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support circuit-switched data. The dial-up server is used to establish a data connection between the measurement unit and the application server. and a dial-up server. Nemo Data Test Server can be used as the application server.30 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DATA TESTING The circuit-switched (CS) data testing environment consists of three parts: a measurement unit (Nemo Outdoor). The user can define the number of timeslots and the coding schemes. POP3. and RTSP (video streaming). Ping. IPerf for UDP/TCP. PS data testing is possible on all cellular technologies that support packet-switched data. Trace route testing and RTSP (video streaming). SFTP. POP3. in the Receive mode vice versa. an application server. PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TESTING The packet-switched (PS) data testing environments consist of two ends: the measurement unit and an application server. Trace route testing. SMTP.

During the measurement. in the Receive mode vice versa. . the user will be able to monitor data throughputs and error rates on different network layers. as well as certain parameters such as coding scheme and number of timeslots. In the Send mode. the measurement unit uploads (Send mode) or downloads (Receive mode) test files to or from the FTP server. If you are using an HTTP server.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 31 The data measurement system has two modes: Send and Receive. the measurement unit can only receive files. If you are using an FTP server. the measurement unit sends data packets to the application server.

The system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows benchmarking measurements to be performed on different system technologies such as GSM. i. With the professional high-quality lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use. preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. Nemo Outdoor Multi supports a total of seven test devices. up to five test mobiles. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. not only casual data benchmarking test cases that can be used to compare the performance of different technologies or operators. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a car’s +12VDC power output. WCDMA. and different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers. CDMA2000. EDGE. Combined with Nemo Server. but also long-term network performance measurements. Nemo Outdoor Multi-Data makes it easy to carry out. The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop. . HSDPA. and a GPS device.32 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. The Multi-Data functionality in Nemo Outdoor allows up to five concurrent data measurements to be performed simultaneously while the system is connected to a single laptop. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional tough roll-around carrying case.e. and WiMAX. scanners. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/data cards. voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously.NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM O VERVI EW 33 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls. In addition. . a scanner and a sound card. The system is connected to a single laptop. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.

. Just click markers along the measurement route and the route will be drawn on the map. As GPS receivers cannot be used indoors.34 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual INDOOR MEASUREMENTS Nemo Outdoor has an indoor measurement option in which case Nemo Outdoor can be installed on a Tablet PC. Alternatively normal laptop can be used as well. the indoor option offers a marker function to store location data. You can use floorplans as maps.

Use the Nemo Outdoor setup program to install Nemo Outdoor.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 35 INSTALLING NEMO OUTDOOR SYSTEM This section provides the basic instructions for installing Nemo Outdoor software and devices.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2. the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter.00GHz or higher required For voice quality measurements with up to four channels with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. Make sure you have all the listed equipment before starting the software installation. do not just copy the Nemo Outdoor files onto your computer. one USB port or serial port or RJ45 or FireWire port per scanner One serial port for each voice quality audio module or one USB port per sound card One USB port for an external GPS receiver Display resolution 1024 x 768 with 256 colors.bit) Professional or Windows 7 ® Professional (32-/64-bit).g. 1 GB recommended One USB port for copy protection module One USB port per mobile Depending on the scanner used. OTHER HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The following hardware is also supported for using Nemo Outdoor. Please note that the scanning receivers and many of the GPS receivers require also +12 V DC power supply (e. 1280 x 1024 recommended Internet Explorer 4.26GHz or higher required 100 MB of free hard disk space for installation and use. minimum 1GHz.7 GHz for single mobile measurements For multi data measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.0 or higher for viewing the help file If your computer does not have enough serial ports.. HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS                 PC (Lenovo or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP (32. Pentium III processor. preferably 1.26GHz or higher required 512MB RAM minimum. 1GB RAM recommended For multi data measurements with HSPA+ devices Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2.  External power supply recommended for computer if vehicle mounted . that is. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 345 for more information. from cigarette lighter plug).

010 data cable and a free USB port Nokia N75 mobile with the DKE-2 or the DKU-2 connectivity cable and a free USB port Nokia N95. OT 298. OT498. 6720. OT 490. N85US. N96US. 6120.010 data cable and a free USB port Leadcore LC8310E mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4. OT590R mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port Motorola V3X.370. N97 and N97US mobile with the micro USB cable and a free USB port SAGEM OT 260 or OT 268 mobile with the single data cable SAGEM OT 290. N96. N95 US.36 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  GPS receiver: (optional. N85. 6121. V9 or V9US mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Huawei C7600 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port . OT 490 mobile with the 2 SL OT M42 Kit or USB cable SAGEM OT 460. or 3500 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Nokia C5.370. 6720US. following types are supported)         Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Garmin V Garmin 18 USB Trimble Placer 450/455 (TAIP) and GPS antenna unit Most other GPS receivers with NMEA 0183 compatible output  DKU-2 USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:    Nokia 6230i Nokia 6630 Nokia 6680  DKU-2 or CA-53 cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:    Nokia N80 Nokia 6136 Nokia N92  DKE-2 or mini USB cable and a free USB port for the following Nokia mobiles:  Nokia 7376           Datang DTM8101 or DTM8120 mobile with the 18Pin SDTM 4.

MSM6500 Compatible. Plug the other end of the DMAC cable into the mobile. When the Installation program starts. and LHD-200E mobile with a LG VX6100/VX7000. TM6250. NEMO OUTDOOR DEVICE SET-UP Below you will find instructions for connecting devices to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. or P920mobile with the PCB157ULE USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z560 or ZX20 mobile with the mini USB cable and a free USB port Samsung Z720. instructions for devices that require a dial-up connection can be found in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Plug the single data cable into the computer physical serial port.g. Connecting SAGEM OT 260/268 Mobile  To connect the test mobile for measurement: 1. Select Start | Run in the Windows® Status bar.xx. C680. installation must be run under Administrator account or other user account with administrative privileges. Z500.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 37        Samsung SGH-Z105. Z107. you will need to restart the computer. Insert a SIM card into the Nemo Outdoor test mobile. TM6275. Z140. drive D). or A707 mobile with the PCB200BBE USB cable and a free USB port Qualcomm CDMA2000 Compatible. Type D:\Nemo Outdoor 5\Nemo Outdoor x. 3. Start Windows® and insert the Nemo Outdoor CD-ROM in your CD drive (e. KQ-U8A cable and a free USB port Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software is protected with a copy protection dongle. See page 23 for more information about copy protection.. NEMO OUTDOOR SOFTWARE INSTALLATION  To install the Nemo Outdoor Measurement Software: 1. When the Nemo Outdoor software installation is complete. 2. 2. . ZV10. C270. MSM6800 Compatible. Switch the Nemo Outdoor test mobile on. 4.xx in the Open field (xx refers to the version number) and click the OK button. However. follow the instructions on your screen.  Note that for Windows® XP and Windows® Vista. TM6275US or TM7200 mobile with a USB cable and a free USB port LG U800 or KU950 mobile with a mini USB cable and a free USB port LG KX260. TM6200. C676. 3.

Switch on the GPS receiver. 2. Plug the other end of the cable into the GPS receiver. Connect the cable of the GPS antenna unit to the GPS receiver. 6. Start Nemo Outdoor. . 5. Click OK. Select the USB port to which your GPS receiver is connected. Plug the GPS USB cable into a USB port on your computer. Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. Refer to Appendix 1 on page 345 for more information. Click on GPS. Open the Configuration Manager. if applicable. Open the Configuration Manager. 2. 4. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next. Connect the power cable to the GPS receiver (see the GPS receiver manual). 7. if applicable. Windows will automatically detect the new device and install the necessary drivers. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table: Navigator Type Garmin GPS II Garmin GPS II Plus Garmin GPS III/III+ Garmin GPS 35 Trimble Placer GPS 450/455 Baud rate 4800 4800 4800 4800 9600 Data bits 8 8 8 8 8 Parity None None None None None Stop bits 1 1 1 1 1 9. Click on GPS. 5.  To connect the USB GPS receiver: 1. 4. Select the serial port to which your GPS receiver is connected. the PCMCIA slot can be converted to one or more serial ports by using a PCMCIA serial I/O adapter card or a USB serial converter. if applicable. 3. select Device and click the Add button . Start Nemo Outdoor. Plug the GPS data cable into a free serial port on your computer.38 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Connecting a GPS Receiver  To connect the serial GPS receiver: 1.  If your computer does not have enough serial ports. 3. The program automatically sets the other parameters to match your navigator selection according to the following table: Navigator Type Garmin 18 USB Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 6. 8. Click OK. select Device and click the Add button . Your GPS receiver is now ready for measurements. Select your GPS model from the list and click Next.

. For a list of necessary hardware. The graph below depicts the system when it is purchased without the carrying case. Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device Below you will see the two different options as of Nemo Outdoor Multi system that. follow these instructions in order to connect the scanner to Nemo Outdoor. If an external fast frequency scanner for a computer’s serial port is used.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 39 Connecting a Scanner See Scanner User Guide for information on how to connect and start scanners with Nemo Outdoor. See page 354 for further information on how to set up the system. refer to page 36.

Connecting Voice Quality Devices Please refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide on page 375 for complete installation and configuration instructions.40 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The graph below displays the system as when purchased with the carrying case. .

 = 19 cm Check the configuration before starting the measurement. Loose connections cause unstable measurements or wrong attenuation of field strength.  = 16 cm GPS antenna 1565-1575MHz. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz.I NS TALLI NG NEM O O UTDO O R SY STEM 41 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR DRIVE TESTING Check the condition of all antennas.  Individual antennas and the mobile holder antenna couplers may have different performance. no slashes or cuts.  = 17 cm 1900 MHz. Hold the antenna from the base and tilt the antenna away from the cable. DO NOT pull antennas from the antenna cables.  = 66 cm 900 MHz. Check that connectors are properly connected. If antennas are too close to each other. it may cause interference. and connectors: there should be no tight curves. When removing antennas after a drive test. Place antennas properly on the roof of the vehicle. . and two wavelengths from each other. cables. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the corners and roof windows.  = 33 cm 1800 MHz.

The following instructions will help you in this initial configuration. If you do not want to view this window in the future when opening Nemo Outdoor.  Please note that the automatic detection is only available for devices connected with a USB cable. you may need to select the correct device model from the drop-down menu. Older users of Nemo Outdoor may want to use the Load Device Configuration dialog. and matches a dial-up connection with the assigned modem port for the device. Furthermore. The Nemo Outdoor Welcome page offers an easy way to configure the system for a first-time user. you will need to configure the system for your environment before you will be able to use the measurement functions. and more advanced users may want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually. CONFIGURING NEMO OUTDOOR You have three different ways to start using Nemo Outdoor. and also helps more advanced users to add new devices. 2. . you can automatically add devices to Nemo Outdoor without needing to manually set up the system. select the Do not show this again option. For a first-time user the most convenient way is to start with the Welcome page and proceed from there. This functionality automatically searches the Device Manager for the assigned modem and trace COM port information. With the Automatic device detection functionality in the Create New Device Configuration tool. It appears on the screen when you start Nemo Outdoor. Configuration through Welcome page 1.42 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CONFIGURATION SETTINGS After you have installed Nemo Outdoor.

3.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 43  Note that this functionality varies depending on the device vendor. . This includes the dial-up connection and the trace and modem COM ports assigned to the device. e. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions on how to do this. or refresh the device configuration by clicking the Refresh button on the bottom right-hand corner of the window. This is useful.. The COM ports are created with the dial-up connection.g. select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. In addition. The device may also require additional configurations in its modem settings. In the Open a Device Configuration tool you can select saved device configurations. You can start the devices in online mode by clicking the Start Devices button below. start them in offline mode by clicking the Work Offline button. 5. you may need to create a dial-up connection for the device before connecting it to Nemo Outdoor. If you would like to start Nemo Outdoor in online mode. You can also browse for a workspace file (similar to File/Open Workspace) from the welcome dialog. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. 4. when you accidentally unplug a device and plug it in again.

In the Workspace field you can select a workspace for the measurement. . select a pre-made device configuration in the Open a Device Configuration tool and click the Work Offline button. that is. If you want. without connecting and starting the measurement devices. Click Load Selected Files. 7. you can configure the devices manually and activate them. The Load a Measurement tool enables you to open a previously viewed measurement with the attached devices for playback.44 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline. When you want to activate the devices. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Offline button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.

click Other… in the Open a Device Configuration field in the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window. If you are a first-time user of Nemo Outdoor. select a pre-made device configuration and a workspace and click Start Devices. 2. 1.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 45 Configuration through Load Device Configuration Dialog To view the Load Device Configuration dialog. go to step 4. All the devices included in the device configuration file will be activated and you are ready to start measurements. If you have used Nemo Outdoor previously and saved a device configuration and a workspace. Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load a device configuration and a workspace. . If you have used Nemo Outdoor before and would like to start in online mode.

Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices . For example. MDM7200 (HSUPA) and HSPA+ trace messages are not activated. connect the devices to the measurement system and click the Work Online button in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6280 . All Qualcomm terminals are unified into one Qualcomm handler. that is. 6. When you want to activate the devices. 5. Before trace message activation application is checking is the licence valid for such a device. if device supports MDM8200 chipset (HSPA+) these trace messages are automatically activated. or GPS receiver from the list and click Next. In the Load Device Configuration dialog. 4.g. without connecting and starting the measurement devices. MDM8200 devices (HSPA+ devices). select a pre-made device configuration and click the Work Offline button in the Load Device Configuration dialog. select Empty Device Configuration and click Start Devices. If license do not cover e. The following Qualcomm chipsets are supported:      Qualcomm TM6200 Qualcomm TM6250 Qualcomm TM6275 . An empty Nemo Outdoor main window appears. If you prefer setting up the measurement configuration offline.46 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3.g. Choose the appropriate phone. scanner. Add a device by selecting Measurement | Add New Device.Compatible with Qualcomm HSDPA devices Qualcomm TM6275 US . device is added to Nemo Outdoor application with an other chipset support e. Nemo Outdoor application detects the chipset of the test device and activates traces accordingly. You can change the measurement configurations in the offline mode and activate the device.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 47      Qualcomm TM7200 . Here you will find device-specific measurement settings. A properties dialog will be opened for the selected device. Configuring Nemo Outdoor Manually If you want to configure Nemo Outdoor manually. select a device and configure it for measurements.Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices Qualcomm MDM9600 . You can either go to Measurement | Autodetect Devices. Here you will find general measurement settings that affect all devices. and select a saved measurement for playback. 9. In addition. Double-click the User Interface item in the Configuration Manager (alt+M) to open the User Interface Properties dialog. you can go to Measurement | Add New Device.Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ devices Qualcomm TM8220 .Compatible with Qualcomm LTE devices 7. you can use the Autodetect devices functionality which automatically detects a previously added device and its assigned COM ports and dial-up connection for network measurements. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. Alternatively. close the Welcome page or Load Device Configuration dialog when you start Nemo Outdoor.Compatible with Qualcomm HSUPA devices Qualcomm TM8200 . You can go to File | Open Measurement. Set the appropriate parameters and click OK. Set the appropriate values and click OK.Compatible with Qualcomm HSPA+ dual carrier devices Qualcomm MDM9200 . You can now start the measurements. or go click the Configuration Manager icon in the toolbar and select Autodetect Devices in the Configuration Manager window. . 8. or you can open a saved device configuration in File | Open Device Configuration and start a measurement in online or offline mode. Click on Measurement Properties in the Phone/Scanner Properties dialog to enter the Measurement Properties dialog.

Select Add Devices in Specific Order to select the order of the added devices. In the user interface. 2. On the General page. perform the following configurations. Use Case 1. In the Add Devices dialog you can select a device and move it up or down in the list to define the device order with the arrow buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog. .48 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual A dialog with a list of previously added devices and their dial-up connection appears. Start Measurements Automatically upon Device Startup The following example case exemplifies the process of setting up Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically when devices are connected and started. Click Add Devices to add the devices to Nemo Outdoor. Select the devices you want to add. and click the Add Devices tab at the bottom of the Autodetect Devices dialog. Go to View | User Interface Properties. 1. select the Start recording automatically when devices are started option.

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 49 .

measurements will start automatically as long as the correct device configuration file and workspace are selected. 5. when carrying out measurements. the PIN Code Request and Automatic Redial options must be turned OFF. and File | Save Device Configuration As. To configure the Nemo Outdoor test mobiles for PS data testing purposes. see the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland. Please consult the mobile user manual to find these options from the mobile. The next time you start Nemo Outdoor. Save the workspace and hardware configuration files by selecting File | Save Workspace As. On the Measurement page select Yes in the Start scripts automatically field. However. 6. Close Nemo Outdoor.50 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. Net Monitoring must be switched off with the Nokia mobiles listed below:  Nokia 6230i .  Always keep the test mobile connected to a charger. 4. Click OK. CONFIGURING TEST MOBILES The Phone Settings of the Nemo Outdoor test mobile can be user defined. if possible.

You can access the view either by pressing Ctrl+M or by clicking the Configuration Manager toolbar button . Double-clicking on the Measurement Properties item leads to the User Interface | Measurement view on page 55. The default System Properties view shows the general system properties for Nemo Outdoor. The Configuration Manager view consists of several items. Select an item from the list and click the Properties button . can be configured. except Handler Information. . All these items.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 51 CONFIGURATION MANAGER VIEW Configuring Nemo Outdoor for your environment is accomplished in the Configuration Manager view in Nemo Outdoor.

you must have the corresponding handler installed. Each device has its own handler.52 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Handler Information Under Handler Information. All the handlers that you have purchased can be found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. you will find a list of handlers that have been installed on your computer. . and in order to use them in Nemo Outdoor.

See page 307 for more information on using the view groups. Under Color Palettes you will find colors used in the views (see page 59). You can define the format in which various parameter values are presented through the Presentation modes item (see page 58). Notifications. see page 278. Color Palettes. Select the User Interface Properties button and double-click on it to open the User Interface Properties dialog. View Groups refers to sets of windows that are open at the same time. Color sets.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 53 User Interface The user interface (UI) of Nemo Outdoor is very flexible so that you can configure the windows and graphs to serve your needs. you will find seven items: User Interface Properties. Scripts. and View Groups. Presentation modes. The Custom Windows folder contains premade measurement windows for quick startup. . Clicking on Color Sets will view the available color sets in the Configuration Manager view. For further information on how to create color sets. Under the User Interface item. Custom Windows.

When the Show welcome window when application is launched option is selected. for example. The size of the buffer affects how far back you can view a file during measurement. the Welcome to Nemo Outdoor window is displayed. Selecting the Show a dialog for critical errors option will display a message box when there is a problem with one of the devices or with the measurement file writing. Select the Play audio quality samples during playback option to play the audio samples used in audio quality measurements also during playback. . Selecting the Show 'Pause' dialog when measurement is paused option will display a message when the measurement has been paused. and also when changing from offline mode to online mode. Selecting the Show report after measurement ends option will display a summary of all test calls after the measurement is ended. Select the Open Script Status window when script is started option to automatically open the Script Status window when script files are used in measurements. Save workspace settings on exit option defines whether the workspace settings are saved when you exit the SW so that they will be activated automatically. Selecting the Start recording automatically when devices are started option enables Nemo Outdoor to start recording automatically at device startup.54 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual User Interface Properties – General Buffer Size specifies the number of events stored in the history buffer of the user interface. windows will be opened the next time you start the SW.

The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds. e.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 55 With the Show ‘Stop Recording Query’ dialog before recording is stopped option selected.. In that case recording must be stopped and measurement properties changed before the missing neighbor functionality can be enabled. note that you are not able to enable the missing neighbor functionality if active measurement properties do not support missing neighbor detection. 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. . Filename defines the filename format. For example. Here you can make settings affecting all measurements. a dialog appears at the end of the measurement to make sure you really want to stop recording. Selecting the Show Close Full Screen window in Full Screen mode option will enable you to exit the Full Screen mode through an UI button. However. The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. a notification dialog will appear reminding you to enable missing neighbor detection when a scanner and a test terminal are connected to Nemo Outdoor and missing neighbor detection is not currently enabled. the Missing Neighbor Detection dialog will appear. User Interface Properties – Measurement By double-clicking the Measurement item in the Configuration Manager window you will access the Measurement tab in the User Interface Properties dialog.g. If you agree to enable the missing neighbor detection functionality through the dialog. When the Show ‘Enable Missing Neighbor Query’ dialog when recording is started option is selected.

Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 – 59) Week of year as decimal number. select the Synchronize script repeats option to force Nemo Outdoor to wait until all scripts for all devices are finished before repeating the scripts. no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. You can use this option to keep a GPRS mobile in active state when toggling a script on and off. no characters if time zone is unknown %Z With the Start scripts automatically option.56 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual %a %A %b %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366) Month as decimal number (01 – 12) Minute as decimal number (00 – 59) Sequence number (1 – ) Sequence number (1 – ) Current locale's A./P. you can order Nemo Outdoor to start executing the script file when you click the Start Recording button in the main window. . With the Force idle mode when stopping scripts option you can force the measurement mobile to return to idle mode if the script is interrupted. as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6. depending on registry settings.M. depending on registry settings. When the option is set to No. Select the Stop measurement after script is finished option to force Nemo Outdoor to stop recording after the script is finished. If you are making measurements with multiple devices and multiple scripts. the mobile will stay in the current state when script is stopped.M. as decimal number (00 – 99) Year with century. with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53) Year without century.

For instructions on making new color sets. A World. Local Files refers to the files that are used in FTP testing. Nemo Outdoor will use PC time. In the picture above. Outdoor uses the ETSI specification-based definition of the start and end time of a call User Interface Properties – Paths In the Paths tab you can define locations for different files. Report Files are the files created during timeslot testing. When the Use ETSI compatible call connection trigger option is set to Yes. you can see the default values. see page 278. Remove all forcing functions when device is started option deactivates all forcing functions from the device when the device is started. Select the Redial after dropped call option to automatically make a new call if a call is dropped during measurements. In the Default Map field. you can enter a map file that will be opened by default. During measurements. click on the … button and browse for a new location. Select the Wait for GPS fix before starting measurement option if you would like to start measuring only after there is a GPS fix. Default Color Set refers to the color set that is opened by default on the map. Also define the time in seconds after which the call will be redialed.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 57 With the Use time from GPS option you can order Nemo Outdoor to use GPS time at the start of the measurement.tab map file is provided by Anite Finland in the installation package. . To change the default paths.

User Interface Properties – Presentation In the Presentation tab you can define the format in which various parameter values are presented.58 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files for notifications In the Sounds field.  Note that BTS files and script files do not apply to scanners. select C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female if you want to use female sounds or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male if you want to use male sounds. .

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 59 User Interface Properties – Colors In the Colors page you can define colors used for devices. graph lines. click the New button. To make new palettes. The other colors are used to draw graph lines and map routes. and define all the colors. and map routes. type a name for the new palette. To change the palette. The first eight colors are reserved for devices. select a palette from the Color palette list. .

60 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Notifications Notifications are graphical. but you can also add your own notifications. or values in the measurement file. for example. The notifications come in handy when you are looking for certain events. and audio notifications marking certain events. Nemo Outdoor includes some premade notifications. By double-clicking a notification the Notification window appears. A textual notification is displayed in the Output window by default. Nemo Outdoor will either play a sound or display a . textual.png image in a graph/map when the defined event occurs during measurements. sound files and icons associated with the notification. . There you can make changes to. parameters. Depending on your configuration.

Double-click the User Configurable item to open the Notifications dialog. define which one you would like to use (see page 57). Use the Play button to listen to the file. you should create the files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\ Nemo Shared Files \Images.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 61 Notification Configuration To make your own notifications.wav) to the notifications. If you want to attach your own sound files (. In the User Interface Properties – Paths dialog. The table displays all existing notifications. Nemo Outdoor offers male and female sound files. . The button will display a preview of the selected image. From the table you can see the notification title and the selected sound and bitmap file for each notification. Sound file defines an audio file for the selected notification. Activate a sound and/or bitmap file for a notification by selecting and clearing the options in the list. expand the Notifications item in the Configuration Manager window. Browse a sound file in the field or use the default file. Bitmap file defines a graphical notification for the selected notification. you should create the sound files and add them in the folder C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Male or C:\Nemo Tools\Nemo Shared Files\Sounds\Female. If you want to attach your own bitmaps to the notifications. Browse a bitmap file in the field or use the default file.

.62 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click the Add button to create new notifications in the Notification Criteria dialog. You can add several criteria for each notification. Then define the Condition and Value for the selected parameter. Click the Field button and select the parameter that you want to use in the notification. Notify when these criteria are met table displays the criteria for the selected notification. Finally click Add to list to add the new criteria for the notification. The notification is also available in the Measurement Properties | Notifications dialog where you can activate the notification for a specific device. Select the Notify only once when criteria are met option when you want be notified about certain events only once. Finally click OK and the notification is saved and added in the Notifications dialog where you can attach sound and bitmap files to the notification. Title defines a name for the notification.

 To make user-configurable notifications: 1. Select the notification from the list and select how you would like to be notified. In the Notifications dialog. The Notification Properties button will open the Notification Configuration dialog where you can edit the notification settings (see page 61 for more information). you can select and clear all items in the list. Click OK to save the settings. Open the Notifications dialog (Configuration Manager. double-click on UserConfigurable) and click Add. 3. click the Configure Notifications button in the Device Info window. . 4. By clicking the Select All and Clear All buttons. Notifications dialog. This will open the Measurement Properties. define the notification criteria and click OK. 2. Notifications. In the Notification Criteria dialog. Select the notifications you would like to use in the measurement and click OK. select the notification that you just created.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 63 To activate a notification for a particular device. The table displays a list of notifications that can be activated for the selected device. Define sound and bitmap files for the notification and activate them by selecting the options in the notifications table.

64 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Scripts  Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. Scripts can be used to perform measurements automatically instead of performing manual calls or data transfers. Under the Script item you will find premade scripts and user-defined scripts. . Creating Script files is described in more detail on page 162. Double-click on any of these scripts to open the Script Editor dialog. Doubleclick the Scripts item to open a list of scripts in the Configuration Manager view.

You can load a . The new .hwc file will appear in the Configuration Manager. add devices manually in Nemo Outdoor and configure them. Alternatively. You can use the device configurations to quickly start measurements with Nemo Outdoor without having to detect and configure the measurement devices each time you start Nemo Outdoor. select File | Save Device Configuration As and type a name for the saved file. .hwc file by selecting File | Open Device Configuration. To rename a device configuration. you can load a device configuration when you start Nemo Outdoor by selecting it in the Load device Configuration dialog. double-click the respective item in the Configuration Manager and type a new name in the Rename HW Config dialog.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 65 Device Configurations Under Device Configurations. When everything is ready. Device Configurations folder. To make new device configurations. A device configuration contains information on devices and their measurement configurations.hwc). you will find a list of device configuration files (.

Note that you can add a new device from the plus icon . and remove a device by selecting the device and clicking on the minus icon . GPS. and scanner) has its own properties dialog. Double-clicking on the device will open the applicable device properties dialog. These dialogs are presented next.66 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Devices Under the Devices item are listed all the devices that you have connected to Nemo Outdoor. . Each device (mobile.

and makes it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. Below that field is a field displaying the current status of the device. .CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 67 Phone Properties The field at the top displays the device type and model. The Label field allows you to give a label such as a comment or a name for the phone. and the information is also stored in the log file header.

Samsung and Qualcomm mobiles: In the Modem Port field select the port assigned to the Qualcomm Proprietary USB Modem. Nokia 3G mobiles: Three modem ports are created. Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further information. or DKU-5 cable is connected.68 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Trace Port and Modem Port  Motorola mobiles: Trace port is the port assigned to Motorola Network Monitor. If you are making PS data measurements. You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager button). the second the modem port and the third the port for dial-up connection. With a DKU-5 cable. You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager button). Expand the Ports item and you will find the Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem Secondary port item and the corresponding COM port. DKU-2. Samsung and Qualcomm mobiles: Trace port is the port assigned to Qualcomm Diagnostics Interface. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. the first of which is the trace port. Expand the Ports item and you will find the Motorola Network Monitor (COMx) there. Packet Switched Dial-Up Connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. Note that in the modem properties for Nokia 3G phones. select a dial-up connection here. Data cards: Trace port is the port assigned to Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem Secondary port. With these devices the modem port selection can be left empty.  Data cards: In the Modem Port field select the port assigned to Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem Primary Port. Nokia mobiles: Modem port is the port where you installed the modem during dial-up networking installation. Expand the Modems item and you will find the Novatel Wireless UMTS Modem Primary Port item and the corresponding COM port. SAGEM GPRS mobiles: Trace port is the port where the SL2 cable or USB cable is connected.           Please note that certain Qualcomm-compatible devices do not support the use of a modem port. Nokia 2G mobiles: Trace port is the port where the DAU-9P. See the Dial-Up Networking Setup guide provided by Anite Finland for detailed instructions for configuring dial-up connections. The USB cable should be connected to this port. an additional “atz” command needs to be added for the connection to work. If you are making CS data measurements. Expand the Ports item and you will find the Qualcomm Diagnostics Interface (COMx) item there. . SAGEM GPRS mobiles: Modem port is the port where the SL1 cable is connected. You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager button). Circuit Switched Dial-Up Connection list box gives a list of all the dial-up connections that have been configured on your computer. You will find this port from Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager button). SAGEM GSM mobiles: Trace port is the port where the single data cable is connected. the modem port is the same as the trace port. select a dial-up connection here.

Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings. leave these values blank. Select Disabled when you do not wish to carry out voice quality measurements.5 m. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. Select the Sound card channel option to use the USB sound card for voice quality measurements. click OK. To exit the dialog. You can also enter the Measurement Properties dialog through Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties in the menu bar. 10 W Linear vertical Mini Low Loss 2.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 69 Antenna Gain and Cable Loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m. . If you are using the internal antenna of each phone.27 Frequency range 824– 894/1710– 1880/ 1850–2170 MHz 1140.55/ 0. Select the Nemo audio module option to use the Nemo audio module for voice quality measurements. This parameter is needed only if you are using external antennas. SMA male Antenna gain (dBd) 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq. After you have configured the device. Antenna type 1140. you will have to ask the antenna gain and cable loss information from the manufacturer. SMA male The above examples can only be used with antennas received from Anite Finland Ltd.82 dB/m Cable & connector Mini Low Loss 2. or Smarteq. If you are using antennas from other antenna manufacturers. Impedance VSWR 1 Max power 10 W Linear vertical Polarization Cable loss -0.5 m. You can define the port where the Nemo voice quality unit is connected in the dropdown menu. Select the applicable sound card channel in the drop-down menu.26 890– 960/1850– 1990/ 1710–2170 MHz 0 dBd 50 ohm 2:1 @ specified freq.

70 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Scanner Properties The Device information field displays the device type and model. Baud Rate refers to the communication speed. Antenna gain for PCTEL EX/LX scanner: PCTEL Part OP039 OP042 Antenna Maxrad Part MLPV1700 MLPVDB800/ 1900 Base Maxrad Part RBGML195MSMA RBGML195MSMA Type Single Dual Band Frequency 1700-2700MHz 806-960 MHz and 1710-1990 MHz 698-2300MHz 690-920 MHz Gain 4dBi 3dBi/4dBi OP078H OP079 1dBi >1dBi @ 690780 MHz >0 dBi @ 785920 MHz . In the Label field you can define a suitable label for the device. See the tables below for the antenna gain and cable loss values for the PCTEL LX UMTS scanner. and the information is also stored in the log file header. making it easier to identify the device during measurement and post processing. for example. Antenna Gain and Cable Loss are antenna-related parameters and they are used in the conversion from dBm to dBuV/m by some radio network planning tools. a name or a usage purpose. Port refers to the port to which the scanner is connected. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback.

7. Data Bits. 6. click OK.6 GHz 900 MHz db/100 ft. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly. for example. To exit the dialog. The label can be seen in the Nemo Outdoor user interface during a measurement and playback. the options for Parity are Even. click the Apply button to check that the device is working properly.1/100' 16/100’ Clicking on the Measurement Properties button will lead to the Measurement Properties dialog where you can make device-specific measurement settings (see page 72).CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 71 Cable loss for PCTEL EX/LX scanner: Frequency 2. and Odd. The available values are 1200.8 GHz 1. Baud Rate refers to the communication speed. In the Label field you can define a label for the GPS device. 4800. Parity and Stop Bits are other communication-related parameters. After you have configured the device. None. and 8. and the information is also stored in the log file header. Check your GPS receiver documentation. The default value for Stop bits is 1.4 GHz 1.5 GHz 2. . Serial Port refers to the port to which the GPS receiver is connected. making it easier to identify devices during measurement and post processing. and 9600. 19/100' 28/100’ 16/100' 22/100’ 11. You should set these values the same as in your GPS. After you have configured the device. click OK. The available values for Data bits are 5. a name or a usage purpose. 2400. GPS Properties The field at the top displays the device type and model. To exit the dialog.

as Nemo Outdoor does not recognize the network that each mobile is using. Anritsu.). . and DTX. you can view the measurement vehicle on the map and a line will be drawn from the measurement vehicle to the active base station. The network name is presented in the output files and helps you to recognize which network you have been monitoring. on the device model (Nokia. A1.nbf). If you have a GPS receiver connected to the system. LG. for example. Note that you should enter the name yourself. BTS file defines the base station file that will be displayed on the map.). LTE. Measurement Properties – General Network name field can be used for stating the friendly name for the network (operator) that Nemo Outdoor measures with the respective test mobile. and on the technology supported by the device (UMTS. etc. Sonera. etc.72 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MEASUREMENT PROPERTIES The Measurement Properties dialog contains several pages and the contents depend on the device type (mobile or scanner). Click the … button to browse for a BTS file (. CDMA.

This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.   Note that the Enable RLC Data messages item should not be enabled with data connections 384kbit/s or higher as this may cause instability in the measurement terminal. The parameters in the Measurement Options list vary depending on the device.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This will decrease output file size. Please note that when measuring with a LX GSM/WCDMA scanner in a WCDMA network. The selection depends on the measurement device used. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 73 By clicking the Advanced button.  . the internal GPS receiver should be activated. you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. A separate . the disabled messages will not be recorded in the measurement file. To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. Here you can enable and disable various measurement options such as layer messages. If you disable some of the options.

See page 141 for more information. Selected Data Protocol defines which data protocol is used to perform data transfers. Enable VoIP Measurements option. Circuit-Switched Data Call opens the Data Call Properties dialog. The Measurement Settings page of the Measurement Properties dialog is available for mobiles only. Multimedia Messaging Service button opens the Packet Session Settings. See page 143 for more information on SMS testing. MMS dialog. See page 145 for more information on MMS testing. Clicking the field of a selected data protocol will open a dialog for configuring the selected data protocol. See page 106 for more information. Voice Call opens the Voice Call Properties dialog. See page115 for more information. . See page 111 for more information. DTMF characters field can be used to send DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) tones during a voice call. opens the SIP server and VoIP call dialogs. Clicking the Supported Data Protocols field opens a list of supported data protocols. Packet Session opens the Packet Session Settings dialog. See page 116 for more in formation. Short Messaging Service button opens the SMS Testing dialog.74 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Measurement Settings You are able to make measurement type specific configurations by clicking the corresponding field in the dialog. Video Call button opens the Video Call Properties dialog. when selected.

Enable frequency scanning option must be selected to activate frequency scanning for the mobile. e.g. Scanning Options view lets you choose among various scanning options. . With TOP-N scanning it is possible to get TOP-N channel results for each band. for EGSM. The TOP-N scanning functionality can be used for scanning the strongest channels in GSM.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 75 Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Mobiles  Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports frequency scanning. GSM900 and GSM1800. Selecting the BSIC Decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. The benefits also include the possibility to benchmark different operators.

Select one band from the list or all of them. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list... An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.items from current band. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. To remove all channels. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.. click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. To remove channels from the Selected list. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | .76 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual If you select BSIC decoding or Missing neighbor detection. items from every band. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . . If all bands are selected. click the Add All button. Alternatively. the Select Channels dialog appears. To select all available channels for scanning.. click the Remove All button.

.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 77 If TOP-N option is selected. the following dialog appears through the Channel Configuration. Define the number of strongest channels to be searched in the TOP-N field. In the TOP-N Configuration dialog you can set the Start and Stop ARFCN range between which the TOP-N channels are recorded. The maximum number of TOP-N channels is 32. button. . Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Mobiles  Note that this page is only visible in a phone's Measurement Properties dialog if the terminal supports pilot scanning.. You can click on the Clear all button to clear the table.

Click on the Channel Configuration button to enter the Select Channels view. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning.. Click OK to exit the dialog.. To add channels to the Selected list. To select all available channels for scanning. items from every band. click the Add All button. Alternatively. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. If all bands are selected..78 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Enable pilot scanning option must be selected to activate pilot scanning for the mobile. If you select All in the Band drop-down menu. Select a value for the CPICH RSCP threshold field. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . In the Scanning Options view you can select Missing neighbor detection as a scanning mode. channels from all bands will be viewed.items from current band. The device will only report cells with CPICH RSCP above the set value. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add.. . In the Band drop-down menu you can select a band from which to view channels from in the Available view. click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply doubleclick a channel to add it to the Selected list.

BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. in dB. . Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. of the number of samples.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 79 Measurement Properties – Frequency Scanning with Scanners The Frequency scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30 kHz narrow. Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. The contents of the sub-pages are technology-specific.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Frequency Scanning with GSM Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.

When the System information decoding option is selected. Mobile Network Code. click the Remove All button. you can access a dialog where you select the channels that will be scanned. To remove all channels. Click on a channel in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. To remove channels from the Selected list. First select the Band. Click OK to exit the dialog. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has been purchased with the scanner. By clicking the Select Channels button. Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can be decoded from BCCH messages. To select all available channels for scanning. click the Add All button. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. This option is available with the PCTEL GSM scanner only. L3 messages are written in the log file. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. .80 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the C TRL key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. Cell information decoding.

Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. of the number of samples.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 81 Frequency Scanning with UMTS Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. By clicking the Select Channels button. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. . Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. in dB.

 RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level.82 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frequency Scanning with LTE Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. By clicking the Select Channels button. . of the number of samples. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. in dB. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).

 RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. in dB.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 83 Frequency Scanning with CDMA/EV-DO Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. of the number of samples. By clicking the Select Channels button. . you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80). Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel.  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. you can access the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80). Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. in dB. of the number of samples.84 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frequency Scanning with WiMAX Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. . Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. By clicking the Select Frequencies button.

Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. . you can access the Select Channels dialog (see page 80).  RX level average: the data reported is the average RX level. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. of the number of samples.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 85 Frequency Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. By clicking the Select Channels button. in dB.

the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Pilot Scanning with UMTS Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. . value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. If the values are below the threshold. The contents of the sub-pages are technologyspecific. In aggregate method. the pilots are not reported. CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No.86 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Pilot Scanning with Scanners The Pilot scanning page of the Measurement Properties dialog is further divided into sub-pages based on the cellular technology supported by the scanner. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

  In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 87 Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning. The Channel number field provides a list of channels that can be selected for scanning. Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling code. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. . When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. In high speed mode. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. You can view the missing neighbor information. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips. Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement. Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB). for example. When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected. in a grid view. S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. Selective level determines a valid path. L3 messages are written in the log file. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. When the System information decoding option is selected. Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. weak pilots may be undetected. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor (average value). If enabled. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the log file for both GSM and WCDMA. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner.

If you press the arrow. In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and consequently speed up the search. a drop-down menu will appear from where you can select Top-N Search Configuration. Search method defines how the search is performed. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. Channelization code specifies the channelization code.  Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners only. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel) searches with P-CPICH. Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. . Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63. Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7.88 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH.

with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. 1:4 and 1:8. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. In aggregate method. If enabled. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. 1:2. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 89 Pilot Scanning with LTE Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. scanner will report results from N best cells. RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to notify you of. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. With Autodetect selected. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID. the scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type. The available options are 1:1. . If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated.

Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the interference and noise from the same reference signal set. “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions.. Each radio frame of length Tf  307200  Ts  10 ms consists of two half-frames of length 153600 Ts  5 ms each. “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS. you can also define some channel-specific settings. select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the settings. Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure. for each subframe in a radio frame. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time.90 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. Carrier refers to either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type. Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 30720 Ts  1 ms . The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below where. primary and secondary signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set. Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel.  Note that the available options are device specific. When you select LTE channels. GP and UpPTS. In the LTE Channel Specific Settings dialog.e. i. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. .

CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 91 One radio frame . . T f = 307200 T s = 10 ms One half -frame. T slot=15360 Ts Subframe #0 One subframe . 153600 Ts = 5 ms One slot. 30720 Ts DwPTS 30720T s Subframe #2 Subframe #3 Subframe #4 Subframe #5 Subframe #7 Subframe #8 Subframe #9 GP UpPT S D wPTS GP UpPT S Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity): Uplink-downlink configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D Pilot Scanning with EV-DO Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific.

1:2. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. Wide and Very Wide. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. If the values are below the threshold. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. The sensitivity will not be affected but the scanning speed will be slower as the search window is increased. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific.92 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Channel style refers to the style of the channel. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. when selected. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. If enabled. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The Wide and Very Wide options can be used to detect pilots far away from the base stations. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. 1:4 and 1:8. It is reported in chips. Overhead message decoding. . scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. the pilots are not scanned. The available options are 1:1. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. For Pilot window search mode the options are Standard. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. In aggregate method. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning.

Chip window size defines the length of pilot window in chips from 1 to 64. For example. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. the pilots are not scanned. In aggregate method. If the values are below the threshold. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. This value is used to establish the number of chips to be searched for pilot across (Pilot Window Length) and to define the position of these chips Pilot Window Mode in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). when using correlator size 2048 versus 512. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. the dynamic range for pilot measurement changes from –21db to –17db. Correlator affects how the scanner works. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 93 Pilot Scanning with CDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. Bigger correlator size enables the scanner to detect and measure Pilot channels with better dynamic but makes scanning speed slower. . Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner.

scanner will report results from N best preambles. It is reported in chips. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning.94 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning. Pilot Scanning with WiMAX Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. scanner will report results from N best pilots. If enabled. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. when selected. If enabled. In aggregate method. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (see page 80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. Overhead message decoding. . Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode.

Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. . only the contribution of the desired segment is considered.g.34).g. whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment. so that the CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning. It is based on the requested reuse factor. As a broad guideline. The allocation of frequency sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e. When Reuse Factor 3 is selected. 1 and 2). The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific. and the CINRs are calculated only from the same segment. a downlink signal on segment 0 will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1. contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters. The WiMAX air interface modulating waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0. Each sample corresponds to 89. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired balance between the interference and the network coverage. measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other. The values range from 0 to 1023+32. Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. in dB *100 (e..CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 95 CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value. -16.285 nanoseconds.

1:2. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged. Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. . the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged.96 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Pilot Scanning with TD-SCDMA Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. scanner will report results from N best pilots. 1:4 and 1:8. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. The available options are 1:1. In aggregate method. If enabled. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning.

The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific. Pilot Scanning with DVB-H Scanners  Note that the available options are device specific. . Frequency defines the frequency scanned.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 97 The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog (see page 80) where you can select frequencies for scanning.

This will increase the scanner sensitivity.98 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measurement Properties – Spectrum Scanning In the Spectrum scanning page you can define frequencies that will be scanned. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click Add. hence slightly decreasing background noise. However. Use preamplifier option should be selected if the signal level is less than -50 dB. it is recommended that it is not selected when signal volume is higher than -50dBm. .

define the scanning frequencies at the top of the dialog. press the Add to Scanning List button and select Save as Predefined Set. You can define Predefined scanning sets which you can use to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 99 Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Define the center frequency and the bandwidth. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. To create new scanning sets. If you manually define the start and stop frequencies. Define the start and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. you can either select to add them to the scanning list. . or save them as a predefined set. Just double-click a set from the list and the predefined values will be selected. If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth. you can either select to add the frequencies to the scanning list or save them as a predefined set. Select your option by pressing the Add to Scanning List button. Sample count determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range.

100 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Define a name for the set in the Enter Frequency Set Name dialog and click OK. .

script files used with voice quality terminals belong to the same script group. With Nemo Outdoor you can define multiple script synchronization groups.CO NFI G URATI O N SETTI NG S 101 Measurement Properties .g. .. The script synchronization settings need to be configured separately for each device. but Synchronize script repeats option is selected. and their script files are synchronized with one another. but the user can also create new script groups by selecting <New group> in the Script group drop-down menu. all script files that belong to the same <None> group are synchronized. in the In the Script File field. Script groups can be used. Devices can be assigned for certain script groups. whereas the PS data scripts belong to the second script group. For example. e. When a script group is selected as <None>. browse the script file that you want to use. By default the script group is selected as <None>. To be able to use script groups. and typing the name of the new script group in the field. The scripts in the same group are synchronized with each other. with Nemo Outdoor multi configuration including two voice quality terminals and two USB modems performing PS data transfers simultaneously. the Synchronize script repeats option must be selected in the User Interface Properties (see page 55). There are some premade script files available but you can also create your own in the Script Editor (see page 140). click the Device Settings button Devices window and select Script Properties. A script group can be also saved with a specific name.Script In order to select a script file to be used in a measurement.

for tuning purposes. the position information is also stored by the system. In addition. The results can be used. for frequency planning (placing BTS sites) and interference measurement. Frequency scanning results contain the field strength values for all carriers. FREQUENCY SCANNING MEASUREMENTS IN GSM Nemo Outdoor Frequency Scan mode is designed for frequency planning of an existing digital network. for instance. only the specified channels or pilot numbers are scanned. calls and data transfers can be made and/or the phone can be left in an idle state. 1800. Nemo Outdoor can also execute measurements according to a user-defined script file. for tuning and interference measurement purposes.3 dB and with a scanner +/. Scanning with a Mobile By using the mobile. Scanning with a Fast Frequency Scanner When using a fast frequency scanner. the position information is also stored by the system. The results can be used. In Call mode.1 . for example. for instance. In addition. during which time measurements are carried out. for determining the optimum handover and power control parameters. for example.1. the quality of an existing digital network. A complete description of the file format can be found in the File Format manual provided by Anite Finland. then also the position information is stored by the system. The scanning made with a fast frequency scanner is more accurate than the scanning made with a mobile.  Frequency scanning is available with SAGEM and certain Nokia mobiles or with a separate fast frequency scanner. Frequency scanning results contain the field strength values for the selected carriers and the decoded BSIC/SAT values. . See page 453 for more information on scanner measurements. for instance. if the Nemo Outdoor Measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver. The inaccuracy with a GSM mobile is +/. for frequency planning (placing BTS sites) and interference measurement. In addition. or 900/1800 only) and their field strength values in the geographical region concerned can be observed.102 Nemo O ut door User M a nual MEASUREMENT MODES CALL MODE MEASUREMENT The Nemo Outdoor Call mode is designed for tracing and evaluating. if the Nemo Outdoor measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver. if the Nemo Outdoor measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver. The results can be used.5 dB.+/. all the carrier frequencies of the current wireless system (GSM900.

for example. SPECTRUM ANALYSIS Nemo Outdoor with Anritsu MS2721B spectrum analyzer offers the capability to determine occupied bandwidth and track interference sources. for network planning and tuning and. Pilot Channel Time of Arrival and Absolute Timing (referenced to GPS) can be observed. The inaccuracy with a scanner is +/. These results are stored into a scanning measurement file. Frequency scanning results contain the field strength values for the carriers (and optionally location coordinates provided by GPS). In this mode. the position information is also stored by the system. Nemo Outdoor is able to measure and decode the Pilot signal scrambling codes and their signal-to-noise ratios (Ec/N0 values). . The data collected can be used. The complete RF signal power (RSSI) can be measured as well as the signal code power (RSCP) for each individual scrambling code. the Primary and Secondary Synchronization Channel Ec/N0 can be measured.+/. The scanning receiver can be used in variable bandwidth modes to check the existence of wanted or unwanted radio signals in the defined frequency band. By using this mode. for interference measurements.1.+/.1. if the Nemo Outdoor measurement system is equipped with a GPS receiver. for network planning and tuning and. In addition. for example. Furthermore.1 .1 .M EAS UREM E NT M O DES 103 SCANNING MODE MEASUREMENT IN UMTS Frequency Scan Mode Nemo Outdoor Frequency Scan mode is designed for basic frequency domain monitoring or spectrum analysis. for interference measurements. furthermore.5 dB. all the userselected carrier frequencies of the current wireless system and their field strength values can be observed. furthermore. In addition. These results are stored into a scanning measurement file.5 dB. Pilot Mode Nemo Outdoor Pilot mode is designed for spread spectrum scrambling code domain analysis. The inaccuracy with a scanner is +/. The data collected can be used.

The marker number is assigned by pressing a number between 0 and 9 on the keyboard. and when you stop the measurement. you see Rec. you may insert markers in the files. the most common tasks are presented in more detail and some examples are given to illustrate their use.104 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual DURING MEASUREMENTS When Nemo Outdoor is performing the user defined test measurement. you can view the process in a number of graphs. During the measurement process. The Status field in the upper right corner of the main window provides information on the measurement process. the remark Idle appears in the field. If you have any problems in starting the measurements. use the spacebar to insert markers without the marker number. you may want to mark various measurement circumstances/problems. You can assign a marker number (between 0 and 9) for each suburb or street. If you wish to mark these points in the measurement file(s). The sequence number is a running number assigned automatically by Nemo Outdoor. If you are performing measurements in one location. see page 327. This is useful when measuring in various locations during one measurement session. During the measurement. Each marker will be assigned a marker sequence number and a marker number. and maps. In the following chapters. You may insert as many markers as you wish. The graph and grid windows are fully user configurable. You can view the inserted marker in the Markers grid window. grids. .

3. select Stop Voice Call from the Device Commands menu . making calls is not possible.  To make voice calls: 1. In the Measurement Properties. select Device Commands | Stop Scanning. Click OK.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 105 MAKING SCANNING MEASUREMENTS With a Scanner In order to measure with a scanner. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Configuration dialog. In the Frequency Scan mode (GSM only). When you wish to finish the call in manual mode. 2. select Device Commands | Start Single Shot Scanning. MAKING VOICE CALLS The Scanning mode that you have selected for each of the test mobiles affects the way you can make calls in Nemo Outdoor. insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Voice Number field. In the Call mode.  Note that after you have activated the script. first make sure that the terminal model supports the scanning feature. or Device Commands | Start Continuous Scanning. Select Start Voice Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. button. To end a scanning measurement. With a Mobile To carry out frequency scanning with a mobile phone. wait until the script is finished. you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Alternatively. just start the recording by clicking the Start Recording Nemo Outdoor will start writing the measurement data in a file. If you are running a script. the software makes test calls according to the settings defined in the script file or you can conduct manual test calls. To do frequency scanning. .

The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line. Click the Voice Call button in the Measurement Properties. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2. It must be a valid phone number. When Request voice call callback is selected.106 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Voice Call Properties Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls and to make voice quality measurements. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements. Number defines the number to be called. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings.0 or later. the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.5. Measurement Settings dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened. . callback number is recognized automatically.

wav. date in DDMMYYYY format. Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. When a prefix is defined.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 107 Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. 16-bit linear coded . For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045. the received audio files are not stored. If you want to use your own test samples. 0 being the worst and 5 the best value.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix. If you leave this field empty. mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling the Nemo audio server. CDMA specific settings. The threshold values range from 0-5. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files. the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds.000.   Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. . and time in HHMMSS format. Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment.000 seconds. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1.wav files that are no longer than six seconds in length. which means that all samples are saved. The default threshold value is 5. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. With the Terratec sound card. See page 162 for more information on making scripts. sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate. Service option defines the service option used for the test call. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved.

There are five different options in TETRA networks: duplex. The number must be such that the line stays open for a user-defined time and some speech or sound is transferred on the line.     Duplex: Normal call between two terminals.108 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Voice Call Properties – TETRA  Note that the TETRA tab is visible only if you are measuring with a TETRA mobile. and by pressing the PTT button. Voice call properties are needed to establish the voice calls. The Number field can contain up to 17 characters. both parties can speak at the same time Semiduplex: Call between two terminals. and PSTN. direct. Call type defines what kind of calls will be made. group. but only one party can speak at a time by pressing the PTT (Press-to-Talk) button Group: Call from one terminal to a group. Number defines the number to be called. also speak Direct: Call between terminals which bypasses the network. all terminals having that group active can listen. by means of the PTT button . It must be a valid phone number. semiduplex. Click the Voice Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog and the Voice Call Properties dialog will be opened.

Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds. In mobile-to-mobile measurements. WCDMA. See page 140 for more information on making scripts. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. and TD-SCDMA. . The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendation P. one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample in both directions. and the Nemo multi rack. For a list of supported terminals.000 seconds. 1-6 mobiles and audio modules (with EVOQ) or 1-4 mobiles and audio modules (with TerraTec). 862.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 109   PSTN: Call from terminal to fixed line or to another cellular mobile Note that the Script Settings table is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. Please refer to the Voice Quality Guide on page Error! Bookmark not defined. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure.862.1 and P. CDMA2000. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice and video calls as perceived by end-users. for complete instructions on setting up and making voice quality measurements. VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements in GSM.000. These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. The Nemo Voice Quality system setup consists of Nemo Outdoor.

and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end.110 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. . the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end. a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option.

0 or later.5. callback number is recognized automatically. 16-bit linear coded . Note that the voice quality settings are available only if your license supports voice quality measurements.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 111 MAKING VIDEO CALLS Click the Video Call button in the Measurement Properties.wav files that are no longer than ten seconds in length. . When Request voice call callback is selected. make sure that the samples are of 8KHz sampling rate. Number defines the number where the video call will be made. These settings are needed for making video calls. Measurement Settings dialog to access the Video Call Properties dialog. sampling rate can be 8kHz or 16 kHz (for WB-AMR testing) and sample length a maximum of 30 seconds. If Nemo server is connected to analog telephone lines (PSTN) user must define the correct callback number on the server side using Nemo Server manager application. DTMF tones are sent separately from audio so naturally DTMF tones do not affect to MOS score. With the Terratec sound card. Note that this functionality requires Nemo Server version 2. If you want to use your own test samples. Select the Voice quality option to activate the voice quality settings. Reference sample filename defines the reference sample to which the received audio sample is compared. the application sends callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. If ISDN lines are used with Nemo Server and test terminals are selected to be sent also caller id to Nemo server. Select the Save sample files option to save the received voice quality sample files.

 Note that video calls with the generic Qualcomm handler require some further settings to be made prior to making the call. . If you leave this field empty. In the Advanced Properties dialog. Note that the CDMA specific setting is activated only if you are measuring with a CDMA mobile. The default threshold value is 5. Go to Measurement Properties | General.wav where prefix is the user-defined prefix. Nemo Outdoor names the files as follows: prefix_mos_date_time. The threshold values range from 0-5.wav. Note that with voice quality measurements when calling Nemo Server. If the call attempt timeout value is exceeded before the cellular system has assigned a traffic channel. Save only samples below threshold determines the value below which the samples are saved. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. When a prefix is defined.000 seconds. Call attempt timeout value determines the maximum duration of the call attempt. the delay time between a new call attempt and the previous call disconnect must be at least 10 seconds. date in DDMMYYYY format. For example: terminal1_34_15112004_143045.   Note that the Script Settings view is activated only if you access this dialog through the Script Editor. The range of duration values is from 1 to 1. mos the PESQ score on a MOS scale with one decimal precision but without decimal point. Note that the maximum value of this parameter is the same as the value you have set as the Delay Between Call Attempts parameter. the call attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. 0 being the worst and 5 the best value. and time in HHMMSS format. CDMA specific settings. and press the Advanced button. Service option defines the service option used for the test call. See page 140 for more information on making scripts. the received audio files are not stored. which means that all samples are saved. The range of the Call Attempt Timeout values is from 5 to 60 seconds.000. you need to select the applicable video call method for the measurement from the drop-down menu. Call duration determines the time that the call lasts in seconds.112 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Prefix for received sample files refers to the prefix that is added to the file names of received audio sample files. The duration timer is started from the channel assignment.

Samsung Z560. Click OK. Select Make Video Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu.LG KU950 . insert the phone number that you wish to use in the test call in the Video Number field.  Note that after you have activated the script.Samsung Z107  Method 3 .Samsung G800  To make video calls and video quality calls: 1.Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile  Method 6 . 2.Qualcomm TM 6250 reference mobile  Method 7 .  Method 1 . In the Measurement Properties. . or try each Method separately and select the one that works. LG KF700  Method 8 .Samsung Z140. you can activate a script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. Samsung P920. Samsung ZX20  Method 4 . Samsung Z500. Configuration dialog. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.Samsung U800 (always required to first make a video call using the terminal keypad)  Method 9 .Samsung ZV10  Method 5 . Alternatively.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 113 Select the method based on the list below.Samsung Z105  Method 2 . The selected method is saved to the device configuration file.

see chapter Packet Session Settings on page 116.114 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that video quality parameters are supported only with certain Motorola test terminals. Terminals verified by Anite Finland support video calls. and this file needs to accompany the measurement file under the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. SMTP.  Note! Video call testing is supported on any video call – capable terminal based on Qualcomm chipset. However. It is possible that if the device is not included in the list of supported terminals. 3. POP3. you can make data transfers. FTP. you have several data protocol options for making data transfers: you can use the Iperf for TCP/UDP. The setup is different for CS and PS data transfers.  DATA TRANSFERS With mobiles supporting CS and PS data. . see chapter Data Call Properties on page 115. When you wish to finish the call in manual mode. If you are making CS data transfers. Each data transfer needs to be set up and configured individually. Configuring the Data Connection  Before you can start making data transfers you need to define the actual connection that is used for the transfer. A separate .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. HTTP Browsing. If you are making PS data transfers. the video call functionality does not work. WAP. The selected method is saved to the device configuration file. the user must remember to select the correct method from Measurement Properties | General | Advanced Properties prior to making the call. If you are running a script. select Stop Video Call. wait until the script is finished. SFTP. HTTP.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. The Nemo Outdoor Multi system enables multiple simultaneous data connections. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field. or streaming. you need to enable the packet decoding function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to performing data measurements. In Nemo Outdoor.

There are separate views for GSM.110 and v. Click the Data Number Properties button in the Measurement Properties dialog to access the Data Call Properties dialog. Transparent Mode defines whether transparent or non-transparent mode is used in the CS data call. and password) are operator-specific. Username refers to the dial-up server username. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 115 Data Call Properties Data Call properties are needed to establish the circuit-switched data connection. username. The parameters are the same. Compression defines if no compression or v. Number defines the number to be called of the dial-up server. The ALA technology controls power levels and automatically selects the best channel coding. UMTS.34) and ISDN (v.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Modem Type refers to the modem type that the dial-up server is using.42bis compression is used. The UMTS and CDMA views just have fewer parameters. Password refers to the dial-up server password. Timeslots (UL/DL) defines the number of timeslots for each direction. The alternatives are Analog (v. Coding defines the coding scheme used in the air interface. and CDMA. Enable Automatic Link Adaptation option allows you to disable and enable Automatic Link Adaptation (ALA).120).

Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring. All the parameters in this dialog are operator specific. Click the Packet Session button in the Measurement Properties.116 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Packet Session Settings Packet session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. . You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Measurement Settings dialog to access the Packet Session Settings dialog.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 117 TCP/UDP Protocol Configuration (Iperf)  Note that it is required that Nemo Server be used with Iperf testing as the original Iperf service is slightly modified for optimal performance. You can also open this dialog from the Script Editor dialog (Just click the Add button and then choose Packet Data Transfer | TCP Packet Data Transfer…(IPerf)/UDP Packet Data Transfer…(IPerf) from the list. Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). Select TCP (Iperf) or UDP (Iperf) in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button.

Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data.25 kB. TCP window size defines the size of the receive window during TCP/IP transmission.118 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Host name is the IP address used in Nemo Server. If it is too small. To avoid reduction of the throughput the TCP window size should be set at least to 7.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. each connection must have its own IP address. the default port is 5001. . with HSDPA with category 8 the maximum throughput is about 7. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. For TCP and UDP protocols. it can decrease the maximum data throughput. or both.3 Mbit/s * 0.3 Mbit/s and RTT is about 100 ms. connection attempt will fail.1 s = 730 kbit = 91. Note that Firewall should be turned off. the same IP address can be used. the window size should be at least the maximum throughput multiplied by RTT. For example. and if it is too high it can increase the retransmission round-trip time (RTT). To be able to avoid decrease of data throughput. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Port refers to the port used by Nemo Server.

99) HSDPA 1. Packet fragmentation has a huge negative impact to the achieved data throughput and it should be avoided.8 180 TCP window size (kB) 4. throughput 64 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 128 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 256 kbps (GPRS/ EDGE) 384kbps (Rel. Transfer data size defines the length of the total data transfer in kilobytes. The size of the individual data packages is defined in the Packet Size field.5 100 360 45 100 730 91.6 22. the data connection attempt will be stopped and the attempt will be marked as a failure. there should be a 75% packet error rate (only every fourth packet has been able to transmit successfully).2Mbps UE category 9 HSDPA 14.8 9.6 76.460 bytes. If higher data transmission rate is used. the transmission will end after a certain amount of data has been transferred.500 bytes. The value is recommended to be at least 10 seconds. if lower layers are capable of transmitting 100kbit/s and UDP bandwidth is configured to 400kbit/s. UDP datagram size defines the size of the UDP packet in bytes. it is not limited by maximum throughput of the lower layers. Transfer attempt timeout determines the maximum waiting time after data connection. that is.8 153. On the other hand if too small UDP packet size is used the portion of the UDP and IP header increases which decreases the amount of transmitted user data with the result of smaller data throughput.6 19.25 100 1020 127. the packet error rate (PER) increases. the Transfer duration option will be disabled.4Mbps UE category 9 ~RTT (ms) 600 600 600 200 100 TCP window size (kbit) 38.5 100 1440 180 UDP bandwidth defines how much data is attempted to be transmitted. It is not limited by time. It should be smaller than the maximum packet size of the lower layers to be able to avoid packet fragmentation in the lower layers. Transfer duration defines the length of the data transfer in seconds. The range of Transfer Attempt Timeout values is from 0 to 60 seconds. Naturally UDP bandwidth should not be configured too small since it limits the maximum throughput that is not normally desired. For example. This is because when the Transfer data size option is used. Normally good maximum value for UDP datagram is a little bit less than maximum Ethernet packet size which is 1.3Mbps UE category 7 & 8 HSDPA 10. If the transfer attempt timeout value is exceeded before data connection. the transfer finishes when the defined amount of data has been transferred.  Note that if you have chosen Transfer data size from the Packet Transfer Properties dialog. A good default value for the UDP datagram size is 1. Since UDP does not guarantee successful data transmission.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 119 Downlink testing (these values are indicative only): Max.6Mbps UE category 5 & 6 HSDPA 7.4 76. .8Mbps UE category 3 & 4 HSDPA 3.2 9.

3. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. and password) are operator-specific. the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. See instructions on page 139. 7. Click the PDP Context Properties button. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. After you have completed the setup. you can start the actual data transfer. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72) 4. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. The FTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. The server can be any standard FTP server. . Define FTP transfer-related settings in the FTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 121). Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Configuring the FTP Protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated FTP client. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Normally when a data transfer is initialized. 2. which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the FTP server. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog.120 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Next. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. and in that case the data transfer would fail. Create a script (optional) (page 157). 6.  To set up data measurements using FTP 1. With passive mode. 5. username.

each connection must have its own IP address. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the FTP server. Select the Passive mode option to activate passive mode. Just click the Add button and then choose first FTP Logon and define the settings and then choose FTP Transfer.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. and in that case the data transfer would fail. Host name is the IP address of the FTP server used. Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. With passive mode.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 121 FTP Transfer Properties Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. Port refers to the port used by the FTP server. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the FTP server. You can also open the FTP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. . the same IP address can be used. Select FTP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection.

Nemo Outdoor splits the 10MB file into five fragments with the size of 2MB each. you must define a different local file for each connection. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. The number of threads is set to five. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. this is the source file. If you are receiving data. All five FTP transfer sessions are started simultaneously. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one FTP session.  . If you are receiving data.txt. this is the output file. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the FTP server..122 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Supported types are Tunneling. transfer will fail. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file.bin. this is the destination file.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. If you are sending data. Total application data throughput is recorded including all threads. SOCKS4. If you are sending data. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Paths tab (see page 57). Number of threads defines in how many threads the test file is split during an FTP transfer. filename_tester1. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size. filename_tester2. Resume is not supported with multi threaded FTP transfers. this is the source file. For example. all threads will start from the beginning. Multi-threaded FTP transfer mode is supported in receive direction. etc. This functionality is available with FTP upload testing.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them. If a connection is not established within the defined time.txt. Each thread creates a new FTP session and transfers a fragment of the file. Address refers to the address of the proxy. you must define a different remote file for each connection. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. the size of the downloaded file is 10MB. we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e.g. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. and SOCKS5. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. In case of a data drop. connection attempt will fail. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same FTP server.

Define SFTP transfer-related settings in the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 124).  To set up data measurements using SFTP 1. Some firewalls may be configured to refuse any incoming connection requests. the client always opens those new connections so the firewall does not block the connection. which can be used to measure data transfer rates between Nemo Outdoor and the SFTP server. 7. The SFTP module supports firewall-friendly passive mode transfers. the server opens a new connection to the client and then data is transferred through this connection. 5. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. and in that case the data transfer would fail. you can start the actual data transfer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 123 Configuring the SFTP Protocol Nemo Outdoor has an integrated SFTP client. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Create a script (optional) (page 157). The server can be any standard SFTP server. 3. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). With passive mode. Normally when a data transfer is initialized. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. After you have completed the setup. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72) 4. See instructions on page 139. . deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. Current data throughput and transferred data size are reported during transfer. 6. username. 2.   A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. and password) are operator-specific.

You can also open the SFTP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Address refers to the address of the proxy. and SOCKS5. Just click the Add button and then choose first SFTP Logon and define the settings and then choose SFTP Transfer. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SFTP server. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SFTP server.124 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SFTP Transfer Properties Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). If a connection is not established within the defined time. Port refers to the port used by the SFTP server. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. SOCKS4. connection attempt will fail. Host name is the IP address of the SFTP server used. Supported types are Tunneling. . Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal. each connection must have its own IP address. the same IP address can be used. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. Select SFTP in the Supported Data Protocols field and click on the field.

this is the output file.g. Generate local file allows you to generate random binary files with user-specified file size.. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. this is the source file. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. filename_tester1. you must define a different local file for each connection. Transfer attempts defines how many times an interrupted data transfer is resumed during one SFTP session.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to send for all of them. transfer will fail. Also note that if there are several testing units using the same SFTP server. If you are sending data.  To set up data measurements using HTTP 1. etc. Paths tab (see page 57). this is the source file.txt. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy.  Configuring the HTTP Protocol The HTTP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP protocol.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Define HTTP transfer-related settings in the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog (page 126). The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog.bin. This functionality is available with SFTP upload testing. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. 3. If you are receiving data. Remote file defines the name and location of the file that is on the SFTP server. In the HTTP testing. we recommend that you use a unique file name extension (e. and password) are operator-specific. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. If you are receiving data.) for each unit to avoid a situation where two testing units are trying to write in the same file. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. Direction defines whether you are sending or receiving data. the user selects one file that will be downloaded or uploaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured. Local file defines the name and location of the file that is on your laptop. .  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72) 4. this is the destination file. filename_tester2. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. 5.txt. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. If you are sending data. The file is named with following format <IMEI>_<file size in kB>. 2.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 125 Port refers to the port used by the proxy. you must define a different remote file for each connection. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. username.

See instructions on page 139. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. you can define the required data transfer settings. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. connection attempt will fail. 7. After you have completed the setup.htm. Create a script (optional) (page 157). HTTP Transfer Properties Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). Number of threads enables all the threads to be started simultaneously with the same time stamp. The number of threads can be defined by the user. and SOCKS5. Address refers to the address of the proxy. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded when data is received. Just click the Add button and then choose HTTP Transfer from the list. You can also open the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. For example. SOCKS4.yourcompany. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. If you are sending HTTP data.126 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. If a connection is not established within the defined time. . Select HTTP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button.com/testfile. In the HTTP Transfer Properties dialog. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. http://www. Each thread transfers the entire file. URL defines the destination. Proxy Type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. you can start the actual data transfer. Direction defines whether the HTTP file is sent or received. Supported types are Tunneling.

5.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 127    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. you can start the actual data transfer.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. 2. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. After you have completed the setup. the user selects one URL address that will be downloaded through the HTTP protocol and this data transfer is measured. you can use the same URL for all of them. Define browser transfer -related settings in the Browser Transfer Properties dialog (page 126). If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. . Create a script (optional) (page 157). Local File defines the output file and location for HTTP testing. you must define a different local file for each connection. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. See instructions on page 139. 6. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72) 4. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. The HTTP protocol is used in web browsing. create a script with several HTTP transfers. Paths tab (see page 57). Configure the data connection for CS data or PS data (page 116).  To set up data measurements using HTTP 1. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. In HTTP testing. See page 140 for instructions on making scripts. To make consecutive transfers. 7. Configuring the (HTTP) Browsing Protocol The HTTP Browser testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the HTTP Browsing protocol. transfer will fail.

yourcompany.com/testbrowser. . If Decode Content Information is selected. Close Window After Transfer closes the browser window after the data transfer. You can also open the Browser Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Select Browsing in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. texts and links are written to measurement file including the number of content elements and size information. Just click the Add button and then choose Browser Transfer from the list.128 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Browser Transfer Properties Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). the transfer will fail. information about the images. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. http://www. URL defines the IP address of the test page that will be downloaded. For example.htm.

Settings related to the dial-up server (number. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. e. The average PPP and RLC data throughputs are also available. for benchmarking purposes as EACH CONNECTION MUST HAVE ITS OWN IP ADDRESS.  Configuring the POP3 Protocol POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred.  To set up data measurements using POP3 1. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. 3. 5.g. Create a script (optional) (page 157).  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. 7. and password) are operator-specific. Define POP3 Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 130). . Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116).PAD). See instructions on page 139. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. 2. username. you can start the actual data transfer. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72) 4. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. The cache and cookies information is cleared after every download. Average results are calculated from the time PDP context was active (PAC. 6. The connection setup time and the download time can be seen in Nemo Outdoor or calculated with Nemo Analyze  For MULTI browser testing with single computer it is recommended that Nemo Server be used for multiple simultaneous data connections. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. PPP and RLC layer data throughputs are logged during the browser testing. After you have completed the setup.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 129 The downloaded page can be seen during the measurement and the total time to download the whole page is written to the measurement file.

Just click the Add button and then choose E-Mail Testing | POP3 | Connect and Receive E-Mails from the list. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. connection attempt will fail. SOCKS4. Select POP3 in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. each connection must have its own IP address. and SOCKS5. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Supported types are Tunneling. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the POP3 server. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the POP3 server. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the POP3 server. Port refers to the port used by the POP3 server. POP3 Server Settings define settings for the POP3 server used in the measurements. . You can also open the E-Mail Settings dialog from the Script Editor dialog.   Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals.130 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual E-Mail Settings Dialog – POP3 Settings Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). the same IP address can be used. Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. If a connection is not established within the defined time.

transfer will fail. See instructions on page 139. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. POP3 receiving options define how the test e-mails are received and handled by Nemo Outdoor. Configuring the SMTP Protocol POP3 and SMTP testing offers the possibility to send emails through Nemo Outdoor and to monitor how the message is transferred. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). Define SMTP Server settings in the E-Mail Settings dialog (page 132). Settings related to the dial-up server (number. 3. 7. 6. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. Create a script (optional) (page 157). you can start the actual data transfer. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. After you have completed the setup. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. POP3 protocol is used for receiving emails and SMTP protocol for sending emails. 5. and password) are operator-specific.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. The View button opens a received test message in the E-Mail Editor dialog. This will save disk space. . Select the Delete messages after receiving option to delete all received test e-mails. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72). 2. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 131 Address refers to the address of the proxy. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices.  To set up data measurements using SMTP 1. 4. Also define the test e-mails that are used in the measurement. Maximum number of messages to receive defines the maximum number of messages received from the e-mail server. username.

Select SMTP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. Just click the Add button and then choose E-Mail Testing | SMTP | Connect and Receive E-Mails from the list.132 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual E-Mail Settings Dialog – SMTP Settings Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). You can also open the E-Mail Settings dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Therefore.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections. Port refers to the port used by the SMTP server. each connection must have its own IP address. Server name defines a name or an IP address for the SMTP server. it is not possible to test SMTP against the Nemo server with those operators' SIM cards. . In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the SMTP server. the same IP address can be used. SMTP Server Settings define settings for the SMTP server used in the measurements. Note that some operators prevent accessing SMTP services other than their own. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the SMTP server.

and SOCKS5. Proxy server settings define settings for the proxy server used in the measurements. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Click the Edit button to open the E-Mail Editor where you can type the test message and attach files to the message. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. connection attempt will fail. In the Username field you must enter a valid username for the proxy. In the Password field you must enter a valid password for the proxy. . Proxy type defines the type of the proxy used in the measurements. Port refers to the port used by the proxy. SOCKS4. transfer will fail. Messages to be sent defines the test messages used in the SMTP test.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 133 Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. See page 134 for more information on the E-Mail Editor. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. Supported types are Tunneling. Address refers to the address of the proxy.

New E-Mail Message button saves the current changes and opens an empty E-Mail Editor. Open E-Mail Message button opens an Open dialog where you can open premade e-mail messages. Save Attachments button saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Save As button saves the current e-mail message with a different name for later use. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test e-mail. . Remove button removes the selected attachment from the test message.134 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual E-Mail Editor Use the E-Mail Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. Add button opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Save E-Mail Message button saves the current e-mail message for later use. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use.

 A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing. WAP Transfer Properties Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). you can start the actual data transfer. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. In the WAP testing. WAP gateway host defines a name or an IP address for the WAP gateway. 2. 4. After you have completed the setup. in web browsing.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 135 Configuring the WAP Protocol The WAP testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the WAP protocol. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72). Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). and password) are operator-specific. Define WAP Gateway settings in the WAP Transfer Properties dialog (page 135). username. The WAP protocol is used. You can also open the WAP Transfer Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. WAP transfer properties define settings for the WAP gateway used in the measurements. . Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. for example. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections.  To set up data measurements using WAP 1. Just click the Add button and then choose WAP Transfer from the list. 6. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. 3. See instructions on page 139. each connection must have its own IP address. 5. the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the WAP protocol and this data transfer is measured. Select WAP in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. Create a script (optional) (page 157). Settings related to the dial-up server (number.

yourcompany. 3. 2. Configuring the Streaming Protocol The Streaming testing functionality offers the possibility to test how data is transferred through the streaming protocol. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Paths tab (see page 57). Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established.com website. you must define a different local file for each connection. You can download a free player from the www.136 Nemo O ut door User M a nual WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on a single terminal. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. the user selects one file that will be downloaded through the streaming protocol and this data transfer is measured. . you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. If you encounter problems with the data transfer. http://www.  To set up data measurements using streaming: 1. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. Otherwise the different data connections will try to write in the same file. IP packet capturing must be enabled.    A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.real. for example. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. you need to have RealPlayer installed on the computer. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. Refer to page 157 for more information. To make consecutive downloads. For example. in video streaming. The streaming protocol is used. See page 140 for instructions on making scripts. and password) are operator-specific.  Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections and the direction is set to receive for all of them. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72). username. transfer will fail. Local file defines the output file and location for WAP testing.htm.    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections on different terminals. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. deactivate the firewall on the computer where you are running Nemo Outdoor. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. URL defines the IP address of the test file that will be downloaded.com/testfile. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. In the streaming testing. connection attempt will fail. create a script with several WAP transfers. The default location for these files is defined in the User Interface Properties dialog. Note that to make video streaming quality measurements. the same URL can be used. Note that in order to make streaming measurements.

See page 140 for instructions on making scripts. You can download a free player from the www. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits during a transfer if there is a break in the data flow. transfer will fail.rm. After you have completed the setup. Create a script (optional) (page 157). 6.com website. rtsp://yourcompany.com/testfile. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). Define Streaming properties (page 137). See instructions on page 139. 5. Select Streaming in the Data Protocol field and click the Properties button. If the transfer does not continue within the defined time. URL defines the IP address of the video file that will be streamed. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds for how long Nemo Outdoor waits for the connection to be established. Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections. create a script with several streaming sessions.real. If a connection is not established within the defined time. Just click the Add button and then choose Streaming from the list. you must define a different URL from different servers for each of them. Only one file will be downloaded at a time. You can also open the Streaming Properties dialog from the Script Editor dialog. Streaming Properties Open the Measurement Properties dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties). 7. Select the Display video stream option if you would like to view the test clip during the streaming. For example. To make consecutive downloads. . connection attempt will fail.  Note that if Streaming is not available in the Data Protocol field. Select the Streaming quality option to activate streaming video quality measurements. you can start the actual data transfer. RealPlayer is not installed on the computer.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 137 4.

In case the network does not respond to ping or trace route requests with trace route testing.  To set up data measurements using the Trace Route Protocol 1. Settings related to the dial-up server (number. 2. With ping trace route testing it is also possible to check responsiveness and trace the path of the packet from one host to another. Follow the instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide to set up a dial-up connection and to configure the measurement mobile. username. After you have completed the setup. etc. . 7. Configure the data connection for CS data (page 115) or PS data (page 116). and password) are operator-specific. 3. Define measurement-related settings in the Measurement Properties dialog (page 72). you can start the actual data transfer. you can trace the servers pinged along the way to the target server. Configuring the Trace Route Protocol By conducting Trace Route testing functionality. Ping trace route testing can be used to help troubleshooting network or Internet connections.138 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Select the Save sample file option and type a name in the Local file field to save the video clip used in the measurement. See instructions on page 139. it is possible to show the location right before the host that is not responding. 4. Also define the test files that are used in the measurement. Connect (page 37) and configure (page 67) the measurement devices. 6. See below how to define Trace Route properties. Create a script (optional) (page 157). 5. The ping utility tests responsiveness between two hosts.  A PPP compatible dial-up server is required for CS data testing.

WAP. you cannot control the measurement manually until the script is finished or you interrupt the script by clicking the Stop Scripts button. each connection must be given its own.anite. SFTP. Browsing.  Note that after you have activated the script. separate IP address! Note that if you are doing multiple simultaneous data transfers on a single terminal.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. SMTP. FTP. for example. . HTTP.  To make data transfers: 1.  Note! Firewall must be deactivated when making data transfers. you can start making the data transfers.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 139 Trace Route Properties The Remote host field defines the IP address or URL of the target server of the trace route measurement. Transfer timeout determines the maximum timeout seconds since the beginning of the operation. the same IP address can be used! If you encounter problems with the data transfer. or streaming). HOP timeout defines the maximum amount of time to wait for an individual hop to complete. the names of the pinged servers will be reported by Nemo Outdoor. www. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. Activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button. POP3. By selecting the Resolve host names item. deactivate the firewall on the computer on which you are running Nemo Outdoor. HOP limit defines the maximum number of servers to be pinged along the way to the target server. Making Data Transfers After you have configured the data connection (CS or PS data) and selected and configured the data protocol (Iperf (TCP/UDP).    Note that if you have multiple simultaneous data connections with different terminals.

If you are not using a script. select All Devices | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with all test devices or <device name> | Start/Stop Data Transfer to start the data transfer with just one device. Data streaming can be made manually and with scripts. and measures video quality type. Nemo Outdoor will automatically make the GPRS attach. From the Measurement menu. Wait until the PDP context is activated and dial-up connection established. 4. When you want to stop the data transfer. jitter. and to define streaming video settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 137). and MOS. Open a line graph (Data | Line Graph | New).2 player are installed on the computer. so multi measurements are not possible. 3. you need to start and stop the measurement manually.2 player on the computer. 4. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . select Start/Stop Data Transfer to end the data transfer or wait until the entire video clip has been streamed. Check that RealPlayer and Apple QuickTime 7. Press the Add New Layer button and select Video Quality MOS in the Y field and click OK. PS Data: Select Activate PDP Context from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. from a line graph some streaming parameters. select Stop Data Transfer. STREAMING VIDEO QUALITY TESTING Streaming video quality testing allows you to monitor how streaming video is transferred in the network. Select Start Data Transfer from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. for example. . 5. CS Data: Select Start Data Call from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. 3. You can view. you will need to install RealPlayer 10 or 11 and Apple QuickTime 7. In order to be able to make streaming video quality measurements. The graph will now display the selected parameter. Wait until the call is connected and dial-up connection established. From the Measurement menu. 2.  Making streaming video quality measurements: 1. Define the video streaming settings in the Streaming Properties dialog (see page 137).140 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2. Note that it is only possible to make single video quality measurements. Nemo Outdoor supports Psytechnics PVI streaming video quality testing. packet error rate. A video preview can also be seen during the measurement in Nemo Outdoor.

a user is able to perform IP telephony measurements on the IP networks based on the established VoIP sessions. Registration duration defines the duration for which the SIP registration is valid. Connection timeout defines the timeout while trying to connect to the server.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 141 VOIP CALLS With the optional VoIP module combined to Nemo Outdoor. pbx. Automatic registration. Open the VoIP Call Configuration dialog by clicking the VoIP Call button in the Measurement Settings tab (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Settings). when selected. you will need to install a SIP server. When selected. Username/Password defines the username that the user has registered to the server and the corresponding password.fi. automatically registers the user to the SIP server (as soon as Packet Session has been created). Nemo Outdoor VoIP system is compatible with Asterisk SIP Server. Open the SIP Server Settings dialog by selecting the Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Measurement Settings tab from the Measurement Properties dialog.org/applications/pbx To start making VoIP call measurements. Domain defines the address of the SIP server. To find more information on installing the Asterisk SIP server. Port defines the SIP port. e. The default SIP port is 5060. login to http://www. Use SIP proxy option enables the user to send outbound SIP messager via Proxy.nemo. In order to be able to make VoIP call measurements. . you will need to define some VoIP session settings in the SIP Server Settings and VoIP call configurations dialogs. through which SIP messages are sent. Proxy address/port defines the proxy.asterisk.g. Click the SIP Server button in the Measurement Settings tab (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Settings).

Script settings defines the duration of the call and the call attempt timeout in seconds. To start VoIP measurement. click on the Device Commands button 3. 2. | Start VoIP Call. a new call can be made without unregistering) .  Making VoIP measurements: 1. Finally. For example.142 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SIP callee address defines the SIP address of the call receiver. To end VoIP measurement. click on the Device Commands button | Start Packet Session. Enable VoIP Measurements option in the Measurement Settings tab from the Measurement Properties dialog and define SIP Server Settings and VoIP Call Configurations. only selected codecs are used while negotiating the codec in the case of an incoming call. click on the Device Command button 6. | Register SIP Server. | Stop VoIP Call. click on the Device Command button 5. in the image above the primary codec offered for an outgoing call is G729/8000. The order of the codecs is significant since the first codec is offered as the primary codec when making a call to a counterparty. To start packet session. to unregister SIP server. In addition. Audio codecs for the call can be selected from the list by selecting the box next to them. To register SIP server. 4. click on the Device Command button | Unregister SIP Server (Note: This is not a mandatory step.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 143 SMS TESTING SMS testing allows you to monitor how text messages are transferred in the network. Measurement Settings tab (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties | Measurement Settings tab). When the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database. Service Center Address defines the message center number of the mobile from where the messages are sent. Timeout defines the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. Enter the number without spaces and with the international country code. The number is found from the test mobile SMS settings. a unique ID consisting of 42 characters is added to the beginning of the message text when the SMS is sent. Nemo Analyze is able to recognize the SMS and the time it took for it to reach its destination from the time of sending during post-processing. Open the SMS Testing dialog by clicking the Short Messaging Service button in the Measurement Properties. +3581234567. The limit is set to 15000 characters. All handlers support sending and receiving concatenated SMS messages. for example. When the End-to-end message option is selected. Message refers to the user-defined test message that will be sent. Phone Number defines the number of the mobile where you are sending the test messages.

2. After that Nemo Outdoor can be used to send the same message again. The number can be found from your mobile SMS Settings. for example. Define the Timeout. 6. . LG KX206. The grid will now display only the selected SMS testingrelated events.e. Prior to starting SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor. 1. select All Devices | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with all test devices or <device name> | Send SMS Message to send an SMS with just one device. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). 2. SMS testing with CDMA does not require you to do any configurations prior to SMS testing for the terminal. 1. before carrying out SMS testing in Nemo Outdoor. and LG LHD-200E. 3..144 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual SMS Testing with CDMA terminals  Note that the SMS testing functionality may depend on your terminal's software version. Enter the Service Center Address of the test mobile from which you are sending the test SMS. Type in the test message and click OK. Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). i. LG VX8100. Go to Nemo Outdoor. LG C676. 4. You can view. the time in seconds after which the SMS sending attempt is terminated. LG VX8350. Clear all selections and select the Short Message Service item and click OK. See the applicable datasheet for further information. you must send an SMS to the target phone number using the terminal's keypad. The verified CDMA terminals supporting SMS testing include LG C680. LG KX256. From the Measurement menu. and click on the Device Commands button | Send SMS Message. send an SMS to the target phone number from the phone’s keypad. 5. 3. The testing goes as follows. Nemo Outdoor sends the same message as was sent by the user from the actual phone interface by retrieving the text message from the phone’s Saved messages folder. Define the Phone Number (with the international country code and without spaces) where you are sending the test SMS message.   Making SMS testing measurements: Note that with CDMA terminals. Start recording by clicking the Start Recording button . Connect and add the terminal to Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Outdoor will send the test SMS. from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 145 MMS TESTING MMS testing allows you to monitor how multimedia messages are transferred in the network. the script must not contain a PDP activation command.   If you are using the Nokia 6630. Some special MMS settings are required. Nemo Outdoor measures total MMS sending delay. please see page 148. In addition to successfully sent/received MMS messages. and message sending/receiving are recorded. logging to MMSC. . In order to be able to make MMS measurements. also sending/receiving attempts and sending/receiving failures are recorded enabling statistical success rate calculations. PDP context activation. Also separate delays from Attach. 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing. you will need to define some MMS-related settings in the PDP Context Settings dialog. Please note that if you create a script for making MMS measurements. MMS messages can be sent manually and with scripts.

Message to be sent refers to the test MMS message used in the measurement. all the settings are required in order to make MMS measurements. . This setting is operator-specific. This setting is operator-specific. The MMS tab is opened by default. Connection timeout defines the time in seconds after which the connection attempt is terminated. MMS In the MMS tab. MMSC address defines the MMS Service Center address. Measurement Settings dialog (Measurement | <device name> | Measurement Properties | Measurement Settings). MMSC username defines the MMS Service Center username. Transfer timeout defines the time in seconds after which the MMS sending attempt is terminated. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway port refers to the port used by the WAP gateway. This setting is operator-specific. WAP gateway host refers to the WAP gateway host. MMSC password defines the MMS Service Center password. This setting is operator-specific. Message Editor button opens the MMS Editor dialog for editing and creating MMS messages.146 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Packet Session Settings for MMS Open the Packet Session Settings dialog for MMS by clicking the Multimedia Messaging Service button in the Measurement Properties.

. All the parameters in this tab and the Basic QoS and Extended QoS tabs are operator specific. Save Attachments saves the files attached to the test message to a selected location. Attachments field displays a list of attachments in the test message. Open MMS Message opens an Open dialog where you can open premade MMS messages.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 147 Packet Session Packet Session settings are needed to establish the packet switched data connection. You must select the correct parameters to make the packet transfer function. Contact the operator of the network that you are measuring. Save MMS Message saves the current MMS message for later use. New MMS Message saves the current changes and opens and empty MMS Editor. Add opens an Open dialog for adding an attachment to the test message. Save As saves the current MMS message with a different name for later use. MMS Editor Use the MMS Editor dialog to type and edit test messages. Remove removes the selected attachment from the test message. You can attach files to the test messages and save messages for later use.

On the phone main window. Open an event grid (Data | Events Grid | New). 5.148 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Making MMS Measurements Follow these step-by-step instructions for making MMS measurements. for example. and N80: 1. 3. 6. If you are using the Nokia 6630. select Send MMS Message from the Device Commands menu or from the Measurement menu. If you want to make automated measurements. press Messag.147). If you are using a script. 4.  Changing MMS settings for Nokia 6630.  Making MMS measurements: 1. If you are making manual measurements. Nemo Outdoor will send the test MMS. . 6680. 6680. Edit the test message and add the media attachments in the MMS Editor (p. Some special MMS settings are required.140). Open the Grid Properties dialog (right-click on the grid and select Properties from the popup menu). 2. Clear all selections and select the Multimedia Message Service item and click OK. that is. 6680. The grid will now display only the selected MMS testingrelated events. not using a script. You can view. and N80 You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia 6630. create a script for MMS measurements (p. from a grid window if the test message was delivered successfully. MMS Settings for Nokia 6630. This will start the measurement. activate the script by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button.146).   You should have all the measurement devices connected and activated. Define the MMS-related Packet Session Settings (p. 6680 or N80 mobile for MMS testing. and N80 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor. please see page 148.

press Options. From the Settings view. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 149 2. From the menu. 4. 3. select Settings. In the Messaging view. select Multimedia message.

150

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

6. Select the Recept. in home net. and change it to Off.

7. Select the Reception if roaming option and change it to Off.

8. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile on and off.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

151

MMS Settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121
You need to make some MMS settings for the Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121 mobiles before you can use them in MMS testing with Nemo Outdoor.

Changing MMS settings for Nokia N95, 6120, and 6121:
1. On the phone main window, press Messaging.

2. In the Messaging view, press Options.

152

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. From the menu, select Settings.

4. From the Settings view, select Multimedia message.

5. Select the Access point in use option and change it to None.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

153

6. Select Multimedia retrieval and change it to Off.

7. Select Allow anon. msgs. and change it to Off by pressing the navigation button on the phone, or by selecting Options| Change| No.

8. Press on the navigation key to change the setting for Receive adverts from Yes to No.

154

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

9. Press the navigation button on the phone to change the Receive report setting from Yes to No.

10. Press Back and select Yes to confirm the changes. Finally switch the mobile off and on.

START EXTERNAL APPLICATION
This feature allows users to launch external applications from Nemo Outdoor as a part of the automatic measurement sequence. You can define the executable as well as the command-line parameters. The external application can be used to launch any proprietary or third-party applications that are not built into Nemo Outdoor. This enables, for example, the testing of data protocols that are not currently supported by Nemo Outdoor. You can then monitor the data throughputs from the PPP data throughput parameter. The external application feature can also be used to test web browsing. An APP event is written to the log file when a web browser is launched and closed. The user must set the cache size to minimum from the browser settings. The Start External Application dialog is accessed through the Script Editor, Add menu. Select Start External Application from the menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

155

Application Name defines the application that you want to run from Nemo Outdoor while making measurements. Define the path where the application .exe file is located on your computer. For example, C:\Program Files\Mozilla Firefox\firefox.exe. If you select the Wait until completed option, the test script will be on hold until the external application is closed. Arguments defines what file or web page will be opened in the external application once it is started. For example, if you start Internet Explorer, define here a URL (http://www.anite.com/nemo). You can also leave the field empty. Note that there should be no spaces between the characters in the pathname or target file specified in the Arguments field. Working Folder refers to the folder that the application uses to open and save files. For example, C:\Temp.

ICMP PING
The ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) Ping functionality allows you to perform ping measurements simultaneously with data transfers.

Host name refers to the IP address or URL that is being pinged, for example, www.anite.com. You can use Packet Data Tester or any IP server. Just make sure that the IP server used will respond to the ping. Packet size is the size of the ping packet that is used to measure ping time. The value determines the size of the packet sent to the server. In addition, it determines the size of the reply packet that the server uses to reply Nemo Outdoor. Timeout determines the maximum time that Nemo Outdoor waits for a reply packet from the server. If this time is exceeded, the ping measurement event will be created by using the timeout parameter (=-1). Delay defines the delay duration in milliseconds. In addition to the duration, also define where the delay will occur. The options are:

156

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Delay between requests which means the protocol will always wait for a reply before sending new request. If the delay is less than the ping delay, a new request is sent immediately after the reply. Delay from reply to request which means a new ping is sent after a reply is received.

Select the Repeat n times option if you would like to define the number of times the ping measurement is repeated. Select the Repeat until stopped option if you would like to continue the ping measurement until you stop it manually. Example 1. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 1 s. New request is sent every 1.1s (100ms + 1000ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every 1000ms.

Example 2. RTT time is 100ms and “delay from reply to request” is set to 50ms. New request is sent every 150ms (100ms + 50ms). If “delay between request” is selected, a new request is sent every 100ms because the protocol always waits for a reply before sending a new request.

To make ping measurements:
1. Open the Ping Settings dialog (Measurement Properties | Measurement Settings | Supported Data Protocols | ICMP Ping). 2. Define the required ping parameters and click OK. Close the Measurement Properties dialog. 3. Click the Start Recording button .

4. From the Device Commands menu , select Activate PDP Context. Wait until the status field in the Device Info window says ‘PDP Context Activated’. 5. From the Device Commands menu, select Start ICMP Ping. If you selected the Ping until stopped option in the Ping Settings dialog, select Stop ICMP Ping to stop the ping measurement. Otherwise, the ping will be repeated the user-defined number of times.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

157

IP PACKET CAPTURING
 Note that the Microsoft Network Manager needs to be installed on your computer BEFORE installing Nemo Outdoor! If you do not select this option, it will NOT be POSSIBLE to install Network Manager after Nemo Outdoor installation. With IP packet capturing, network packets sent between IP addresses are stored in log files and can be post-processed with a third party application such as Ethereal®. A separate log file is generated for each test terminal making data transfers. In order to use IP packet capturing in Nemo Outdoor, you must configure a dial-up connection (see the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for more information) and install the Network Monitor driver for the dial-up connection. After setting up the dial-up connection, go to Microsoft website at <http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=f4db40af-1e08-4a21-a26bec2f4dc4190d&displaylang=en> to download the free Network Monitor installation package. Select the NM32_x86_setup.exe installation file and click on Download. 1. Once the installation file is downloaded, double-click on it. The Microsoft Network Monitor 3.2 dialog appears. Click Yes to continue installation.

158

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

2. Click Next in the Welcome dialog.

3. In the End-User License Agreement dialog select I accept the terms in the License Agreement option, and click Next.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS

159

4. It is recommended to select the Use Microsoft Update when I check for updates (recommended) option. Click Next to continue with installation.

5. Select Typical in the Choose Setup Type dialog that appears.

160

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

6. Click Install in the Ready to install dialog.

7. Click Finish in the Completing the Setup Wizard dialog.

8. Next, install Nemo Outdoor. 9. Start Nemo Outdoor, add a device, and go to the Measurement Properties, General page. Click the Advanced button. In the Advanced Properties dialog, select the Enable IP Capture option.

Set up a dial-up connection (see Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions). 3.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 161  Note that if the Enable IP Capture item is not on the list.  To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. enable IP capturing in the Advanced Properties dialog. Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field.   Performing IP Packet Capturing: Network Monitor needs to be installed prior to installing Nemo Outdoor for IP packet capturing to show in Nemo Outdoor.pcap) for each measurement terminal for which IP capturing is enabled. you need to enable the packet decoding function prior to performing data measurements. The IP packet data is stored in a separate file (. .pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. 2. IP packet capturing data is stored in a separate file (. A separate . 1. In Nemo Outdoor. This file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor.pcap) for each measurement terminal and the data can be analyzed with Ethereal. the Network Monitor driver is not installed.

The range of repeat script values is from 1 to 10. You can access this dialog by opening the Configuration Manager window. The script file is an ASCII file containing the list of numbers that are to be called. The extension for all Script files is . Repeat Script value defines how many times the script will be repeated during the measurements. You can choose any of the items in the list that opens when you click the Add button. Script dialog. Insert Script can be used to insert the contents of another script file into the current script.162 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MAKING SCRIPT FILES  Note that it is not possible to use scripts with scanners. . Select a row from the table and click the button to change the settings for that function. and clicking the Add button . The table in the middle shows a list of all the functions and parameters that will be executed during a measurement.nsf. The selected item is added to the script. choosing the Script item. Delete deletes the selected entry row. See the following chapter for an explanation of the different items under the Add button. Move Up moves the selected entry row up by one row in the script. Move Down moves the selected entry down by one row in the script. Modify can be used to edit an existing script entry. You can edit the Script file configuration in the Script Editor dialog.000. You can also open the same dialog by double-clicking the Script item or by rightclicking on the item and choosing Add from the consequently opened popup menu. The Script Editor dialog can also be opened by clicking the Script Editor button in the Measurement Properties.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 163 When the Use device settings for script commands option is selected. The next trigger occurs when the carrier RSSI value is different from the previous value. which means that when starting the measurement and when the first UMTS carrier RSSI value is received. Save saves the file with the existing name or if the script is a new one. 1. the IF condition is triggered. the settings that have been configured in the Measurement Properties dialog are used for the script settings. Open opens a dialog for selecting an existing script file to be modified or reviewed. New clears the entry fields for inserting new script values. Carrier RSSI value -68dBm  Triggers the IF string . The reference value is unknown. IF condition is triggered o “Is changed”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is changed  Whenever the UMTS carrier RSSI value changes. that number is used when you add a voice call in the script and the Voice Call Properties dialog does not appear. For example. the IF condition is triggered. For example. Carrier RSSI value in the log file: -70dBm  triggers the IF string 2. opens a dialog for inserting the file name. if you have defined a Voice number in the Measurement Properties – Configuration dialog. Carrier RSSI value -70dBm  nothing happens 3. Close exits the dialog.  Notes about script functions:  Scrambling code or removed scrambling code can be selected for conditional testing using the IF loop  Examples of conditions: o “Is different”: If UMTS carrier RSSI is different than -70dBm  Whenever the value is other than -70dBm.

GSM voice call example. For example. the script starts waiting for the system to be changed to UMTS. can be used in conjunction with conditional or wait commands as well. It should be noted that the actual call duration is set with line three. if a call should be stopped when the system changes from GSM to UMTS. the forced stop command can be used to end the call immediately after the system changes. Please note that in this case the data disconnection status is written as Normal data disconnect. The forced stop command.g. whichever comes first. a data transfer can be canceled if the serving system changes. or when system changes to UMTS. the Nemo Outdoor application will abort the data transfer automatically. . The call is ended with End a voice call (forced) with line 4 after 120 seconds. For example. Call duration is set to 120 seconds.164 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Script Transfer Stop Commands With the forced stop command it is possible to abort a current script command. If a data transfer is not completed during a userdefined time. or at most 120 seconds. with voice calls. In the example below. It is also possible to set a time duration for data transfers. e. instead of waiting for its completion. Voice call is started only in GSM and aborted when system changes to UMTS. After the call is connected.. Wait until system is UMTS but at most 120s. the voice call is started only when the serving system is GSM.

the voice call is continued normally until a 60-second call duration is reached.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 165 The forced stop command can be used also to stop active data transfers. or after 60 seconds. FTP data transfer is aborted immediately when the system changes to GSM. The call duration is 60 seconds. but at most for 60 seconds. In the example below the script waits until the system changes to UMTS. the voice call would be stopped immediately after inter-RAT handover occurred. If the system changes to GSM before 60 seconds. voice call is continued. The data transfer is aborted when the system changes to GSM. Once the system is in UMTS. whichever comes first. . The script stops. In the following you will see a PS data and voice call example. waiting until the system changes to GSM. If line eight were End a voice call (forced). or after 60 seconds. the script waits 5 seconds before making a voice call followed by PDP context activation and FTP data transfer.

The voice call is aborted when the system changes to GSM. or after 60 seconds.166 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the following you will see another PS data and voice call example. but data transfer is continued normally with the Stop FTP transfer (Normal) command. . or after 60 seconds. The data transfer and voice call are aborted when the system changes to GSM. whichever comes first.

See earlier chapters for more detailed information on the dialogs.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 167 Add Menu The Add menu contains all the items that can be used in a script. . Selecting an item may open a dialog where you need to define some parameters and settings. The Start External Application item is described in more detail on page 148.

168 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Script Editor. With the Wait until the time is option you can define a point in time after which the script continues. make calls to service numbers that work by using DTMF tones.g. by clicking Add and selecting Send DTMF Characters you are able to send DTMF sequences. This command can only be used during voice calls. In the Wait Settings dialog you can define different conditions for the wait. . Wait Settings To add pauses in the script. select Wait. You can e.

It should be noted that the number of synchronization points between script files used in the same script group should be equal. it is not necessary to use the script group. Both synchronization methods can be used together or separately depending on needs of the user.  Note that also custom-made notifications can be selected here. For example. As many synchronization points as needed can be added to the script files. The Wait for script synchronization is seen on line two for both devices. With the Last notification option you can define a wait period after certain event notifications. Nemo Outdoor’s script group functionality enables you to synchronize the script files and/or certain lines in the script file for certain devices. you can make the script pause for 60 seconds after a call attempt event. For example. you can set a 10 second pause after a voice call is finished and before the next call starts. In the following example below both devices are doing PS data transfers. Script files for both devices are identical except that IP address is different. This will prevent the script from continuing before the call attempt has completed. . The idea is to start FTP download simultaneously. In this example. Both devices have been assigned for the same script group called “PS data”.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 169 With the Wait for all scripts to be synchronized option you can place multiple synchronization points inside the script file. With the Current time option you can define a pause between items in the script. Script groups are useful especially if certain devices and when script files are needed to be synchronized. Wait for script synchronization command has been selected for both devices in the Wait settings dialog.

. 2. For example. you can make the script wait until the system changes from GSM to UMTS. Then define from which point onwards the wait time is calculated: from the current time or after a certain event notification. call attempt. The until: Current system option enables you to define that the script file continues only when the system selected from the drop-down menu is in use. If you selected the Last notification or Next notification option.170 Nemo O ut door User M a nual With the Next notification option you can make the script wait for a certain event notification to appear. 3.  Adding a pause in the script file: 1. define also the maximum wait time in seconds after which the script will continue. But at most value is the maximum wait time in seconds if the defined notification does not appear. First define the wait time in seconds. such as.

the commands between the If Condition and End If commands will be performed. Serving sys. Click OK. Next. and if the criteria are not met. In this example the serving system must be UMTS FDD. Here you can define criteria which have to be met until a set of commands between the If . Click on the Field tab to select a system and a parameter from the drop-down menu. Click Add to list to add the condition to the list. and move them to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. select it and click Remove. In the Condition and Value fields you can define the value conditions for the parameter which have to be met for the commands inside the If-End If block to take place.End If block in the script takes place.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 171 Advanced Conditional Blocks By selecting Advanced | If/End If. . this set of commands will be skipped altogether and the script resumes from the first item after the End If command.End If block. You can select the system in the Value drop-down menu. If you want to remove the condition from the list. In the following example script. you will enter the If Condition Settings dialog. Outdoor will perform the set of commands within the If .=5 on the fourth row in the Parameters field indicates the criteria that were set earlier. If the criteria set in this dialog are met. add commands to the script from the Add menu. If the criteria are met.

By going to Add | Advanced | Loop/End Loop. you will enter the Loop Settings dialog. You can select from the following loop options:  Repeat the loop x times .172 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Loops You can add loops in the script files.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 173    Repeat the loop for x minutes Repeat the loop until the time is x Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met With the Repeat the loop as long as the following criteria are met option you can set conditions for the loop to take place. . the loop has been set to be repeated twice before continuing with the script. Click OK and add the wanted script commands in the script from the Add menu. In the first example. Then define the condition and value for the selected parameter. Finally click Add to list and OK to add the loop in the script. Click the Field button to select a parameter. You can move the commands to their appropriate places with the Move Up and Move Down tabs. In the example below the voice call within the loop will be repeated twice before continuing with the script.

As soon as there is a handover from UMTS to GSM. The condition for the loop is that the parameter value needs to be greater or equal to -5. In the example below the script is set to start and continue making calls only when and as long as the call is connected to UMTS.174 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The second loop option allows the user to define criteria which need to be met for the loop to be repeated. Click Add to list and OK. . In the example below the system and parameter (UMTS | Ec/N0 (Active)) have been selected from the Field drop-down menu. the call stops. The commands inside the loop block will be performed only and as long as the Ec/N0 (Active) value is greater or equal to -5.

Nemo Outdoor will start running the script when you click the Start Recording button. you can stop the recording (Measurement | Stop or Stop button ). The script can be different for each device. select the script in the Script File field. The program will now conduct the measurement as defined in the script file.  To run the script file: 1.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 175 Running Scripts After you have created a script. Activate the Start/Stop Scripts (F8) button . it will be saved and you can load it for measurements later on. 3. Nemo Outdoor will start running the measurement according to the script file. After the script is finished.54). Note that if you have selected the Start Scripts Automatically option in the User Interface Properties. Note that you need to define the script for each device individually. Scripts dialog. 2. General dialog (see p. . In the Measurement Properties.

g. "%y%b%d_%n means that the filename looks as follows: 06May31_1. select Measurement | Start Measurement List to open the Measurement List dialog. For example. Each measurement is recorded in a separate file. Filename defines the filename format. By default. In Online mode. measurement list files (*. e. The default format is %y%b%d %H%M%S (year-month-day hours-minutes-seconds. Scheduled measurements displays a list of measurements that will be run when the measurement list is started. Click Add New to add new measurements and Remove to delete selected measurements from the list.nmix) are saved to Configuration files folder.176 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MEASUREMENT LISTS Measurement lists enable you to run automated measurements with several devices combining multiple scripts. 06May31 165246) but you can use any combination of the items below. %a %A %b Abbreviated weekday name Full weekday name Abbreviated month name . The last number (%n) is the sequence number for measurement files recorded that day. Each measurement will be recorded in its own file. You can also use measurement lists in idle mode. Click Load to load measurement lists and Save to save measurement lists.. You can use measurement lists with just one device to run several scripts one after another.

Define the size in kilobits (KB). depending on registry settings. Properties opens the Measurement Properties .    Select the When all scripts are completed option to finish once all scripts have finished running. Sunday is 0) Week of year as decimal number. depending on registry settings. no characters if time zone is unknown %Z Measurement completion defines when the measurement list is finished. Define the time in hours and minutes (hh:mm). Click the Script Editor button to edit the selected script. with Sunday as first day of week (00 – 53) Weekday as decimal number (0 – 6./P. Start runs the measurement list.M. no characters if time zone is unknown Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation. Select the After recording duration option to finish after recording has been going on for a certain period of time.Script dialog. Select the At measurement size option to finish when the total size of the measurement files reaches a certain limit. indicator for 12-hour clock Second as decimal number (00 – 59) Week of year as decimal number. Devices table displays a list of devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. as decimal number Either the time zone name or time zone abbreviation.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 177 %B %d %H %I %j %m %M %n %N %p %S %U %w %W %y %Y %z Full month name Day of month as decimal number (01 – 31) Hour in 24-hour format (00 – 23) Hour in 12-hour format (01 – 12) Day of year as decimal number (001 – 366) Month as decimal number (01 – 12) Minute as decimal number (00 – 59) Sequence number (1 – ) Sequence number (1 – ) Current locale's A. as decimal number (00 – 99) Year with century. . with Monday as first day of week (00 – 53) Year without century.M. Script file defines the script file used in the measurement.

. Select a device from the Devices list. Select a script from the Script File field. click Start. 4. FORCING FUNCTIONS Nemo Outdoor offers a set of forcing functions that are accessible through the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Select the When all scripts are completed option. To save the measurement list. See the terminal-specific data sheets for more information on the forcing features available for each terminal. You can edit the selected script by clicking the Script Editor button. some terminals support more forcing features that are accessible via the mobile keypad. 7. click Save. In addition to these. Channel Locking  This functionality is available for GSM and UMTS mobiles only. As the base station can carry several channels simultaneously. Click the Add New button to add a new measurement. 3. You can lock GSM and UMTS test mobiles to a channel and/or scrambling code during the measurement process. In other words. Note that if you are using the single mode. you are actually locking the mobile only to the base station supporting that channel at that moment if you make a call. you must keep the test mobile connected to the power cord. the Neighbor Stations window displays only Serving Cell values. 6. Repeat the previous steps until you have a complete measurement list. If the mobile is not connected to the power cord and the program switches it off. 2. Note that even though you are locking the mobile to a certain channel in idle mode. The measurement list is finished after all scripts have been completed. Finally.178 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Creating a measurement list: 1. you must switch the mobile on manually. 5. the channel used cannot be totally controlled by the mobile as the system will assign the channel. the connection can be established or handed over to another channel but not to another base station.    To lock the Nemo Outdoor test mobile to a channel: Note that when the channel lock is activated.

The button will remain pushed down indicating that channel lock is activated. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Channel Locking. A red Lock indicator will appear in the Devices window when a lock is activated. . 2. click the Device Settings button in Device Info window of the appropriate mobile and select Channel Locking. The following dialog will appear on your screen.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 179 1. Click the Unlock button in the Forcing functions | Channel locking dialog to release the channel lock. 3. Enter the system and channel number and/or scrambling code within the given limits (it must be a valid channel/scrambling code number) and click the Lock button. When you have connected the measurement device.

 Always remember to switch the mobile power off and on again to activate/deactivate the band lock. You can use band locking if you want to compare how the network functions with different bands and systems. open the Band Locking dialog and click the Unlock button.180 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Band Locking  This functionality is available only with GSM mobiles. To release the band lock. The dialog below will be opened: ) and choosing Choose a band or system from the list and click the Lock button. . The band lock will be released after you switch the mobile power off and on. You will need to switch the mobile off and on to activate the band lock. Click Close to exit the dialog. A red Lock indicator will appear in the Devices window when a lock is activated. You can open the Band Locking dialog by clicking the Device Settings button ( Band Lock from the popup menu. Using the Band Locking dialog. This will lock the mobile to the band/system you have chosen. you can force the mobile to use only one band or system at a time.

If the command fails. the user can set a new target cell and press the Handover forcing button again. force a handover to every neighbor cell. i. The user has three mode request commands. Once the terminal is locked to scrambling code 6. The BCCH ARFCN can be used to select the broadcast control channel (1-885) you want to force the handover to. Open the Handover Control dialog (Device Settings button | Handover Control). Start a measurement and initiate a call (Device Commands button | Start Voice Call). The BSIC field defines the Base station identification code for the target cell. Normal mode. You do not have to wait for the mobile to make handovers. send a new Handover Forcing command with different bias values or forced the terminal to different scr. enhance target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP. It is also possible to send the same command several times without clicking other commands (i. the corresponding button will indicate this. and degrade non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP) . If the terminal accepts the command made by the user. Define the channel and handover type and click OK. Forcing handovers can be used to check that they work properly. for example. the device can be forced to scrambling code 6.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 181 Handover Control  This functionality is available only with SAGEM GSM mobile and certain Nokia terminals.e. For example. Handover forcing and Handover suppression. or in GSM to a different channel without first deactivating HO forcing).e. code. as you can. The Target cell settings and Non-Target cell settings fields enable the user to define 3G offsets. the user is notified.

but the wanted target cell is in WCDMA.182 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual During Normal mode. The system field shown in the Target cell field shows in real time whether the serving system is GSM or WCDMA. the target cell and non-target cell settings are disabled. When the serving system is GSM. . forcing is disabled and the terminal performs 2G and 3G handovers normally. band locking can be used first to lock the terminal to WCDMA. In case the current serving system is GSM.

in the example below active set includes only one scrambling code. Handover forcing is done by biasing target and non-target cell Ec/N0 and RSCP values. the terminal active set includes scrambling code 63 with Ec/N0 value -7.6dB shown as a brown curve. Scrambling code 6 and 255 are seen in the monitored set with colors blue and green. . When the mode is changed back to Normal mode the terminal reports unbiased values. By pressing the Handover forcing button. For example.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 183 Once target cell settings including biasing information are defined by the user. In the next example regarding Forced 3G handover and measurement report modification. Scrambling code 6 is selected to be a target cell. handover mode can be changed to Handover forcing mode by pressing the button. Therefore it is also possible to bias the current active cell. the terminal reports biasing Ec/N0 and RSCP values as set by the user.

Scrambling code 6 is seen with Ec/N0 value -18.7dB. This situation is active as long as forcing/biasing is enabled. Once the mode is changed back to normal. .184 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Once the button is pressed. Scrambling codes seen in the monitored set are decreased -10dB.2dB (brown) and scrambling code 255 (green) is removed from the monitored set. scrambling code number 6 is added to active set with Ec/N0 value -4. The device sends measurement reports to the network with biased values. the terminal starts reporting unbiased values.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 185 When the Handover suppression button is pressed. See Making Scripts on page 162. to find the edge of a cell by stopping the handovers from taking place when driving away from a base station. the terminal is not allowed to do handovers to other cells. You can use this feature. Biasing/ measurement report message modification is not possible with GSM at the moment. for example. .  Note that with scripts you can also perform handover forcing from one system to another. It should be noted that target cell biasing can be done only with WCDMA.

and only barred cells (Reverse). The Cell Barring dialog is accessed by clicking the Device Settings button in the Device Info window of the appropriate mobile and selecting Cell Barring.186 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Cell Barring  This functionality is available for GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only. also cells that are barred (Ignore). CELL TESTING The surrounding cells of a location can be tested through an automated list of test calls that are locked to a cell at a time. . all cells. that is. With the Nemo Outdoor GSM measurement mobiles you can also access barred cells. You can also select Measurement | <device name> | Cell Barring. During the measurement you can select if you wish to access only cells that are accessible to all end users (Accept).

The green color indicates successful attempts. only cells stronger than the value defined here will be included in the test Ec/N0 threshold: if the cell to be tested is a UMTS cell.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 187 Phone number defines the phone number that is called at the outset of the cell test. only cells that are stronger than this value will be included in the test Maximum number of calls defines the maximum number of calls that are made in the test Voice call settings | Maximum number of retries defines the maximum number of retries to a cell if no voice connection is formed. and the number the number of attempts. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. and after that the test continues with the attempt to create a PDP context with the cell. without this call the neighbour list may remain empty. This is necessary since if the cell from which the cell testing is performed is a strong one. After the maximum voice connection attempts Nemo Outdoor continues to the next cell or to packet call testing Packet connection settings | Maximum number of retries defines the access point name for the packet connection and the maximum number of retries for the connection attempts to a cell. The choice of test case also affects the displayed fields in this dialog. Test cases defines whether the user wishes to perform Voice call or Packet call testing or both by selecting Voice & Packet in the drop-down menu. . the test starts with a voice connection attempt. if Voice call is selected. If the user selects both. For example. The Test results page shows the progress of the test. During the call the neighbor list which defines the cells to be tested is updated. no Packet call settings are displayed RX level threshold: if the cell to be tested is a GSM cell.

click on Channel Configuration. and go to Measurement Properties | Frequency scanning. GSM/UMTS scanner. Connect your mobile phone to Nemo Outdoor. Next. 2. Hence. Go to Device Settings in the mobile’s Device Info window in Nemo Outdoor.  Note that both BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection need to selected . the mobile is able to detect also missing neighbors through the missing neighbor detection functionality. inter-frequency. Missing neighbor detection is based on comparing scanner measurements with the neighbor list of the mobile. Select BSIC decoding and Missing neighbor detection in the Scanning Options view. 2. but is detected/measured by the scanner.188 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MISSING NEIGHBOR DETECTION With Nemo Outdoor you can perform real-time missing neighbor detection. or 3. A terminal sees/measures only cells in the neighbor list. Missing neighbor detection with a mobile 1. Each cell has list of neighboring intra-frequency. a possible missing neighbor refers to a cell that is not in the neighbor list of the mobile at a given time. and inter-system cells. In mobile only missing neighbor measurements. You have three options in which to perform missing neighbor detection: 1. whereas a scanner measures all available cells. with a mobile terminal supporting missing neighbor detection. GSM/UMTS scanner and a GSM/UMTS mobile.

Once the selected scans have been performed. You can select one or more. Start the device by pressing on the work online button if you have not done this already. and go to Device Commands | Start Single Shot Scanning or Start Continuous Scanning. Nemo Outdoor compares the scanning results to the neighbor list of the serving cell before scanning was initiated and reports possible detected missing neighbors. You can select multiple channels by clicking on one and dragging the mouse. Click OK in the Select Channels and the Measurement Properties dialogs. 5.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 189 3. 6. . or all bands in the Band drop-down menu. 4. In the Select Channels dialog select the channels you want to scan and click Add.

Nemo Outdoor compares these two measurements and. select Measurement Properties. Configure the devices so that they are measuring the same frequency (click the Device Settings button in the scanner’s Device Info window. 32. such as.190 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Missing Neighbor Detection with a Scanner/Scanner and Mobile You will need a GSM/UMTS scanner or a GSM/UMTS scanner and a GSM/UMTS mobile. the scanner needs either of the following options enabled: GSM Layer 3 or GSM/WCDMA decoding. note that it is recommended to use default values to prevent false missing neighbor detection results. the maximum number of missing neighbors is 32. the channel is not detected as a missing neighbor. based on the data. You can observe the missing neighbors in a bar graph and also view some important network parameters. In GSM Missing Neighbor detection. From Measurement | <device name>. Click on Enable to start the missing neighbor detection. Select the same channels that the mobile is measuring and click OK. The user can also set a minimum RX level threshold for missing neighbor. default -95dBm . click Channel Configuration). A scanner scans all possible pilots whereas a mobile scans only channels that are on its neighbor list. However. If the measured RX level is below the threshold. reports the neighbor channels that are seen by the scanner but are not in the mobile's neighbor list. Connect a mobile and a scanner to Nemo Outdoor. select Missing Neighbor to open the following dialog. Ec/N0.   Number of missing neighbors: Max. If you are performing missing neighbor detection with a scanner only.-110dBm. default 3. RX level: -50. Difference to Strongest. and RSCP related to the missing neighbors. The field displays the scanner(s) used.

The bar graph with the selected parameter will display the missing neighbor channel(s). . click the New Layer button and select the parameter in the Y box). PILOT POLLUTION ANALYSIS Available for UMTS and CDMA networks. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/N0 value is below -12dB. Select Device Settings | Pilot Pollution Analysis. In a pilot pollution situation there are more active/monitored pilots than a handset can measure. and analysis is always active. Ec/N0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -12dB. The pilot signal is used to distinguish cells in the network from one another. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor user interface. with a Missing Neighbor Ec/N0 layer (Data | Bar Graph | New. The user can define thresholds for pilot pollution analysis via Nemo Outdoor’s UI. Pilot Pollution Analysis measurements can be performed in real time with Nemo Outdoor by using test terminals or a scanning receiver.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 191 Open a bar graph. Pilot pollution analysis is done based on CELL MEASUREMENT events. Pilot pollution is detected when all the criterias match. for example. or there is no clear dominance for any pilots in the area.

RSCP active set best above threshold (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -95dBm. pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. RSCP (Ec) active set best above threshold (for CDMA): The default value is set to -95dBm. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the best reported active set Ec/I0 value is below -12dB. The event includes the following information:         Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/N0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) . The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/I0 of active set best cell. Pilot count threshold (for UMTS): The default value is set to 3. Pilot pollution analysis is done when reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm Polluter level window from best active set cell (dB) (for UMTS): The default value is set to -6dB. Pilot count threshold (for CDMA): The default value is set to 3. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the reported active set best RSCP value is above -95dBm. Pilot count includes active and neighbor sets. Start recording by clicking on the Start recording button . UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis on Mobile Phone Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own.192 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Ec/I0 active set best below threshold (dB) (for CDMA): The default value is set to -12dB. For example. Polluter level window from best active set cell (for CDMA): The default value is set to -6dB. Pilot pollution analysis is done when Ec/I0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/I0 value. The number of cells that are within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. called ”CELLPOLLUTION”. pilot pollution analysis is performed when more than three pilots are detected within the user-defined window from the Ec/N0 of active set best cell. For example. Pilot pollution analysis is done when the Ec/N0 values of polluting pilots are within -6dB from the best active set Ec/N0 value. The pilot count includes active and monitored sets.

and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 193  NOTE! Cell site file (BTS file) is not used with scanning receivers with Nemo Outdoor at the moment.  Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen. .

called ”CELLPOLLUTION”.194 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual UMTS Pilot Pollution Analysis Based on Scanner Measurements   Ec/N0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/N0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis . The event includes the following information:         Source system Source band Source channel number Pilot pollution scrambling code Pilot pollution Ec/I0 Pilot pollution RSCP Cell name of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) Cell ID of polluting pilot (if cell site file is used) .Mobile Phones Pilot pollution analysis results are written to a log file as an event of their own.

ETSI 05.05 requirements for the interference rejection are:     Co-channel channel interference: z = 9 dB 200 kHz adjacent channel: z = -9dB 400 kHz adjacent channel: z = -41dB 600 kHz adjacent channel: z = -49dB .Scanners   Ec/I0 values for pilots are less than -12dB Ec/I0 values of the pilots are within -6dB from the best Ec/N0 value GSM Interference Analysis In GSM mobile communication networks.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 195  Note that pilot pollution analysis takes some time to happen. system capacity is often limited by co-channel interference. and the results are based on earlier cell measurement events. CDMA Pilot Pollution Analysis . and that the margin is -9 dB C/I for adjacent channel interference with voice. Interference source can be a BCCH or TCH channel. or adjacent channel interference when surrounding cells use a channel too close to the serving cell used by a terminal. This is because of the surrounding cells using the same carrier frequency. or it can be also from out of band in some circumstances. The GSM recommendations state that reference interference will be achieved at a minimum C/I margin of 9 dB for co-channel interference. With packet switched data connection C/I margin should be much higher.

Interference detection is done based on GSM terminal and GSM scanner measurements and these measurements are combined together. BCCH decoding must be enabled with a scanning receiver to decode BSIC information. the sub values are used to make correct analysis in case DTX downlink is used. GSM terminal continuously reports RX level. Triggering points in dedicated mode are:  RX level sub and RX quality sub. With RX level and RX quality. The user must enable interference analysis similarly. RX quality and C/I values. Power of adjacent channels are (+/ . OR RX level sub and C/I These two combinations are observed all the time during the measurement to trigger interference analysis. The user can define triggering limits via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. During dedicated mode. Due to this limit interference analysis in idle mode cannot be performed with all GSM test terminals. RX quality sub and C/I reported by terminal are observed. the terminal reports the LQE (Link Quality Estimate) value to the network. During this time the C/I value reported by the terminal is not valid. or BCCH if no TCH channel data is found. Once triggering is done.1) is also measured by the scanning receiver. RX level sub. It should be noted that the C/I value is not available with all test terminals in idle mode. C/I value measured by the terminal is not available all the time in dedicated mode. Analysis is based on TCH channel numbers if valid data is available.g. C/I average value is used. as with. Default values are:    RX Level Sub is above or equal user-defined threshold (default value -90 dBm) RX Quality Sub is above or equal user defined threshold (default value 4) Channel average C/I is below or equal user defined threshold (default value 10 dB) The following data is extracted from the terminal and written to the terminal measurement file:     Terminal serving channel number or TCH channels in case of frequency hopping Cell ID RX level sub . A decent RX level with a simultaneous poor C/I value is a clear sign of an interference situation. Please note that all test terminals do not report C/I value. missing neighbor detection. the power of BCCH channel used by a terminal is measured also by a scanning receiver. when AMR speech codec is used.196 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual GSM co-channel and adjacent channel analysis is done in real time during the measurement and playback with Nemo Outdoor. In idle mode C/I and RX level values are used to trigger interference analysis from the BCCH channel. For example. e. If frequency hopping is used.

. RX level and BSIC for channel X Channel number. Table grid and bar graph. If BTS file is used also cell names for the serving and interfering cells can be seen during the measurement and playback. the following data is extracted from scanner measurements and written to terminal measurement file:    Channel number. Nemo Outdoor includes two predefined custom windows for GSM interference analysis. RX level and BSIC for channel (X+1) Results are written to IANALYSIS event and can be displayed in different views. for example. in a table grid and bar graph. RX level and BSIC for channel (X-1) Channel number.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 197   RX quality sub C/I if available For each terminal serving channel number X.

Click the Stop Testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. Select Measurement | <device name> | Timeslot Testing and the Timeslot Test Configuration dialog will be opened. Run Test Until Completed option keeps the test running until all the timeslots have been tested. .  Note that if you select the Run Test Until Completed option. This must be a valid number. Phone Number Used for Testing defines the test call number. it is possible to test the timeslots of any particular channel. The Specify call duration option enables you to define a time in seconds that the call will last. With Nemo Outdoor.198 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual TIMESLOT TESTING  This functionality is available for certain GSM and GSM/UMTS dual-mode mobiles only. the test may continue indefinitely.

for example. When there are no more white slots left. This happens. Click on the … button to enter the Select Channel dialog. The Number of Call Attempts field tells how many calls have been made so far. for example. the measurement will stop on its own. in the case they are already reserved for data testing. Selecting timeslots will exclude them from the test. In the table you can see a list of all the TCHs of the selected channel and their timeslots. Click the Stop testing button to interrupt the timeslot test. Timeslots used by BCCH refers to the timeslots that are used for system messaging and therefore cannot be accessed with mobiles. . i. Save results to file defines whether the report is saved to a file Save results to clipboard defines whether the report is saved on the clipboard after testing. if the user stops the testing.e. On the Test results page you can view the progress of the test. and the number in the slot the number of calls made in the timeslot. all time slots except for the ones that were excluded from the test by selecting them (grey). Those white timeslots that were not tested will turn red. There is a yellow frame around the timeslot that was accessed during the previous call. Green color indicates channels and their timeslots that have been called.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 199 In the Channel Settings | BCCH channel you define the Channel (BCCH) that you want to test.

It is possible to view selected parameters in graphs by drag and dropping them in it.200 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING GRAPHS There are four types of graphs in Nemo Outdoor: line and scatter graphs. . and vertical and horizontal bar graphs. See page 321 for opening custom windows. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. select Data | [graph type] | New. There are some pre-made custom windows of each graph type that offer easy access to relevant network parameters. To open an empty graph.

After this. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the Parameter tree. First. Clear the Windows button. Clear the Parameters button.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 201 Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. The Parameters view contents can be filtered using the Parameters and Windows buttons. . and all the custom windows will be hidden. The options listed in the graph popup menu will be introduced next. Graph Popup Menu Right-click on the graph to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the graph. and all parameters will be hidden. right-click on the wanted parameter from the parameter tree and select the graph type in which you want the parameter to be opened.

Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.202 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a . .jpg image. For example. if you select LTE FDD. The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. See page 307 for more information on view groups. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.

Select parameters in the Parameters tree and move them to the editing table with the right arrow button . Autoscroll Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the graph view scroll as the measurement progresses. the axis changes depending on the active layer. Axes define the parameter for the left and right axes in the bar graph. You can also open it by clicking the Graph Properties dialog button . Select Yes in the Hide panels in full screen mode if you want panels to disappear once you enter full screen mode. You can also define different parameters for the axes. If you select Default. Remove a parameter from the table by selecting it and clicking the left arrow button . Select Yes in the Show value labels field to view the parameter value as a numerical label above the bar in the graph. Edit Parameters By selecting the Edit Parameters item in the menu you will enter the Edit Parameters dialog.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 203 Graph Properties Right-click on a graph window and choose Properties from the popup menu to open the Graph Properties dialog. This is especially useful if you have two layers open and they have different scales.

do the same in reverse.204 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also quickly find parameters through the filter field. To zoom out. . dragging the mouse from a red dot to a green dot. Values Select Values in the popup menu to view the Values view in the graph side panel. Side Panel Right-click on a graph window and choose Side Panel from the popup menu. drag your mouse diagonally from either corner with the green dot towards the corners with the red dots. Full Screen Selecting the Full screen item in the popup menu will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. You can also open it by clicking the Side Panel dialog button . This functionality is particularly useful for viewing textual parameters. and down arrow buttons The parameters will be shown in the Values view in the Graph side panel. Use the up to move the parameters in the editing field. Layers Select Layers in the popup menu to view the Layers view in the graph side panel. Zoom .Scatter Graph To zoom in on a scatter graph.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 205 .

The layer is now removed. For example.Layers The layers can be dragged and dropped on some toolbar buttons. . a layer can be dragged and dropped on the Remove layer button to remove the layer. The order of the layers can also be changed by dragging them with the mouse.206 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Graph Side Panel .

you can also click on the X button in the right-hand corner of the Layers view. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view. Right-click on the Layers view to view the Layers popup menu. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 207 To create space in the graph side panel. right-click on the graph and select Layers in the popup menu. To reopen the view.

Move Group Up. Move Group Down and Group Similar Layers items are used in editing and organizing layer groups. Rename Group.208 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grouping Layers The New Group. Parameters in the same group will be displayed in the same scales and the different groups will be stacked in the graph. Remove Group. Layer groups can be used to group parameters with the same unit and scale. . The Layers view displays all parameters added in the graph.

. The parameters will be organized into groups based on the parameter unit.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 209 Righ-click on the view and select Group Similar Layers.

You can also assign the parameter into a layer group. New Layer The New Layer command creates a new layer. line style and color. such as. . Select a parameter in the Y or X field. Click Add to add the new layer and Close to exit the dialog. renamed and moved up and down. You can also create a new group and drag and drop parameters into the group. See Layer Properties on page 211 for more detailed information. Define the layer properties.210 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Groups can be removed.

The Layer Properties dialog can be used to edit the selected layer. The Color field determines whether the graph line is colored with a Classic (algorithmic) or fixed color set.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 211 Hide Layer The Hide Layer button hides the selected layer. . See p. 216 for more information on graph layer color configuration. Line width defines the line thickness in pixels Stairs defines whether the line is drawn connecting two points using two lines (giving a "stairs" appearance) or one straight line Sort(Y): Support for data sorting based on y-value in bar graph. Layer Properties Click on the Layer Properties icon to enter the Layer Properties dialog. Data can be sorted based on descending or ascending order Draw as area defines whether the area below the line is filled Area transparency defines transparency value used in filling the area (0 = totally opaque. 100 = totally transparent) Averaging refers to whether moving average is used in drawing the line There is an option to manually configure graph layer colors. The dialog can also be accessed by double-clicking a layer in the panel. Remove Layer The Remove Layer button removes the selected layer. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. or whether a color set based on parameter values is used.

. RACH TX Power.g. it is possible to define various filters: Channel: list of channels whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or. no filtering is used TopN(Y): Support for best TOP-N filtering based on y-value in line and bar graphs. If Automatic scale is set to Yes.. The data tip will display information from that point of time. only the best two values can be seen in the line or bar graph BottomN(y): This can be done by selecting number of topN and select sorting order. appropriate filtering is not used so that it is possible to filter only channels... so the maximum and minimum values are not dependent on the values that are displayed. for example. below bottom three RX levels are shown. If Automatic scale is set to Yes. Parameters with instantaneous values display points instead of a line in a graph. If the list is empty. Hover the mouse cursor over the graph line or bar. . Automatic scale also needs to be set to No. Some of the graph types support data tips.. If the list is empty. no filtering is used Pilot: list of channels and pilots whose measurement values are shown (Ch = ch1 or ch2 or ch 3 or… AND Pilot 0 p1 or p2 or o3 or.).g. this is not used Maximum defines the maximum value of the scale if Automatic scale is set to No. only pilots or both Frequency: list of frequencies whose measurement values are shown (Freq = f1 or f2 or f3 or…). Minimum defines the minimum value of the scale. if the list is empty.). Note that if you want to select No in the drop-down menu. this is not used Minimum and maximum threshold define the maximum and minimum values at which the userdefined limits for a measurement result is set. RACH Preamble Step and RACH Preamble Count.. Such parameters are. no filtering is used TopN: only N best measurement results are shown based on a defined parameter. Point style allows you to select among various icons such as a triangle or a cross to display the instantaneous values in the graph Point size defines the size of the points in pixels in the graph Point transparency defines the degree of point transparency. Such graphs include also the following layer properties. Horizontal lines help determine if the value goes below or above the minimum and maximum values. E. E. Depending on the parameter. If 0.212 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Window size defines the number of values to be averaged Automatic scale the minimum and maximum values of the scale are defined automatically based on the minimum and maximum values visible on the screen Use value scale defaults: the minimum and maximum values of the scale can be defined by the user. if Automatic scale is set to No.

Arrow Down/Up The Arrow Down and Arrow Up icons will move the selected layer up or down in the graph panel. . and each of them has a different point style.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 213 In the following example three RACH parameters are shown in the graph. You can also change the order of the parameters in the graph by dragging them in the Layers view with the mouse.

and double-click on any parameter in the Values view to view the parameter properties. Graph Side Panel – Values & Parameter The Values view shows the layer parameter values at a specific point during the measurement defined by the position of the cursor in the graph window. a separate parameter window appears. Layers can be reorganized easily by simply dragging and dropping them from one device to another. . The Layer Device Selection dialog is a convenient way to change a device for several layers at once instead of using layer properties dialog for each layer separately.214 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Layer Device Selection The Layer Device Selection dialog enables you to view and reorganize layers by device. Select a layer in the Layers view. If a given parameter value consists of more than one value.

By clicking the maximize icon at the upper right-hand corner of a view it is possible to maximize the view. Click the exit icon at the top to close the view. above or below each other. the Parameters view is organized into tabs to view more than one parameter and its values. . In the example below all views are separate. beside. For example. In this example the Ec/N0 (active) parameter is selected.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 215 In the example above. in the example below the parameter view is embedded in the Values view. You can reopen the view by right-clicking on the graph and selecting Values. You can also drag and drop the Values and Parameter views inside.

scrambling codes. add parameters to the graph by dragging them from the parameter tree. cell ID. Graph Layer Color Configuration Nemo Outdoor offers an option to manually configure graph layer colors. .g. double-click on a layer in the Layers side panel to enter the Layer Properties dialog..216 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual By right-clicking on the Values view. First. you can access the Edit Parameters dialog (see page 203). and is very useful when observing a certain parameter or parameters. etc. to different channels. This feature can be used with line and bar graphs. as different colors can be assigned e. Next.

Click OK. click … to enter the Colors dialog. If you choose Fixed color. The graph will be colored based on the fixed color you selected.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 217 If you select the Classic (algorithmic) option for coloring the graph. . or define the RGB for the color. Define the fixed color by selecting it in the Standard or Custom page. Nemo Outdoor will pick up the color automatically.

Select a parameter in the Color set parameter drop-down menu.218 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Selecting Color set in the Color method drop-down menu will activate the Color set parameter and Color set fields. . and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. Note that only layer-specific parameters will be available in the Color set parameter menu.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 219 To edit the color set in question. button. The parameter will be colored based on its values in the graph. In the picture below you will see a bar graph colored based on BSIC numbers. . the channels without BSIC information appear in blue color. See Color Set Editor on page 278 for more information. It will lead you to the Color Set Properties dialog.. click on Edit Color Set. Here you can edit the color set selected. Each BSIC is presented with its own color.

220 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Similarly. . and channels without BSIC information are shown with black color. the picture below presents a bar graph where bars are colored based on BSIC numbers. All channels with BSIC information appear in green color.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 221 The example below shows a bar graph in which bars are colored based on channel numbers. .

 To view data in Packet decoder grids during playback. All events can be decoded by double-clicking on the event row. The options listed in the grid popup menu will be introduced next.222 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING GRIDS Along with the graph windows. QoS parameters. Layer2 and Layer 3 messages (the selection depends on the technology measured). To open several decoded message windows. Alternatively. Click on the parameter and drag it in the grid.pcap-file will be generated for the measurement. This requires Microsoft Network Monitor 3. The decoded message is displayed in a separate window. you need to enable the packet decoding function in Device Settings Measurement Properties | General | Advanced prior to performing data measurements. You can also drag and drop parameters from the parameter tree into grids. you can right-click on an event row and from the popup menu select Decode Message. such as statistics from the current measurement. you need to select which device(s) you would like to view in the grid from the Select Device(s) to View dialog. Open several grid windows to view multiple devices at the same time. An empty grid table is opened by selecting Data | [Grid Type] | New. in the Parameters grids you can view several devices simultaneously as separate columns. and this file needs to accompany the measurement file in the same folder when viewing and decoding packet capture information in Packet Decoder grids in Nemo Outdoor. the grid tables offer you useful information about measurement events. A separate . Select Full or Partial in the Enable IP Capture field.3 to be installed. However. . select Decode Message in New Window option. In most grids you only view one device in a grid at a time. It will be added there. and packet capture data. If you select one of the readymade custom windows and you have multiple devices connected to Nemo Outdoor.

and type the search string in the Search string field in the Find dialog. Select the grid view. Grid Popup Menu Right-click on the grid to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the grid. Depending on whether Up or Down direction is selected in the Direction field. press Ctrl + F.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 223 Find Function in Signaling Grid Based on Decoded Message You can use the Find functionality in signaling grids to find message(s) with a specific string in its decoded message. Note that the contents of the menu vary depending on the grid type. . the event next in the time sequence will be highlighted in the grid.

See page 307 for more information on view groups. . Right-click on the item to rename the custom window.  Note that not all events and parameters are available with all devices. You can set a text color and/or a background color for the selected events. Custom Windows item in the Configuration Manager dialog. Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids To make grids more clear. You can also access this dialog from the Data menu. select Call events (Event name) in the Background Color Set field and select (none) in the Text Color Set field. The dialog below is opened. and colors. or click on the Configure Colors button in the Grid Properties dialog.. Note that the contents of the Grid Color Configuration dialog depend on which columns have been selected in the Grid Properties dialog. If you want to colorize the background. and select Configure Colors from the popup menu. e. Alternatively.g. parameters displayed. You can use this dialog to save a custom window with a name. The new custom window is added under the User Interface. you can colorize certain events in a grid based on the event name or event ID. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group.224 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Save As Custom Window Right-click on a grid table and choose Save As Custom Window from the popup menu. select Call Events (Event name) in the Text Color Set field from the drop-down menu and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. if you want to colorize only the text in the grid. size. The Grid Color Configuration dialog is opened. as in the example below. In the events Grid Color Configuration dialog select the Event name column. Right-click on a grid. Save Changes Use the Save Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. Automatic Scrolling Select the Automatic Scrolling option in order to make the grid view scroll as the measurement progresses.

Make sure that the color set type is string. Here you can also add more strings to the color set through Add… .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 225 Click Edit to view the Color Set Properties dialog.

for example. defined in the Color Set Properties dialog. Finally. you can have a message appear in white text and blue background color. Below you will see an example of how to create a color set and set it for the background color. Click OK in the String Properties and Color Set Properties dialogs. It is possible to color-code both the text in the grid and the background color. in that case remember to create two new color sets for the same string. Decoded Text_1 and Decoded Text_2. In this case. you can also write a description for the string text in the Description field. If you want.278). it is also possible to color-code both text and background. Click Add… . click OK in the Grid Color Configuration dialog. While you can choose to colorize only one of them. Each color corresponds to a certain type of event.226 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the String Properties dialog specify the name of the string in the Text field and select the color code for it. However. Grid Color Configuration Based on Decoded Message in Grids Messages and Events grids can be color-coded based on a string in a message’s decoded message. You can see color-coded events in the grid data view. For example. you need to create a new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 227 In the Color Set Properties dialog type. Decoded Text in the Name field. Click Add… In the String Properties dialog type in the string which will determine the messages to be colored with the new color set. . You can also create a short name for the new color set. Select string as the color set type. or write a description for it. for example.

so (none) is selected in the Text Color Set field. and Decoded Text in the Background Color Set field. . Decoded Text. and Close in the Color Set Editor. You can colorize the text color in the grid and/or the background color. In this example the background will be color-coded.228 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click OK. If you want to colorize only the text. Click OK. in the Text Color Set field and select (none) in the Background Color Set field. Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. select the new color set created above.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 229 All messages with sysInfoType2 in its decoded message will be color-coded with the Decoded text color set. .

Color-coding a message based on its name is done in the same way as color-coding a message based on a specific string in its decoded message. However. or both.230 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grid Color Configuration in Events Grids Based on Message Name Messages in Events grids can also be color-coded based on the message name. Click OK. You can color-code the message text or the background color. Further. you need to type the name of the message you want to color-code instead of the string in the decoded message. . when creating the new color set in the Color Set Editor (see p. both the message text and background will be colorized. Below you will see an example of two color sets made for the same message name. 278) | Color Set Properties | String Properties. Also click OK in the Color Set Properties and Color Set Editor dialogs.

. All messages called SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH will be color-coded with the new color sets. Select Message_2 in the Text Color Set field and Message in the Background Color Set field. right-click on the messages grid and select Configure Colors. Click OK. or select Configure Colors in the Grid Properties dialog.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 231 Next.

Right-click on the grid and select Configure Colors. You can choose a color set for a selected parameter in the Text Color Set and Background Color Set dropdown menus depending on whether you want to color the text/values or the background of the text/values in the grid. In the Grid Color Configuration dialog click Use Defaults if no default color sets are shown in the Color Set field.232 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Grid Color Configuration for Parameter Grids Grids can be made clearer through colors. The Clear All button inactivates the default color sets. Open a parameters grid from Data | Parameters Grid. note that you need to use two different color sets for it. . Note that not all parameters have default color sets assigned to them. If you want to set a color set for both text and color for the same parameter.

.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 233 You can also edit the default color sets by selecting a color set and clicking Edit… In the Color Set Properties dialog you can change the default settings to the color set.

234 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Parameters with assigned color sets are colorized according to their value. In the example below a background of the parameter values has been color-coded. . Click OK twice to exit the Grid Color Configuration dialog.

In the Grid Properties dialog select a device and a parameter set to be viewed in the table grid. and Edit… The Color Set Properties dialog appears where you can change the color set settings. You can also edit the default color sets. Click OK. . select Configure Colors… the parameter you wish to edit. The parameters are colorized according to their default color sets.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 235 Grid Color Configuration for Table Grids Table grids have default color sets assigned to them. Click OK to exit the dialogs and go back to the table grid. Right-click on the grid. Go to Data | Table Grid | New.

236 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also view cell name information for missing neighbors when a scanner and a mobile are used simultaneously. only the selected messages will be displayed. Configure Filters/Quick Filter Another method to organize Events grids is to use filters. Right-click on a grid view and select Configure Filters from the popup menu . By using filters.

select hiding all lines.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 237 . In addition. button. Select the Hiding all option from the drop-down menu to hide all events in the grid window as default. A conditional row appears giving It is possible to set filtering rules for message name. . you can select a parameter in the Select Parameter dialog which you can access through the Other Parameter… item in the filter target popup menu. Select the Showing all option to display all events in the grid window as default. subchannel and decoded text. The Grid Filter Configuration dialog is opened. select showing all lines. You can add a filter rule for the grid by clicking on the plus you options based on which the grid filtering takes place. If you would like to hide one or more messages of a selected type and view others. If you would like to view one or more messages of a selected type and hide others.

the plus icon next to the first constituent needs to be clicked. the message is filtered out from the grid. a line is filtered out if a message contains a missing neighbor ec/n0 value that is less than -5. If a condition has two or more constituents. The second filtering rule states that if a message name contains the text SYSTEM_INFORMATION_BCH and if a message contains SysInfoType18. Note also that a separate. .238 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The contents of the condition menu vary depending on which item in the filter target menu is selected. In this case the conditions are indented and combined with one another with the text and if. In the example above. and both conditions need to be met for the filtering to take place. independent condition needs to be added from the plus icon at the top left-hand corner of the dialog.

You can now quickly define a filter for the selected layer message. In the message decoding grid you can use the Show Next Message and Show Previous Message grid toolbar buttons to move to the previous/next message. you can delete all filters by rightclicking on a grid and selecting Quick Filter and Remove All Filters from the popup menu. subchannel name or message text will be hidden. The Quick Filter menu offers a shortcut to defining filter rules for messages. subchannel (Hide This Subchannel) or according to the message text (Hide This Message). it is also possible to arrange the contents of the decoded message in three different ways. Alternatively. If you move forward or back in the message decoding grid. You can choose to hide the respective message and all similar messages either according to the Event (Hide this Event). All messages with the selected event. Select Remove All Filters to delete all filter rules. In the same way. Right-click on a row in the grid and select Quick Filter from the popup menu.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 239 The minus icon removes a row next to it from the list. Decode Message This function will open the selected event row in a decoded form. the text Filtering will appear in the title bar. use the Go to Message button to move to the same message in the messages grid. . With certain events such as cell measurement (CELLMEAS). You can also decode messages by double-clicking on the message row. Click the Copy to Clipboard button to copy the contents of the message decoding grid as text to clipboard. When filtering is enabled. you can choose to display messages of the selected type only.

and the Format as vertical table arranges the contents in a vertical table. . If no text is selected in the decoded text window.240 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Format as list arranges the contents of a grid’s measurement results in a list. all text in it will be copied. The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window. The Format as horizontal table arranges the contents in the form of a horizontal table with columns. This is the same as the Copy to Clipboard functionality. Select a string of text in the decoded text. right-click on it and select Copy to copy the selected text as text to the clipboard.

Select the parameters that you would like to include in the . Automatic Decode The Automatic Decode function opens up a window which displays the currently selected or latest message in decoded form. You can also save the entire grid window as an image file (. From Events grids.tab file.Grid The Save command allows you to save a selected event row as a text file (. . Also define a File name and Layer title for the exported . MapInfo Tab-File Export You can export measurement data into a MapInfo . If you select the Decoded Text option.tab file. you can export data into a MapInfo Tab-File or into a CSV file. In an Events grid. the decoded event text is saved in a text file. The MapInfo Tab-File Export dialog displays a list of parameters that can be exported.txt).jpg). select Save | MapInfo Tab-File.tab file. Save .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 241 Decode Message in New Window This function enables you to have several decoded message windows open at the same time.

CSV File Export You can export measurement data into a CSV file. Click OK in the MapInfo Tab-File Export to save the . In the Symbol Style dialog..tab file. . double-click the parameter or select a parameter and click the Change Symbol button. you can select the symbol and define some effects and background color for it. select Save | CSV File. In an Events grid. The symbol is used to draw the route in MapInfo.242 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual To change the symbol for each parameter. Finally click OK.

Define if the search results should match case and if the search should be applied to whole words only. semicolon. . You can also copy the entire grid window as an image and paste to another application. This presents an easy and quick way to select all lines. the decoded event text is copied on the clipboard. Find The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid. Indoor files are not supported at the moment. The file(s) can be opened with third-party applications.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 243 The exporting is supported for a single file. The user can select all events or only specific events from the grid for export. to be exported. Select All Through the Select All item you can select all events in an Events grid. The matches are highlighted in the grid one by one. press F3. You can also limit the search to decoded messages only. for example. press Shift+F3. Copy The Copy command allows you to copy a selected event row and paste to another application as text or as decoded text. Type in the Search string field what you are looking for. To move up to the next match. If you select the Decoded Text option. tab or space. and the column separator can be a comma. To move down to the next match.

Full Screen The Full Screen item enables you to view Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. Below you will see a list of commands for the decoded text view. You can remove the separator by clicking the open space and choosing Remove Separator from the popup menu. Right-click on a grid table and choose Add/Remove Separator from the popup menu. You can choose a statistic or a parameter and add an open space (a separator) above it by first clicking it and then choosing the Add Separator option from the popup menu. .244 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The search field in the decoded text window enables the user to find a string in the decoded message window.  Ctrl + Shift + F = Go to search field in decoded text view  Enter = Highlight next match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)  Shift + Enter = Highlight previous match in decoded text view (when search field is focused)  Esc = Clear search field in decoded text view (when search field is focused) Add/Remove Separator The Add/Remove Separator option is relevant only with parameters and Statistics grids.

Click the Configure Colors button to access the Grid Color Configuration dialog. for example. The available parameters are organized by technology and call mode in the All tab. The Grid Properties dialog is opened. Select the parameters that you would like to view in the grid and click OK. parameters.). You can also select individual parameters.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 245 Grid Properties Right-click on a grid table and select Properties from the popup menu. the UMTS option. You can select the events. Voice. . all the parameters under UMTS are selected.  Note that the appearance of the grid and the selection of parameters depend on the grid type and on the measurement device. UMTS. etc. In the Selected tab you can view which parameters you have selected and change their order using the arrow buttons. and statistics you would like to see in the grid table. If you select. Expand the branch by double-clicking on the main item (GSM.

In the Parameters dialog. The new parameter is added to the list in the Layer Parameters dialog. Click the Add button to define new parameters. click OK. Layer defines the layer messages from where the string is searched. for example.246 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual User Parameters The User Parameters function allows you to specify parameters from layer messages that will be automatically decoded and the values displayed in the Device Info window or in graphs. Click OK to exit the dialog. Select the parameter you just defined and click OK. expand the User Parameters item. Search string is the string that is searched from the decoded layer messages. Ordered MS power level. Click the User Parameters button in the Parameters dialog to access the Layer Parameters dialog. . After you have defined all the parameters. Parameter name and Short name refer to the long and short name of the parameter to be decoded.

The user can also perform more complex searches where the search key is split across multiple rows of data. . for example. User Parameters can be searched in messages grids.xml. to search and display multiple results in a single Layer 3 message.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 247 The list of user parameters that you have defined are saved in a file called Parameters. It is possible.

Save the .248 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Exporting/Importing User Parameters  Exporting user parameters It is possible to export and import user parameters from and to Nemo Outdoor. Scroll to the User Parameters folder. Select the ones you wish to export. To export user parameters. Next. The exported parameters will be saved on this file. 1. go to File | Export Settings in Nemo Outdoor. . The user parameters previously created are listed under the folder.aex file on your PC. 2. You can also select other items to be exported in the dialog. and click OK. the Export Settings dialog appears.

To import user parameters. Select the user parameters you wish to import in the Import Settings dialog.aex file that you saved earlier. . select File | Import Settings in Nemo Outdoor. 2. The selected user parameters and possible other items that you selected in the Export Settings dialog are now saved in the .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 249 3.  Importing user parameters 1.

If there already is a user parameter with the same name saved. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. First.250 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. Paths tab. The user parameters are now saved and are shown in the Nemo Outdoor parameter tree under User Parameters. For information on Indoor measurements. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views. See page 336 for a description of the Nemo Outdoor map toolbar buttons. Nemo Outdoor will open by default the map that you have entered in the Default Map field in the User Interface Properties dialog. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph. It is possible to view selected parameters in map by drag and dropping them in it. After this. refer to page 286.  Note that the Indoor map differs from the example below. The map window specific commands can be accessed through toolbar buttons as well as from the popup menu when right-clicking on the map. . the imported user parameter will replace it. VIEWING MAPS Open a map by selecting Data | Map | New. right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Map from the drop-down menu. Click OK.

or turning the color map to black and white.gst file in MapInfo Professional using the MapInfo MapX Geoset Utility tool (Geoset.jpg) and a . . The BTS icons display the antennas. Hover your mouse over the base station icon to see more information about the BTS.gif. Note that the BTS file is displayed only if there is a measurement file loaded on the map as well.gst) and loaded later on. We recommend you minimize the map size by reducing the number of colors to 256 or 16. The antennas are drawn in one degree steps.x of MapInfo Professional. the current location of the test vehicle will be displayed on the map as a circle on the route.id file. the .  Note that if there are more than five cells in a BTS. (Only for raster images). the base stations will be displayed. MapInfo Workspaces (*. The customized settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file (.wor file) cannot be directly opened with MapX. Also. If you are using a large map (size over 1 Mb). The corresponding image and . hovering above the notification icons will display a tooltip with information such as cell name (if cell site file is used) and channel number. updating the map window will slow down Nemo Outdoor functions. The . You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. When using vector data for MapInfo®.tab file contains information about a map (such as location coordinates) and is used by Nemo Outdoor to refer to a particular map. the BTS name will be truncated with “…” In this case. and the . there are three different files that need to be in the same directory. . This file (. Note that each MapInfo® map has two files: an image file (. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. you can define the current location manually. the channel numbers for the antennas. A line will be drawn from the test vehicle to the serving base station. the image file is the actual map image file.tab. and directions that the antennas point to. but can be saved as a .mbx) that ships with version 5. click on the BTS icon to view the rest of the cells. A new GPS event is created in the handler after which all location-specific data.map.tif. . When MapInfo raster maps are used. such as BTS cell names are displayed using the specified location.nbf) for the measurement file. . While viewing notifications on a map. You can customize the map view using the MapX properties. If there is no GPS connected to the system.tab file.gst) can be directly opened by MapX in Nemo Outdoor.tab files for Raster maps have to be in the same folder in order to view a MapInfo® map. If you select a BTS file (. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 251 If you have a GPS receiver connected to the test system. the distance to the serving base station is displayed in the status bar of the map window.

252 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Side Panel .

the following popup menu appears: In the popup menu you can select whether or not you want to show or delete a layer. when a multi measurement is loaded. See page 278 on how to create and edit color sets. The Add route functionality is useful. The item indicates a devicespecific measurement route on the map. it will resume its original position in the side panel. . You can also access the Properties dialog by right-clicking on the item and selecting Properties in the popup menu. You can also clear the option next to the layer item if you do not want to view it. The Show next waypoint field is only activated when at least one device and one GPS receiver are attached to Nemo Outdoor in online or offline mode. and you can also add a new route or a new BTS file from the popup menu or directly from the Layers view. Through the Properties item you can access the layer’s Properties dialog (see p. This functionality is not active during measurement playback. and you want to view all the routes in the Layers view and all the color legends in the Color legends view.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 253 The contents of the map side panel depend on which items have been selected in the map popup menu. and the item indicates a route plan. If you have loaded a multi measurement and added multiple routes with assigned color sets on the map.267). and Waypoints in the popup menu to view the three items above. When you double-click on the displaced view. Layers. Double-click on an item to access its Properties dialog (see p. or click on the X button next to the option to delete the layer. or dock it to another side of the map window following the arrows that appear when you drag the window. When you right-click on a layer. You can view three different kinds of items in the Layers view. Right-click on a map and select Color Legend.267). The Waypoints view is meant for controlling route plans. for example. The Color legends view shows the selected color set for a measurement route. the color legends will be shown next to one another in this view. You can drag each view to different places on the map as well. the item indicates a base station file connected to the measurement route. See the Route Plans chapter below for more information on waypoints.

rpf). . you can open it through the Open Route Plan item in the map toolbar or by right-clicking on the map and selecting Open Route Plan from the popup menu. or alternatively you can open a map manually from Data | Map | New. you can save them as a custom window for later use. The route plan (. Creating and Modifying Route Plans with Waypoints Start Nemo Outdoor with at least one device and a GPS receiver attached to it in online or offline mode. and if you have made any changes to the route plan properties in the map window.rpf). You can save a route plan as a Route Plan File (. In addition. The custom window will also contain changes made to the color set or Waypoints views. and is ready to be used in a measurement. By pressing Ctrl+A you can jump from one waypoint to the next. If you have previously created and saved a route plan (. or you can manually create one with the Add waypoint functionality both during a measurement and during playback. you can alter the route plans at any point through the control buttons in the Waypoints view in the map side panel. You can create route plans automatically from a measurement in playback mode.254 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Route Plans Route plans are useful when you want to follow a certain route while performing a measurement.rpf) is now viewed on the map and in the map side panel. You can select a ready workspace in the Nemo Outdoor Welcome page (see page 42) as you start Nemo Outdoor and view a map window.

The Show next waypoint option should be selected when you want to view the next waypoint on the map during a measurement. the Waypoint detection radius and Distance to next waypoint items will also be disabled. The next waypoint is shown on the route as a big circle. You can define waypoint-related settings in the Waypoint view in the side bar. and clicking on the map. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 255 You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu. Note that the Show next waypoint functionality is only enabled in online or idle mode. not during playback. or by selecting Add Waypoint in the map popup menu. If you clear the Show next waypoint option.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. . A new route plan (. and the Waypoints view is enabled.

Moreover. In addition. To select a waypoint on the map. the selected waypoint on the route plan will be deleted. The Distance to next waypoint field indicates how many meters there still are to the next waypoint from the current position on the route. This waypoint is shown as a bigger circle than the others. and the Distance to next waypoint field will display the appropriate distance in meters to the next waypoint. If you click on Delete. . the delete functionality is only enabled when the Select button is selected. If the deleted waypoint was the first waypoint on the route plan. You can make changes to the route plan through the four buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view. click on the Select button in the Waypoints view. As you approach the next waypoint during a measurement. so the figure decreases as you approach the next waypoint. the next waypoint on the route will be selected. the Delete button is only enabled with the Select button if there is more than one waypoint on the map. then select a waypoint on the map. and the previous waypoint on the route will automatically be selected and shown as a bigger circle. Reclick on Select to clear the functionality.256 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Waypoint detection radius slide bar indicates at which distance (meters) the next waypoint is selected. the next waypoint is selected on the map when distance to it is smaller than the distance selected in the slide bar.

. the layer list should have a new layer (“Untitled. and conversely if you click on either button when active. The route plan should closely follow the route from which it was created. you are able to place new waypoints in the route plan. Click on the Move button.rpf”). Start Nemo Outdoor. you can create a route plan from a measurement. The route plan should now be visible on the map. or zoom in on the map to make sure the measurement contains GPS coordinates. When you select either. If you click on either button when they are inactive. Create a route plan by clicking the Create Route Plan toolbar icon. they will both be activated. then selecting a specific waypoint on the map. load a measurement file and open a map window.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 257 You can move waypoints on the map by first clicking on Select. they will become inactive. and the control buttons on the Waypoints view should be enabled. Creating and Saving Route Plans from a Measurement In addition to creating a route plan with waypoints. Right-click on the map and select View Entire Route. or select the option from the map popup menu. The Add button in the Waypoints view in the side panel is synchronized with the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. and you will be able to move the selected waypoint on the map. The part of the route attached to the waypoint is moved with the waypoint. or by selecting it in the map popup menu. Save the route plan by clicking the Save Route Plan item in the toolbar.

the actual route plan will be saved as a Route Plan File (. you can open the custom window by rightclicking on the gray space outside the map window. change the properties and click OK. When you open the properties dialog. the properties should be what you set them to. you need to save the map window as a custom window. You will also find the custom window in Data | Map | [name of custom window].rpf). double-click on the route plan in the map side panel to access the Route Plan Properties dialog. Move. and you want to save these changes. if you have made changes to the default map window and to the layer-specific properties. Next. right-click on the map. Change the settings in the Waypoints view in the side panel. Add and Delete buttons at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel. Close the map and open the custom window you saved. See page 254 for more information on how to use the control buttons. you may need to zoom in on the map to view the discrete waypoints. The selected waypoint will show as a bigger circle among all the circles. and on how to read the waypoints on the route plan during a measurement. and select Map | [name of custom window]. However.258 Nemo O ut door User M a nual You can also modify the route plan with the Select. and save it. . Saving a Route Plan to a Custom Window When you create a route plan and save it. When you open a measurement the next time. Note that when you click on Select. and select Save As Custom Window in the map popup menu. First. create or open a route plan.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 259 Map Popup Menu Right-click on the map to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map. .

Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a . Save as MapInfo Tab-file Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-file command to export the active view into MapInfo format. For example. Save as CSV File Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu. if you select LTE FDD.260 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows.jpg image. . The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement.

D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 261 Export to Google Earth By clicking on the Export to Google Earth item you can export a map with measurement route. .tab). you can open existing map files (. Add Waypoints Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually. Create Route Plan The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in a map window. Save Route Plan The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (. You can also browse for a suitable map manually by clicking on the Browse button and browsing your local folders. Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. See page 307 for more information on view groups. Open Route Plan Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on a map. Find Map at Position When you right click on the map and select the Find Map at Position item. Save Map By selecting the Save Map item. Nemo Outdoor will view a list of possibly more detailed maps of the same location from the directory you have specified in the View | User Interface Properties | Paths dialog. notifications.kml file which can be viewed with the installed Google Earth application. In this way you have the possibility to choose the most appropriate map for your purposes. you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.rpf) for later use. Open Map By selecting the Open Map item. colors based on selected parameter. and base station information to Google Earth .

Zoom In and Zoom Out tools change the cursor into a magnifying glass.262 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Find Cell With Find cell functionality you can search for a cell in a map window based on a parameter. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel and the + and . Center tool allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. It cannot be used during playback. Below a cell is searched based on its Cell ID number. Pan tool changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. Tool Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. Arrow tool changes the cursor back to an arrow.keyboard buttons. It cannot be used during playback. Clear Route tool removes the measurement route from the map. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. . Note that this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected.

because GPS fix was lost in a tunnel. unselect the tool. Scale The Scale appears in the window when the respective selection is activated. and the View Entire Map command displays the whole map. Auto Clear Route The Auto Clear Route tool automatically removes the route from the map when measurement is stopped. for example. . This is especially useful if there is a gap in the measurement route. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected. If you wish to keep the route on the map when starting a new measurement. Modify Route With the Modify Route tool you can modify and reposition the measurement route in playback. you can return to the previous map view. Right-click on a map and select Modify Route from the popup menu. View Entire Route By selecting the View Entire Route item you will be able to view the whole route on the map.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 263 Auto Center The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. Previous View and View Entire Map With the Previous View command.

264 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The route will be displayed as dots. . Otherwise the route will appear jagged. Drag and drop the dots into their new positions. Please note that you should maintain the correct order of the dots.

To remove all comments. To remove or edit individual comments. right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments. Waypoints The waypoints item will activate the free route planning functionality on the map. Color Legend Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. You can create and save a route plan for later use. right-click on the map and clear the Modify Route tool. The modified route is now displayed in normal mode.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 265 When you have finished modifying the route. Layers By selecting the Layers item you will be able to view all the layers of the map in the map side panel. . right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. Textual Comments With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map.

Select the points on the map and the distance between these points is displayed on the map. The Total distance is displayed in the left-hand panel. Click the Measure Distance button to activate the tool and click the Add point button. With the Draw distance circle tool you can draw a circle where the distance between the last two points is used as the radius.266 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Measure Distance Use the Measure Distance tool to measure the distance between multiple points on a map. .

Side Panel When Side Panel is selected. also the side panel will be shown along with the specific item. Route Properties When a measurement route is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties. Layer Properties The dialog appearing when you click on the Layer Properties item depends on the layer selected in the map side panel.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 267 To remove points from the map. all the three items will be shown in the side panel. It is possible to view three different kinds of layers in the side panel: the devicespecific measurement route layer.276). Layers and Waypoints items can only be viewed in the side panel. You can also access this dialog by doubleclicking on the device-specific route layer in the side-panel. and if you activate any of these items. To hide the Measure Distance panel. Select the Show Device Label next to route option to display the device name at the starting point of the measurement route. In the case of multi measurements. if you start by activating the side panel. the base station layer. Full Screen Selecting the Full screen item will display Nemo Outdoor in full screen mode. . you need to select a device in the drop-down menu on the Device page. The Color Legend. click the Measure Distance button. However. and the route plan layer. click the Remove latest point or Remove all points buttons. you will be able to view the side panel in the map window. By clicking on the MapX Properties button you will enter the MapX Properties dialog (see p. the Route Properties dialog appears.

With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. . the route will be drawn thicker when the device is using the 1800/1900 band. If you select the Draw thicker line when using high band option. the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. the route is not drawn during when measurement is in pause. If the Draw as dots item is selected. When the Draw during pause option is deselected.268 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line.

select the Use color set option. For example. Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set. First. select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value.  Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected. If you are measuring with a scanner. . the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors. See page 278 for more information on defining color sets. Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 269 On the Color page you can define route-specific line coloring. Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. the default color is not drawn. the system route is not drawn while in GSM. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route. The entire route is drawn with the same color. if the route is colored based on Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values. also select the channels/pilots displayed by clicking the Select Channels/Select Pilots button.

. You can also define the notification icon size in pixels.270 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual On the Notifications page select the Show notifications option to view notification icons on the map.

this information is not shown on the map. See page 252 for more information. Select the Draw only to active system cell(s) option. Select the Draw line(s) to interferer cell(s) option to draw a line from interferer cells to the test vehicle. Select the Show Active Cell Information option to display active base stations along with channel numbers and cell IDs. Click OK to exit the Route Properties dialog. Define also the line Thickness and Color. the interfering cells can be seen on a map only when a BTS file is used with the terminal. Connected BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Define also the line Thickness and Color. Instead. You can select a text and background color for the note in the Text color and Background color fields. Select a BTS file by clicking the Add BTS File button in the map side panel. Please note that lines to missing neighbor cell(s) are drawn only when measuring with a mobile and a scanner. The Base stations page displays information on the open BTS files on the map. Select the Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the neighboring cells to the test vehicle. Select the Draw line(s) to missing neighbor cell(s) option to draw a line from the missing neighboring cells to the test vehicle. if you only want to draw a line from active system cell(s) to the test vehicle. Please note that a BTS file must be used with this feature. GSM interfering analysis results (IANALYSIS event) are written to the terminal output file and due to this reason. Define also the line Thickness and Color.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 271 By selecting the Show Textual notes option on the Textual notes page. the missing neighbor information can be viewed in a table grid. you will be able to view textual notes on a measurement route in the map window. Select the Draw line to active base station option to draw a line from the serving BTS to the test vehicle. If missing neighbor detection is performed using a scanner only. .

the system in which the test device is currently. If you have a BTS file that contains base stations from several systems (e.272 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual BTS Properties When a base station file is selected in the map side panel. the BTS Properties dialog appears when Layer Properties is selected in the map popup menu. See page Error! Bookmark not defined. The BTS file is selected in the Measurement Properties . for more information.g. UMTS and GSM). in other words.. . BTS File refers to the BTS file that is used in connection with the map. You can also view the dialog by double-clicking on the BTS file in the map side panel. The other base stations are hidden. You can also select the BTS file through this dialog. select the Draw only active system base stations option to display only base stations from the active system.General dialog.

Note that you define a different color for active system base stations and for other base stations. Neighboring cells are highlighted with the selected color and the selected cell is shown with the same color but also with a bolded outline. and a color set in the Color set drop-down menu. . Select a parameter from the Parameter drop-down menu based on which you want to color base stations. The tooltip shows neighbor cell names for the selected cell. Select the Use color set to color BTS icons when you want to distinguish between different base stations through the use of existing and user-defined color sets.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 273 Define also the size and color of the BTS icons. The Selected BTS cell color refers to neighbor cells that can be highlighted on the map if neighbor information is defined in a BTS file.

See page 278 for more information on how to edit and create color sets.274 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Clicking on the Edit Color Set button will lead to the Color Set Editor dialog where you can edit existing color sets or create a new one to suit your needs. Select the Show labels option to display a label or a description next to the selected cell information and define the Text color and Background color. On the Cell info page you can choose what information is displayed from each base station. .

all cell information and the Show labels option are selected. Note that the BTS sites will not be drawn if no device is selected. . The Connected Devices page displays a list of devices that you can connect to the base station sites.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 275 In the example below.

276 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Cell Range page enables you to view cell range on the map. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route plan on the map in x and y directions.gst file. The Waypoint properties field allows you to define the color for the waypoint icon and the line attaching the icons together. . and select a file from the list. Define the degree of cell range transparency in the Cell Range transparency slide bar. You can also define the icon size and line thickness in pixels. You can also view the dialog by doubleclicking on the route plan in the map side panel. Route plan file field defines the name of the route plan you selected in the map side panel. click the Open Map button. To later open the . Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. MapX Properties Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. select MapInfo Geoset file in the Files of Type listbox. the Route Plan Properties dialog appears. Route Plan Properties When a route plan is selected in the side panel and you right-click on the map and select Layer Properties.

.. This utility is useful if you want to have a bigger map on the bottom (e. An Open dialog is opened where you can choose the map you want to add as a layer. In the Layers tab the table shows a list of the current layers. and World map is at the bottom. Current Position layer is under that. you can define the appearance of the map even further by clicking the MapX Properties button in the Route Properties dialog. of Helsinki) on top of that. To remove layers from the map. for example. The order on the list defines the order in which the layers are displayed on a map. The map is added on the list and with the Up and Down you can change the map’s position on the list. To add layers on the map click Add.g. By selecting and clearing the Visible option you can decide whether or not to display the layer on the map.g. a map of Europe) and a more detailed map of a smaller area (e. in this case the Route layer is on the top. select the layer from the list and click the Remove button.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 277 If you are using MapInfo® maps. .

You can sort the color sets by selecting the Type. With the Color Set Editor you can define and name color sets to be used in maps and grids.. You can also access the Color Set Editor by selecting View | Color Set Editor. You can also search for a color set by its name. double-click on the color set.278 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Color Set Editor You can access the Color Set Editor by clicking the Edit Color Set button in the Route Properties | Color dialog. To edit an existing color set. In the Color Set Editor dialog you will see a list of all existing color sets. In the Color Set Properties dialog you can edit the settings for each color set. or by double-clicking Color sets in the Configuration Manager (Ctrl+ M).. .

The Groups and Type settings can be used to sort the color sets in the Color Set Editor dialog. how many values are represented by the same color. Finally click OK. select the color and then the upper and lower limits of the value range. i. define the top and bottom values and the step. numerical. . Click the Add button to define the colors and limits. or string. Type defines what kind of data the color set is used with.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 279 Name and Short name identify the color set. You can also write a description for the value range.e. In the Add Range dialog.. Click the Add Range button to quickly assign colors to parameter values. gradient. Finally click OK and Nemo Outdoor will automatically assign colors for the parameter values. You can also type a description of the color set in the Description field. Values table displays the different value ranges and the colors associated with them. In the Range Properties dialog.

. In the Route Properties | Route dialog. and Active set size in the Color Set field.280 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 1 In the map below. the measurement route is colored using the Active set size color set. select Number of TBF-s Uplink in the Parameter field. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the Active set size values. and click OK. Color page.

green means a low TX Power level and red a high level. In the Measurement's Route Properties dialog. . the measurement route is colored using the TX Power color set. The Color Legend in the map side panel displays the color codes for the TX Power values. In this color set. select TX Power in the Parameter and Color Set fields and click OK. Color page.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 281 Map Example 2 In the map below.

the measurement route is colored using the EcN0 color set. In the Layer view in the map side panel. and select Properties | Base stations. Right-click on the measurement layer in the map side panel again. Click OK. On the Color page. select the Use color set option. click on Add BTS File. Select the Draw line to active base station. Base station icons are displayed and a red line is drawn to the serving base station and a blue line to the neighbor stations. select Ec/N0 (Active) in the Parameter field. and Draw line(s) to neighbor cell(s) options. and EcN0 in the Color set field. or right-click on the measurement layer and select Add BTS File.282 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 3 In the map below. . The Color Legend in the side panel displays the color codes for the EcNo values.

select the Use color set option. You will see the two adjacent routes colored with the above-mentioned color sets on the map. and Ec/N0(active) in the Parameter field. In the Layers view click the Add Route button. right-click on the second measurement in the Layers view. and their color sets in the Color legends view in the map side panel. Click OK. or right-click on the existing measurement layer and select Add Route. On the Route Properties | Color page. and MS Power Level in the Color set field. Click OK. select the Use color set option. and select Properties.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 283 Map Example 4 In the map below. and the route with the black current location symbol is colored using the MS Power Level color set. Select a device from the Route Properties | Device page. and MS Power Level in the Parameter field. and now there should be two measurements in the Layers view in the side panel. and Ec/N0 in the Color set field. In the Route Properties | Color page. Next. Right-click on the first measurement route and select Properties. you will see the measurements in the Layers view. The route with the blue current location symbol is colored using the Ec/N0 color set. In addition. . the same measurement route is drawn twice on the map.

.kml file. colors based on selected parameter. and base station information to Google Earth . Click on the Export to Google Earth toolbar button in the map window. notifications.284 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Map Example 5 It is possible to export a map with measurement route. The Google Earth application needs to be installed for viewing the file.

Go to the file destination and double-click on the saved file to open it. Click Save. Select a destination for the saved . The route and cell information are visible on the Google Earth map.kml file in the Save in field. and type a name for the map to be exported in the File name field.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 285 A Save As dialog appears. Note that you must have Google Earth installed on your laptop to view the file. .

. select a marker in the Markers | Index field. Click on a parameter in the Parameters view and drag and drop it on the graph.286 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VIEWING FLOORPLANS Open an indoor map by selecting Data | Indoor | New and click the Open Map button. After this. To view a route on the floorplan you must have a marker file (. press down the Ctrl button and select the devices by clicking on them in the parameter tree. right-click on the parameter you wish to view from the parameter tree and select Open in Indoor from the drop-down menu.mrk) attached to the measurement file (. click on Move and select a new destination for the marker.nmf). To move the markers on the map. It is possible to view selected parameters in indoor map by drag and dropping them in it. First. Parameters can also be opened for all devices at once and seen on different views.

When more than one route with parameter-based coloring exists. Alternatively. use the markers to draw the measurement route on the floor plan. a floorplan of the test site. It is also possible to select a default color or parameter color set for the route in the Color page. Click on Add Route in the Layers view in the side panel to add a route. You can define which color refers to which parameter value. click with the Tablet PC pen on the screen and the marker will be placed there. The floorplan below has three routes.gst file and also as a custom window. or click on the Properties button in the Indoor map toolbar. You can observe the values of certain network parameters from the route coloring on the map. and go through the steps mentioned above. This way it is easy to spot the problem areas on a map. You can make changes to a route by selecting a layer in the Layers view and double-clicking on it to view the layer properties dialog. The Route page enables you to define route line thickness in the Thickness field. for example. If you are running Nemo Outdoor on the Microsoft XP Tablet PC Edition. In the Notifications page you can choose whether to view notifications on the map.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 287 On the map you can view. you can switch between the color legends in the Color legends side panel. Click OK to exit the dialog. Multiple Routes and Floorplans You can also view more than one route on a floorplan. you can right-click on the map and select Properties which views the properties dialog for the active layer. Map layers can be saved to . two with parameter-based coloring and one with a default color. . While you are performing the measurement and walking around in the building. In the Route Properties dialog that appears select a route in the Device drop-down menu.

indoor maps of different floors on the same building at once.288 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can load multiple floorplans in the indoor map by clicking on the Add Floorplan button in the Layers view. You can switch between the different floorplans through the Go Downstairs and Go Upstairs buttons. for example.rpf) is viewed in the Layers view. you can plan the route in the indoor map window. . A new route plan (. You can create a route plan manually by clicking on the Add waypoint button in the map toolbar. The Add button at the bottom of the Waypoints view in the side panel is also activated. and clicking on the map. Indoor Route Planning Prior to conducting indoor measurements. This makes it possible for you to have. You can save the route plan for later use by clicking on the Save Route Plan icon in the map toolbar or by selecting it in the map popup menu.

. See page 254 for more information.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 289 The route planning functionality with indoor measurements works in the same way as with outdoor maps.

290 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Indoor Map Popup Menu Right-click on the floorplan to open a popup menu with various tools for configuring the layout of the map. .

The custom window groups define which custom windows are available for each device. Save as New Custom Window Right-click on a graph window and select Save as New Custom Window from the popup menu.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 291 Custom Window Properties In the Custom Window Properties dialog you can define the custom window name and select groups for the custom windows. the custom window will only be available when an LTE device is added to Nemo Outdoor or you are playing back an LTE measurement. The Custom Window Properties dialog is opened (see above). Save Custom Window Changes Use the Save Custom Window Changes command to save changes made in the custom window. Save as MapInfo Tab-File Use the Save as MapInfo Tab-File command to export the active view into MapInfo format. . Save as CSV File Use the Save as Image command to export the active view into CSV format. Type a name for the custom window and define the custom window groups. For example. Save as Image Use the Save as Image command to save the active view as a .jpg image. if you select LTE FDD.

In order for the map and route drawing to function correctly. See page 307 for more information on view groups. Create Route Plan The Create Route Plan item creates a route plan from an open measurement in an indoor map window. Save Map By selecting the Save Map item. you can open the Save As dialog that you can use for saving the map with another name.tab). . Either define the dimensions in meters of the area visible on the map or define the GPS coordinates of the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the map area. Import Map You can import your own bitmap files to Nemo Outdoor and use them as maps. you can open existing map files (.292 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Move View To With the Move View To command you can move the active view to another view group. The Map Import Parameters dialog is opened. Click the Import Map button in the map toolbar or select Import Map from the popup menu. Open Map By selecting the Open Map item. you must define some map settings.

It cannot be used during playback. With the Add Marker command you can add markers in the measurement file. The Pan selection changes the cursor into a hand that can scroll the map. The Zoom In and Zoom Out selections change the cursor into a magnifying glass. View Entire Map The View Entire Map command displays the whole map. Save Route Plan The Save Route Plan item will let you save the route plan as a Route Plan File (. Show Minimap With the Show Minimap command you can view and hide the Minimap in the Indoor window. . To remove or edit individual comments. Textual Comments With the Textual Comments tool you can add textual comments on the map.rpf) for later use.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 293 Open Route Plan Through the Open Route Plan item you can open saved route plans to be viewed on an indoor map. The Arrow selection changes the cursor back to an arrow. The box can be repositioned by dragging it on the map. Tool The Tool pull-down menu offers a selection of settings for configuring the window setup. right-click on the text box and select Remove or Edit. right-click on the map and select Textual Comments | Remove All Textual Comments. Note that this command is activated only during measurements. Select Add Textual Comment from the menu and type in the text box that appears on the map. You can also zoom in and out using the mouse wheel. Auto Center The Auto Center tool for MapInfo® pans the map so that the current location will stay on the visible area of the map. The Clear Route command removes the measurement route from the map. The Center selection allows the map to be centered according to the cursor point. Add Waypoints Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually. Minimap displays a miniature version of the map and the current location is highlighted with a red square. View Entire Route The View Entire Route command displays the whole route. To remove all comments. Note that you cannot use the Pan and Center tools when the Auto Center command is selected.

Device defines the device that is being viewed on the map. you can define map-related settings. Close the full screen view by clicking on Close Full Screen in the popup window that appears.294 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Show Marker Info Show marker info hides or displays markers inserted into the measurement file. Show Layers Selecting the Show Layers item in the popup menu will display the Layers view in the side panel. . These settings can be saved in a MapInfo Geoset file by clicking the Save Map button in the Map window. Note that these settings differ according to the map provider. Click the MapX Properties button to define some MapX specific properties. Route Properties – Indoor Map In the Route Properties dialog. Show Markers Show Markers hides or displays markers on a map. Color Legend Color Legend displays the name of the selected Color Set on the map window. Full Screen Full Screen switches the Indoor map view to full screen.

the route is not drawn when measurement is paused. When the Draw during pause option is deselected. The X offset and Y offset fields allow you to move the route on the map in x and y directions. If the Draw as dots item is selected. Select the parameter and define the text and background colors. the Dot size field appears and allows you to define the dot size in pixels. . Select the Show active cell information option to display active cell information and direction. With the Show parameter next to route option you can display a selected parameter value in numerical format next to the route.D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 295 In the Route page you can define route line specific settings. The Line thickness field allows you to define the thickness of the route in pixels. The Draw as dots item enables you to view the measurement route in dots instead of a line.

Therefore it is best not to use the default color in the color set.  Please note that even if you are using a color set to colorize the measurement route. First. If you would like to colorize the route based on parameter values. When the Hide route line on invalid value is selected. select the Trend line option and select from the Number of previous values field how many values will be included in the average value. See page 267 for more information on defining color sets. Then select a matching color set in the Color set field. The entire route is drawn with the same color. If you would like to use averaging in drawing the route. . Click the Edit Color Set button to access the Color Set Editor dialog.296 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Use default color defines a single color for the measurement route. the default color is not drawn. the route is not drawn while in GSM. the route will be drawn with the default color if the selected parameter does not have valid values. select the Use color set button. if the route is colored based Ec/No but the terminal is using GSM. For example. select the Parameter for which you would like to define colors.

You can define the size of the notifications in pixels in the Size field. .D URI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 297 Selecting the Show notifications option will view notifications on the indoor map.

. stopping the measurement is not recommended while a test call is on. 10.  To end the measurements: 1.  When carrying out measurements using a script. then select Measurement | Stop Script or click the Stop button to end the measurement. Data transfers will be stopped. 3. you can either wait until the script file has been executed or interrupt the script either by selecting Measurement | Stop Script or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. Follow these instructions to stop the measurement. and GPRS detach will be performed. If you wish to exit Nemo Outdoor. Nemo Outdoor will display a report window with some call statistics. If you are performing measurements manually. select File | Exit or click the cross in the upper right corner of the Nemo Outdoor main window. 2. At this point. it may affect the Quality Survey Report values. You can also start a playback of this file. The Call Length from the TCH assignment percentage in this report might indicate calls to be shorter than they actually were. PDP context will be deactivated. the measurement process is terminated either by selecting Measurement | Stop or by clicking the Stop button on the toolbar. If you are using a script to perform the measurement. you can choose if you would like to save this file or delete it.298 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual ENDING MEASUREMENTS The measurement is being recorded when a REC text appears in the upper right corner of the main window. All the ongoing calls will be stopped and scanning will be terminated. If the measurement is stopped while the test call is on. Always wait until the end of the call.

E NDI NG M EAS UREM E NTS 299 MEASUREMENT REPORT The Measurement Report dialog is displayed when recording is stopped.csv file. To delete the file without saving. If you do not want this dialog to appear. or click on the button on the dialog. click the Delete button. To save the file with the default name. you will save the measurement file just as if you had clicked on the Save button. The filename is the same as for the actual measurement file and the file is located in the Results folder. click Save. The dialog displays some statistics from the measurement. Click the Playback button to playback the measurement file immediately.  Note that if you press Esc on your computer’s keyboard. select the Do not show this dialog again option. . To save the measurement file under another name. click the Rename button and type a new file name in the field that appears. Select the Save statistics to file option to save the statistics to a separate Excel .

. In the Analyze Measurement dialog.  Note that this requires that you have Nemo Analyze 5.300 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Click the Analyze button to open the measurement file for analysis in Nemo Analyze. Finally click Upload. the measurement file is added to the Nemo Analyze database without starting Nemo Analyze.X installed on the same computer where Nemo Outdoor is installed. select a workbook where the data is opened and/or a report template that is used for creating a report from the data. If you do not select a workbook or a report.

Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to save the current device. PLAYING BACK MEASUREMENT FILES Playback is a handy tool for making a quick analysis of measurements. The file name can be user defined but Nemo Outdoor always decides the extension part.nmf where the number refers to the device number. If you change the file name manually. with:      Nemo Outdoor Playback functions Nemo tool Nemo Analyze Text editor Spreadsheet software such as Microsoft® Excel Mapping software via conversion utilities provided by Anite Finland Ltd. The measurement process produces one or more output files at a time. and explains how measurement files are uploaded to an FTP server. depending on whether you have been using a mobile and a scanner at the same time or just one device at a time. Selecting Playback Files When you open a file for playback. You can playback files anytime and anywhere immediately after the measurement has been finished or later on. ANALYZING MEASUREMENT RESULTS The measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor can be viewed and analyzed. for example. Nemo Outdoor will deactivate all connected devices. Nemo Outdoor will save the current configuration and reactivate the devices that you had connected before the playback when you close the playback file(s). the file name format should be xxxx. If you answer Yes.1.M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS 301 MEASUREMENT RESULTS This section guides you on viewing and analyzing the measurement results produced by Nemo Outdoor. .

302

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

To open files for playback, select File  Open Measurement. This will open up the following dialog. See also p. 42 for more information on how to open measurement files for playback.

In the dialog, you can look for a file by clicking the … button. The File Header box displays the measurement file header. If you have selected a multi measurement, you can still clear some of the files from playback.

During Playback
The Playback commands can be executed with a set of toolbar buttons. The same commands can be found in the Playback menu. The Play button starts the playback. The Pause button pauses the playback. The Stop button stops the playback. With the Add Textual Note button you can add written remarks in the measurement file. The status bar at the bottom of the main window displays the progress of the playback; that is, the starting, ending, and current time. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement.

M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS

303

Viewing and Moving Markers
You can use the grid window to view the markers you have inserted in a measurement file during measurements. After a file has been loaded, select the Play command from the Playback menu or click the Play button on the tool bar. Open a marker grid from Data | Events Grid | User Markers.

The grid window will display all the markers that you have inserted in the file during measurements. Click on any of the markers in the grid window, and all the other open windows will display the same point of time.

304

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Markers are also displayed on the Indoor map along with the marker number. You can move the markers by selecting a marker from the list (click the index number) and pressing the Move button. Place the red pin to the new location on the map. The new longitude and latitude information is saved in the marker file.

Closing Playback Files
After playback, you need to close the playback file. Select File | Close Measurement. If you saved the current device configuration when you started the playback, Nemo Outdoor will ask if you would like to load the same device(s).

UPLOADING MEASUREMENT FILES TO AN FTP SERVER
You can upload measurement files from Nemo Outdoor to an FTP server when a measurement is stopped, or at any later point via the Nemo Outdoor user interface. Note that Nemo Outdoor must be in offline mode during the transfer, as otherwise the modem ports required for the FTP transfer will be in use.

M EAS UREM E NT RES ULTS

305

Select File | Send Measurement to FTP Server. Select one or more measurements in the Send Measurement to FTP Server dialog.

Click on the FTP Options button.

In the FTP Options dialog you can define the FTP Server and Proxy server settings.

306

Nemo O ut door User M a nual

Under FTP Server you can define the FTP server address in the Server address field, and the name of the folder to which the measurement files are sent on the FTP server in the Remote folder field. The Username and Password fields will grant you permission to access the server. You can also select the Use passive mode option for the transfer, and when the Move local files to “Sent” folder after upload option is selected, the measurement files are moved to the Sent folder in the C:\Nemo Tools directory on your computer after the transfer. You can also change this default destination folder to another one in User Interface Properties | Paths | Measurements. The file transfer can be performed using a default Internet connection or via a user-selected dial-up connection. When you select the Use a Proxy Server option, the Proxy address, Username and Password fields will become active. After configuring the FTP settings, click OK. The Measurement file(s) are sent to the FTP server.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

307

USER INTERFACE
This section presents the Nemo Outdoor user interface. You will find general descriptions on all the commands and windows. The functions and dialogs related to the commands are described in detail in the following sections. The Nemo Outdoor user interface is compatible with common Windows® standards. If you are not familiar with these standards, refer to your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation.

VIEW GROUPS
View Groups is a function that allows you to organize measurement windows into different tabs for easier viewing. This is especially useful if you have several graphs and maps open at the same time and you have to overlap them to fit them all in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Now you can create view groups and organize the measurement windows into several groups. Each view group appears at the bottom of the main window as a tab that you can view by clicking the tab.

When you start Nemo Outdoor for the first time, you will have one default view group. To rename the default view group, right-click on the tab and select Rename.

Enter a name for the view group and click OK.

To create a new view group, right-click on the empty area next to the existing view groups, and select Create New. Enter a name for the view group and click OK. The new view group appears as another tab.

To organize measurement windows into the view groups, open a view group, for example, Maps, and open the windows that you would like to have in this particular view group. Then go to another view group by clicking on the respective tab, for example, Graphs and open measurement windows there. The windows are automatically saved in the view groups and will be opened the next time you start Nemo Outdoor.

308

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

MENU BAR
The menu bar contains all Nemo Outdoor commands. The commands are arranged in menus. Some commands execute their respective operations immediately, while others will first display a dialog with options for you to select from. A command ending in three dots (…) will open a dialog. Note that you can use shortcut keys to carry out some of the commands. The shortcut keys are presented on the menus next to the menu commands.

TOOLBAR

You can use the toolbar with the mouse for quick access to frequently used commands. In the View menu, you can choose to hide the toolbar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window. The Nemo Outdoor toolbar comprises of a set of buttons that allow you to perform common tasks quickly. For example, to start the measurement, just click the Start Recording button on the toolbar. See page 333 for more information on the Nemo Outdoor toolbar buttons.

STATUS BAR
The status bar at the bottom of the Nemo Outdoor window gives you variable information depending on the operations you are performing. For example, when you are pointing to a toolbar button with the mouse (without clicking), the status bar will show a description of the corresponding function. You can also see a brief description of the same function in a help box that appears next to the button when you hold the mouse over the button long enough. There is also a time slider which you can use to jump into certain points in the measurement. In the View menu, you can select to hide the status bar; this will bring more space to the other objects in the main window.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

309

NEMO OUTDOOR MENUS
The menus in the Nemo Outdoor software are introduced next.

File Menu

The File menu allows you to open and save Workspace files and Device Configurations. Measurement files for playback are also opened through the File menu. By selecting the Save Workspace on Exit option, the current configuration is saved in a file and opened automatically the next time the program is started. The Work Offline item activates and deactivates the offline mode. The Send Measurement to FTP Server enables you to send measurement files to an FTP server (see p.304). With the Export and Import Settings items you can export and import settings into an .aex file. The following items are stored in the .aex file:        Scripts Color sets Custom views Device configurations Notification settings Route plans Workspaces

You can also export measurements. Note that measurement needs to be closed before export.

310

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

The Recent Workspaces, Recent Device Configurations, and Recent Measurements items display the recently used workspaces and device configurations and recently viewed playback files, respectively. With the Exit command you can close the program.

Edit Menu

In the Edit menu, you can copy and save as images selected items from the Nemo Outdoor program. The Find command allows you to search through the measurement file opened in the grid (see page 243).

View Menu

In the View menu, you can select, hide and display items of the main window, such as the standard toolbar, custom window toolbar, status indicator, output, and device info, those you wish to see on the screen. Through quick windows you have easy access to custom windows defined by the user. You can also access the Configuration Manager, Color Set Editor, Notification Manager, User Parameters and the User Interface Properties dialogs. Through the View Groups item you can create new view groups or switch between existing view groups. See page 307 for more information on the view groups. The Active View Properties will open a properties dialog for the currently active window.

USE R I NT ERF ACE

311

Measurement Menu

Through the Measurement menu, you can control the measurement process and add, autodetect and remove devices. The Start Scripts command starts and stops a user-defined script file. These same commands can be executed by clicking the Start/Stop Scripts button in the toolbar. In the Script Editor you can edit script files. You can also add markers and textual notes in the measurement file. The Clear Buffers command will empty the event history buffer. This does not affect the measurement file. Through the All Devices item you can control several devices at once. For example, you can make a voice call or send an SMS with all test mobiles connected to Nemo Outdoor.

312

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Below All Devices are listed individually all measurement devices connected to the system. Through these items you can control and configure the individual test terminals.

Device Properties (p.67), General Properties (p.Error! Bookmark not defined.), Measurement Properties (p. 72), Notification Properties (p.60), and Script Properties (p.157) dialogs can be accessed through this menu. By selecting the Reset command, you can reset the Devices window, for example, if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it. The menu also offers access to various actions that can be performed during manual measurements. If you are using scripts to run measurements, you will not need these commands. The following functions can be found in this menu.  Please note that the menu displays only those functions that are supported by the device. Band Lock (page 180) Cell Barring (page 186) Channel Locking (page 176) Handover/Handoff Control (page 181) Missing Neighbor Detection (page 188) Cell Testing (page 186) Timeslot Testing (page 191)

Playback Menu The Playback menu offers you commands for the playback of measurement data.321). By adding markers (vertical lines) on top of the window. Under each type you will find a selection of premade custom windows of the selected type. The same commands can also be executed by means of toolbar buttons. Markers can be also edited. With the Play. added or removed via edit marker window. it is possible to see the RX level for certain frequencies shown on the side panel. Nemo Outdoor will open an empty graph of the selected type. By right-clicking the Spectrum Graph item you are able to see the static line graph displaying spectrum scanning results. and Stop commands you can control the playback. You can also add markers and textual notes in the playback file.USE R I NT ERF ACE 313  Note that you cannot use scripts with scanners. If you select New. Pause. You can also access the Open Custom Window dialog (see p. . Data Menu Through the Data menu you can open different views for observing a measurement.

The Indoor item opens a floorplan (see page 286). the neighbor list of a serving cell can be displayed in a table grid so that each row represents one neighbor and each column represents a parameter value (e. scrambling code. and LLC messages. The Packet Decoder Grid offers a chance to display and decode packet capture files in playback mode. For example. . Parameters grids display selected network parameters.g. system. all measurement events but the user can configure the view so that only events that are of special interest are displayed. Events grids list. by default. RLC/MAC. carrier. Messages grids are used for observing layer 2 and 3. The Map item opens a map window (see page 250).. etc. successes. Table grids provide an easy way of simultaneously displaying the same parameter values for multiple instances. and failures from the measurement. Statistics grids list various statistics.314 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Grid items offer a selection of grid types. the number of PDP context activation attempts. such as.).

Tile Vertically. From the About dialog you can also receive further information on the Nemo Outdoor application. The Save Changes option saves changes to measurement windows. The custom windows are presented on page 321. Tile Horizontally. You can switch the focus between these windows and arrange them with the Cascade. Nemo Outdoor will open the window in the same size the next time you start the program. you can check the current license status for your Nemo Outdoor version. With the Close All command you can close all windows at once. By selecting the License Information item. Window Menu The Window menu provides you with a list of all open windows on the main window. including the contact information and the application version number. The active window is marked with a check mark . if you resize the windows. . and Arrange Icons commands. Help Menu The Help menu offers you quick access to all the most important help topics. For example.USE R I NT ERF ACE 315 The Save as Custom Window… item offers a quick way to save your own custom windows.

316 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual CUSTOMIZING MENUS AND TOOLBARS Nemo Outdoor menus and toolbars are fully customizable. In the New Toolbar dialog. In the Toolbars page hide and display the default toolbars by clearing and selecting the corresponding options. type a name for the new toolbar and click OK. or edit the toolbars. To edit the contents of menus. . right-click on the menu bar or toolbar at the top of the main window and select Customize. to add new menus. Click the New button to create a new toolbar.

Delete the toolbar by selecting it and clicking the Delete button. .USE R I NT ERF ACE 317 The new toolbar is added to the Customize dialog. Drag commands from the list to a toolbar or menu. In the Commands page you will find all available commands sorted under categories.

. drag and drop the command outside the toolbar or menu. open the Customize dialog (rightclick on main toolbar and select Customize) and in the Toolbars page.318 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual To remove commands from a toolbar or menu. If you want to restore the original toolbar and menu content. select the toolbar or menu bar you want to restore and click the Reset button.

Open the Customize dialog. For example. . and select Change Button Image.USE R I NT ERF ACE 319 In the Options page you can further personalize the appearance of toolbars and menus. you can activate large icons for toolbars for easier viewing or change the menu animations. right-click on a button. You can also change the icon for each toolbar button.

Nemo Outdoor offers some ready-made custom windows that include some essential windows for specific types of measuring. The Output.320 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NEMO OUTDOOR WINDOWS The windows in Nemo Outdoor are highly user configurable. bars. and Script Status windows can be hidden automatically so that they only slide out in view when you move the mouse cursor on top of the tab labeling the hidden window. . Device Info. click the pin symbol again. Different network parameters and events can be viewed as line graphs. To make the measuring process easier for first-time users. click the pin symbol at the upper right corner of the window. The users are also able to make their own custom windows and save them for later use. and dots. To activate the auto-hide feature for a window. To deactivate the auto-hide setting from a window.

Select the custom window you would like to open from the table on the right and click Open. and select Quick Windows) in Nemo Outdoor main window offers quick access to custom windows. CDMA.USE R I NT ERF ACE 321 Custom Windows Nemo Outdoor offers a selection of premade graphs and grids which can be quickly accessed through the Data menu or the Custom window tool bar if selected in the View menu. When you have set up a graph view that you would like to use later on. You can also save your own custom windows. The Quick Windows bar (go to View. UMTS.). select the custom window that you want to remove and click the Delete button. map. The next time you click on the same quick window button. activate the window that you would like to save and select Data | Save as Custom Window. Click OK. You can view the existing custom windows sorted by type (graph. After clicking OK. grid. The custom windows are grouped under the corresponding graph and grid types. and select a custom window from the list. indoor view) or by technology (AMPS. Nemo Outdoor will ask you to type a name for the new custom window. Click on one of the quick windows. They are also accessible through the parameter tree. GSM. etc. the window is added to the custom windows list. that selected custom window will appear. . You can also browse for the existing custom windows through the Open Custom Window dialog (Data | Open Custom Window). If you want to remove some custom windows.

The Expand Device Info Window button displays/hides the window. HSDPA MAC-hs BLER and HSDPA HARQ process BLER. The Configure Notifications button opens a dialog where you can select events of which Nemo Outdoor will display a message in the Output window. Device Info Window for Mobiles The Device Info window displays some device-specific information. HSDPA BLER search string matches.322 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Parameter Tree Search Functionality A user-specified search string can be used to search parameters. The green light at the upper right corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected. In addition.e. . You can also see the transfer protocol and progress in the Device Info window. parameter short names and possible alias names. for example. The field at the top of the window displays the device status. the string matching supports multiple search substrings separated by spaces i.

for example. you will find the menu below: The commands will be activated depending on the type of test mobile you are using. you will find the menu below. then only the first item is activated. Measurement Properties (p. . you can reset the Device Info window.72). and Script Properties (p.USE R I NT ERF ACE 323 Under the Device Commands button. By selecting Reset command. Under the Device Settings button. if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it.60). The other items open dialogs related to the specific functions.67). General Properties (p. Notification Properties (p. Device Properties (p. 72). If your test mobile supports only voice calls.82) dialogs can be accessed through the Device Settings menu.

324 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Device Info Window for Scanners The Device Info window displays some device-specific information. you will find the menu below. the speech bubble indicates a normal message. you can reset the Device Info window.. By selecting Reset command. and Error! Bookmark not defined. . if you want to reconnect and activate a device after disconnecting it. The green light at the upper right corner is blinking whenever the device is active and connected. for example. The Expand Device Info Window button displays/hides the window. Icons ( ) next to the timestamps clarify the type of message or notification in question. The window can be opened by choosing View | Output. For example. the red flag an error message. the orange flag a warning. The Device Properties and Measurement Properties dialogs are explained in more detail on pages Error! Bookmark not defined. Under the Device Settings button. The Configure Notifications button opens a dialog where you can select events of which Nemo Outdoor will display a message in the Output window. The field at the top of the window displays the device status. Output Window The Output window displays program messages and textual notifications. and the exclamation mark a notification. You can clear the Output window by right-clicking on the window and selecting Clear Window from the popup menu. respectively.

The windows can be tiled horizontally or vertically. Cascade Windows The Cascade command in the Window menu organizes the windows in an overlapping array. select the Arrange Icons command in the Window menu. To do this. . The active window is indicated through a color specified in the Windows® Control Panel to indicate an active window (see your Microsoft® Windows® Documentation). You can drag windows outside the Nemo Outdoor desktop area to make more space on the main window. filling the whole space so that all windows are visible at the same time. maximizing. Close All The Close All command in the Window menu can be used to close all measurement windows in the Nemo Outdoor main window. Arrange Icons The windows that have been minimized to icons can be arranged evenly in a row at the bottom of the main window. You can bring any window to the top by selecting it from the Window menu or by clicking any visible part of that window (except for the Minimize. Tile Windows The Tile command in the Window menu organizes the windows side by side. From the Script Status window you can follow the progress of the script file used in the current measurement. You can also bring the next window to the top by selecting the Next command from the window-specific menu (top left corner of the window). Maximize.USE R I NT ERF ACE 325 Script Status Window  Note that since you cannot use scripts with scanners. The minimizing. Controlling Windows You can have several windows open at the same time. this window is also not available when making scanner measurements. and Close buttons in the top right corner). and closing functions for individual windows operate in the same way as in all Windows applications. starting from the left side.

326 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Saving Window Settings If you wish to retain the same settings on your main window the next time you use Nemo Outdoor. in the example below three percentage of time (200ms) CQI value 6 has been used with antenna port 0 and CQI value 3 has been used for antenna port 1. CQI for antenna port 0 is on the top and bottom CQI value (CQI2) is for the second antenna port.g. CQI type A is shown in green and CQI type B is shown in red. graph CQI can be seen for both antenna ports.g. Clicking the command will result on a check mark . it can be seen from the HSDPA link adaptation information table grid. the second click will remove the mark. E. HOW TO READ MIMO PARAMETERS IN BAR GRAPH DATA VIEW In the bar below. If more detailed information about the link adaptation is needed.. E. Bars are colored based on CQI type to indentify used CQI type. four percentage of the time during the sample duration modulation for antenna port 0 has been 16QAM with transport block size 14411 bits and for the second antenna port 1 modulation was 16QAM with transport block size 12266 bits. Distribution is shown for both antenna ports from the last sample duration which is set to 200ms. . activate the Save Workspace on Exit command in the File menu.

typically 10-20%. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. In LTE networks. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation. Does not work manually.   . PRB affects throughput directly. Also try different servers. In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications. the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity. For Nemo Outdoor 5.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. For Nemo Outdoor 5. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. For example. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell. average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). Try another FTP server for comparison. read this chapter for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. Command prompt FTP throughput. a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). For better results. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 327 TROUBLESHOOTING This section describes some of the possible problem situations that may occur in Nemo Outdoor. script is always needed. Works also manually. server or transmission problems. LOW THROUGHPUT In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications. Other things that could help troubleshooting:    Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput.

etc. Set to default. Window size not set. Using Nemo Outdoor: 1. A measurement file (. Window shows the current value. Check the . Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. . TCP Auto-Tuning detected. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry.    TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry. Using debug logs (for developers.pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. 2. help desk. Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed. Window size value tells the current TCP window size used. Look at the Tcp tree.): 1. 12.328 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual All Windows Versions  How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: 1.nmf) does not save window size info. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0: 11. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window.

The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software.40 and later checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled.  Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings.  How to check TCP auto-tuning state: 1. This registry entry can be removed. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global” 3. 4. the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB. Right-click and select Run as administrator. if the same registry value that XP uses is set.TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 329 Windows XP Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB. Outdoor 5. . If TCP auto-tuning is disabled. Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. In most cases. If the registry value is missing. They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state. However. 2. Windows Vista/Windows7 Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry.

Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:      disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. . experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended. highlyrestricted: Recommended. 7. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. it can degrade performance in common scenarios. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”. Limits to 64 KB (65535). It enables receive window values of over 16 MB. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. very conservatively. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses. restricted: Recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value. However.330 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5. normal: Default value. 6. Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled. only intended for research purposes). Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value.

it means that the device has been disconnected. CANNOT ADD DEVICES If the Add button is deactivated in the Configuration Manager window when you start Nemo Outdoor. Connect the device and select Reset from the Device Settings menu. If a green light is blinking. see page 23 for more information on copy protection. it means that the device is properly connected to Nemo Outdoor and is functioning normally. Please. check that you have devices online. CANNOT MAKE CALLS/PACKET TRANSFERS If the commands are inactive in the Device Commands menu The Work offline or online button should be unselected. Also. . If a red light is blinking. check that recording is not on. If the copy protection dongle is plugged in and the Add button is deactivated. playback should be stopped and playback files closed (File | Close Measurement).TRO UBLE S HO O TI NG 331 DEVICE INFO WINDOW The Device info window displays the device status. your version of Nemo Outdoor is an unlicensed evaluation version. .

14:46:49. 2. #HASH. However.50 or later. The mouse device is now disabled and the GPS device can be reconnected. Double-click on System. 3. 4. 5. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel. measurement files are still opened normally. the mouse stops working correctly.4 or earlier do not include checksum information and the notification is always prompted when such a file is opened with Nemo Outdoor version 5."0360D938749FFE82B15545D3E55B75C0" Measurement files made with Nemo Outdoor 5. Confirm the disabling by clicking Yes in the message box. 1. When this occurs. The last line in the measurement file is HASH events including time stamp and checksum information. The checksum is validated when loading measurement files for playback. . 6. MEASUREMENT FILE CHECKSUM NOTIFICATION Measurement file has a checksum that detects modifications to the measurement file after the measurement is stopped. Right click on the Microsoft Serial BallPoint device and select Disable from the popup menu. Go to the Hardware tab and click the Device Manager button. follow the steps below. A Microsoft Serial BallPoint device should appear. In this case.1.332 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual PROBLEMS WITH GPS RECEIVERS The Windows® XP and Vista operating systems sometimes confuse a GPS receiver with the computer’s mouse.262. Double-click on Mice and other pointing devices. The user is notified by the Nemo Outdoor user interface when opening a measurement file where modification is detected.

Saves the active window as a new custom window. Adds a marker in the measurement file or on the Indoor map. Open Workspace Save Workspace Configuration Manager Work Offline Start Recording Start Playback Pause Stop Start/Stop Scripts Add Marker Add Textual Note Open Custom Window Save As New Custom Window Save Changes to Custom Window Save As Image . Saves changes to the active custom window.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 333 NEMO OUTDOOR BUTTONS TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the buttons available in the Nemo Outdoor toolbar. Title Open Playback File(s) Button Description Opens an existing measurement for playback Opens an existing workspace file. Starts the playback with the selected files. Saves the active window as an image file (. Switches the offline mode on and off. Switches a script on/off. Adds a textual note in the measurement file. Opens the Open Custom Window dialog. Saves the current workspace configuration. Pauses the playback/recording. Nemo Outdoor starts writing a file of the current measurement.jpg). Opens the Configuration Manager dialog. Stops the playback/recording.

Offers access to several dialogs. Removes the selected device. Opens a Properties dialog for the selected item in the Configuration Manager. Title Expand Device Info Window Configure Notifications Button Description Displays the selected device info parameters in the Device Info window. event trigger. event trigger. Device Commands Device Settings Autodetect Devices Refresh Properties Add Remove . or script from the Configuration Manager. Opens the Notifications dialog where you can select the events of which Nemo Outdoor will display or play a notification. or script depending on the item selected in the Configuration Manager. Through the Device Commands button you have access to various mobile specific functions.334 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual DIALOG BUTTONS These are the dialog buttons used in Nemo Outdoor. Updates information in the Configuration Manager. Automatically detects devices connected to Nemo Outdoor. Adds a new device.

in separate graphs. the graph is scrolling automatically as the measurement proceeds. Title Hide Layer Button Description Hides the selected layer in the graph Remove Layer Removes the selected layer New Layer Opens the New Layer dialog where you can configure a new layer to be added in the active graph. that is. Layer Properties Move Layer Down Move Layer Up Set Stacked Mode Autoscroll Show Panels . Displays the info panel with numerical values on the right side of the graph. Moves the selected layer down in the layer view Moves the selected layer up in the layer view If there are two or more layers in a graph.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 335 GRAPH TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the toolbar buttons available when using graphs. When the button is pressed down. Opens the Layer Properties dialog where you can edit an existing layer. you can view them in stacked mode.

Opens the selected layer's Properties dialog where you can configure the layer properties. Available only in the Indoor map. Title Open Map Button Description Opens the Open dialog for selecting a map file. Saves the current map layers and settings into a MapInfo Geoset file (. Opens the Map Import Parameters dialog for importing bitmap images as floorplans. Changes the cursor into a hand.gst). Changes the cursor into an arrow. which you can use for selecting a point on the map on which the map view will be centered.336 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MAP TOOLBAR BUTTONS These are the toolbar buttons available when using maps. Allows you to save the route plan as a Route Plan File (. Creates a route plan from an open measurement. which you can use for dragging the map to a different position. With the automatic map find feature the user can easily locate all maps from same location. Changes the cursor into the center tool. Through this item you can open saved route plans. Save Map Import Map Layer Properties Find Map at Position Create Route Plan Open Route Plan Save Route Plan Add Waypoint Arrow Pan Center . which you can use for selecting items.rpf). Place the hand on the map. Activates the add waypoint functionality for creating route plans manually. Keep the left mouse button pressed down and move the map.

the sooner the map is centered on the test vehicle when it moves around on the route. Click the Previous View button to return to the previous map view. the map view will always center on the test vehicle. Activate the Scale Bar button to view a scale bar in the map window. Click the Entire Map button to display the entire map after zooming in. Set Current Location tool defines the current location when no GPS data is available. which you can use for zooming in on the map. With the Auto Center tool activated. if you have moved the map with the Pan tool. Clears the measurement route from the map. which you can use for zooming out on the map. With the Entire Route button you can view the whole route on the map. Zoom Out Clear Route Set Current Location Auto Center Auto Center Sensitivity Previous View Entire Map Entire Route Scale Bar Measure Distance . With the Measure Distance tool you can measure the distance on the map in kilometers between multiple points. It cannot be used during playback.NEM O O UTDO O R B UT TO NS 337 Zoom In Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass. This requires that a GPS receiver is used. This button is active only during measurements. for example. The higher the percentage. Changes the cursor into a magnifying glass. That this command is activated only during measurements and when no GPS is connected. It cannot be used during playback. The Auto center sensitivity slider defines in percentages the sensitivity of the activated Auto Center tool.

338 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Side Panel Activate the Side Panel button to view the side panel in the map window. .

. This window can be displayed by pressing down the F2 key when using Nemo Outdoor.S HO RTC UT KEY S 339 SHORTCUT KEYS This is a complete list of the shortcut keys available in Nemo Outdoor.

Attach Attempt Attach Failed Attach Success MMS Receiving Attempt MMS Receiving Failed MMS Receiving Success MMS Sending Attempt Call Alerting Call Answered Call Attempt Call Connected Call Disconnect Call Dropped Call Failed Call Received Packet Call Attempt Packet Call Connected Packet Call Disconnected Packet Call Failed Packet Technology Changed to HSDPA Packet Technology Changed to UMTS Cell Change Attempt Cell Change Failed Cell Change Success Cell Reselection Cell Reselection (3G) GSM/UMTS Cell Reselection (2G) UMTS/GSM RX Level Low/Bad Routing Area Update Attempt Routing Area Update Failed Context Activation Attempt Context Activation Failed Context Activation Success Context Deactivation Semiduplex Call Attempt Service Lost Routing Area Update Success PTT Idle PTT Receiving PTT Transmitting MMS Sending Failed MMS Sending Success .340 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual NOTIFICATION SYMBOLS Below are described the default notification symbols.

NO TI FI CA TI O N SY M BO LS 341 Service Received Data Call Attempt Data Connection Attempt Data Connection Failed Data Connection Success Data Disconnect Data Transfer Attempt Data Transfer Success Data Transfer Failed Soft Handover Failure Soft Handover Success SMS Received SMS Receiving Attempt SMS Receiving Failed SMS Sending Completed Dead Reckoning in Use Detach Differential GPS in Use Duplex Call Attempt FER High TX Power High/UL Power Up High Video Call Attempt Voice Call Attempt/Voice Call Attempt (ETSI) Voice Call Connected (ETSI) Voice Call Disconnected (ETSI) GPS Fix Lost GPS Fix Received HS-DSCH Serving Cell Changed Voice Call Dropped (ETSI) Star Thumb Down Handover Attempt Handover Failed Handover Success Thumb Up Location Area Update Attempt Location Area Update Failed Location Area Update Success .

342 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Marker Markov Call Attempt Measurement Error .

please e-mail us at nemo. among other information. please contact our Nemo Outdoor technical support service at Nemo. Registered users with a valid Maintenance Agreement are entitled to full support. It is fast. you will automatically receive e-mails informing you each time a new version of software for your Nemo Product is released. When faxing or emailing.com/nemo. Once you are registered with our User Club. After submitting the requested information. Access to the Nemo User Club is restricted to customers with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements or partner agreements. INTERNET SUPPORT At our web site http://www. please complete an on-line registration form. EMAIL.anite.NEM O O UTDO O R S UP PO RT 343 NEMO OUTDOOR SUPPORT If you have questions on or beyond this documentation about Nemo Outdoor. the phone and fax support related to potential software errors is free of additional charge.com. You can find it at our WWW site http://www. If you are an existing Anite Finland customer with SW maintenance and Technical Support agreements.com/nemo.helpdesk@anite. 24 hours a day. PHONE. please let us know the number of your Software Maintenance and Support Agreement.anite.Helpdesk@anite. AND FAX SUPPORT During the warranty period. . Note that for full support you need to have the Maintenance Agreement. you will receive a personal access key and password by email in a few days time. you can find all the frequently asked questions about Nemo Outdoor. and it is available to you seven days a week. easy. USER CLUB The Nemo User Club offers several new ways to benefit from Nemo products. If you have questions relating to the Nemo User Club. but you are without access to the user club.com or call +358 50 395 7800.

China Email Tel. 101 Thomson Road. Windows® XP).g.helpdesk@anite.x). Version 5. Jianguo Road Chaoyang District. State Hwy 161 Suite 425 Irving. Yi 118. Fax Address nemo.g.. Lenovo)  Your test mobile types (e. 21st Floor The Exchange Beijing.com +86 10 6567 8528 +86 10 6567 8521 Anite Wireless Trading (Beijing) Limited.helpdesk@anite.g. Beijing 100022 China When contacting us for problem reporting. Ltd. Garmin GPS II Plus)  Your Nemo Outdoor version and build (e. please supply/inform us of:  Your Windows® version number (e.com +358 50 395 7800 +358 8 551 6182 Anite Finland Ltd Kiviharjunlenkki 1 D 90220 Oulu Finland Americas Email Mobile Fax Address nemo..com +1 469 951 9105 +1 469 774 4608 (En español e português) +1 972 462 1640 Anite Inc. TX 75038 USA APAC Email Tel. Fax Address nemo.xx. Fax Address nemo.g.R..g. #20-05 United Square Singapore 307591 P.helpdesk@anite.com +65 9746 2431 +65 6254 9885 Anite Singapore Pte. 6225 N. Room 2109...344 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Please contact us at the following locations: Global Email Tel. see Windows® Control Panel | System  Your computer brand model (e. Nokia 6720)  GPS receiver type (e. No. see Help | About  Device handler versions  Your description of the problem  Whether you were able to repeat the problem  The corresponding measurement results file (as email attachment or on disc) .helpdeskt@anite.

4. select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA). 3. always use the fixed COM ports of your computer to connect the test devices. You should now be able to see the installed driver and the COM port it is using.  Use the COM ports created with the PCMCIA serial card for GPS receivers and/or scanners.  To install a PCMCIA serial I/O card: 1. 2. When the update is complete or if you have installed the I/O drivers earlier. . If you are using a USB serial converter. If you have not installed the I/O drivers. If possible. as you need to define it in the Nemo Outdoor configuration settings. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot. Restart your computer.APPE NDI X 1 345 APPENDIX 1 INSTALLING A PCMCIA SERIAL I/O CARD This appendix describes how to install a PCMCIA serial I/O card to create additional COM ports for your computer. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. see the setup guide included in the converter product package. The COM port number is important.

you can check the COM ports from My Computer | Control Panel.346 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 2 You can have three kinds of Socket cards: single. . After you have installed the dual socket card drivers. and Quad. dual.

respectively). . Start Nemo Outdoor. When the update is complete or if you have installed the socket I/O drivers earlier. Plug the PCMCIA I/O card into the computer’s PCMCIA slot. 5. do it at this point. You should now be able to see the installed driver and also the COM port it is using. Open the Configuration Manager dialog and detect the GPS receiver either manually or using the Autodetect function. 4. CONNECTING A GPS RECEIVER TO A PCMCIA SOCKET This appendix describes how to connect the GPS receiver to the computer when using PCMCIA socket.APPE NDI X 2 347 By double-clicking on the Socket Dual I/O icon the Socket Dual I/O Properties dialog is opened. Proceed with the update hardware wizard as your computer suggests. plug the GPS receiver in to the PCMCIA card cable. The ports can be used for connecting the GPS receiver and the Scanner. the computer notifies you that it has found new hardware. If you have not installed the socket I/O drivers. select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Card (PCMCIA).  To connect the GPS receiver to the computer’s PCMCIA socket: 1. If you need to restart your computer. After restarting. 3. The First Port Name and Second Port Name display the COM ports used by the socket card (in this example COM3 and COM6. 2.

Choose File | Open Table and Raster Image File Format. MapInfo® can read the following types of raster images: . Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze support . . or a shade of gray. When using Nemo Outdoor and Nemo Analyze. . Select your raster map image file (. photographs.GIF . Start the MapInfo® software.348 Nemo O ut door User M a nual APPENDIX 3 MAKING MAPINFO® RASTER MAPS Using raster image files. You can scan paper maps and then use paper maps as the foundation for the maps you create in MapInfo®.filename. the measurement route can be discerned better than with color map images. then you must register the raster map image so that MapInfo® can position it properly in a Map window. you can display it in a map window.GIF.JPG formats. and . the default value is Longitude/ Latitude. Select the Projection button to specify the projection of the raster image map. You must identify control point coordinates and the projection of the raster image map. Choose control points that can be easily identified and selected. You do this in the Image Registration Dialog. By doing this.GIF.BIL Color options are: Monochrome images: each pixel in a map image can be black or white. After scanning the paper map into a raster image file. we recommend using gray scale images. such as street intersections or use the coordinates (latitude and longitude grid) for the selected point from a paper map.TIF.  To register a raster map: 1. white. Registering a Raster Map with MapInfo® SW If you want to overlay vector data on top of a raster image.TIF.JPG) and open it.BMP . and other graphic images into MapInfo®. A preview of the raster map image appears on the screen. It is important to provide accurate control point information when registering a raster map image.filename.filename. MapInfo® supports 256 colors.filename.JPG .filename. you can bring paper maps. The Image Registration Dialog is displayed. . Color images: each pixel can be of any color from a palette of available colors. . If you do not know the right projection. Gray scale images: each pixel in a gray scale image can be black.filename.TIF .PCX . 2.

you can convert d/m/s coordinates into decimal degrees format. 7. enter 65. For example. The Add Control Point Dialog is displayed showing the location of the point in pixels. Add Map X and Map Y coordinates in decimal formats. Use negative numbers when specifying west and south coordinates. Select points that can be easily identified and selected in the map window.APPE NDI X 3 349 3.tab in Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. After all control points have been defined.tif/gif/jpg files to the map directory of Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Analyze. 5. specify the appropriate projection in the Image Registration Dialog. click OK in the Image Registration dialog. Move filename. Enter your coordinates in the native units of the coordinate system. Using the MapBasic program. . If you want to register a raster map that does not use longitude and latitude coordinates. enter coordinates ® in meters. or the conversion from d/m/s to decimal degrees is as follows: degrees+(minutes/60)+(seconds/3600)=decimal degrees 4. Click on a location in the preview (raster image map).tab and filename. to specify the coordinates 65 degrees. Start adding control points.5 degrees. You must choose at least three control points. 30 minutes. For example. if you are registering a UTM map image. The raster map will be displayed in the map window. Open filename. 6.

A known SPC can also be overwritten by this plugin. In the NV items page you are able to read and write nonvolatile memory items. Directory number defines a phone number . You need to know your SPC before you can program any of the following settings.350 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 4 CDMA SETTINGS AND PRL EDITING IN NEMO OUTDOOR You can access CDMA Settings and the PRL editing dialog in Nemo Outdoor through Device Settings .

APPE NDI X 5 351 MIN1 defines a seven-digit phone number of the terminal MIN2 defines a three-digit area code SPC defines the service programming code IMSI = IMSI_MCC + IMSI_11_12 + MIN1 + MIN2 On the PRL page you can read and write PRL items. This can be used to load any previously saved PRL’s onto any Qualcomm-based mobile. On the DIP Switch page you are able to enable/disable the listed features. . You can also use this feature to save a PRL from a connected phone and then use this later to load the same PRL onto a new mobile.

This will add a tool bar called “Presto” to MS Excel. you can use the Presto tool which can be downloaded from CDG.org. From there you can download the toolbar suite and the tutorial for it.352 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Should you need to manually edit a PRL. . 2. Click on the prltools. 1. The download page can be accessed by searching for “prl” using the search tool on the main page. Install the suite when launched.asp link to get to the downloads page.

Click Next in the Welcome window. Run the Setup. Next. 7. Click Next in the PRL Toolbar Suite dialog that appears. 9.exe file. Click Close to exit the Installation Finished dialog. and click Next. Click Install in the dialog that appears. 4. Select I Agree in the License Agreement dialog. Click Next to confirm installation. 5.APPE NDI X 5 353 3. It should look as follows in Excel: . 6. 8. open Presto by going to Start | All Programs | QUALCOMM PRL Toolbar Suite | PRESTO.

The Multi system also includes a DC to AC pure sine wave power inverter to supply power for the laptop. The Nemo Outdoor multi unit includes a built-in 2500 mAh battery pack which makes it possible to continue measurements during short power failures without stopping the measurements. preventing loose connections between test devices and the main unit. Nemo Outdoor Multi can be delivered with or without the carrying case. scanners. . With the high-quality Neutrik USB connectors and the professional lockable USB data cable connection the system is very reliable to use. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator.354 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 5 NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI CONFIGURATION  Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop. and a GPS device. All test devices can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi through an onboard USB port while sharing a car’s +12VDC power output. Nemo Outdoor Multi can also be delivered with an optional ruggedized rollaround carrying case. and the system in combination with Nemo Outdoor Multi-option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls and data transfers simultaneously while connected to a single laptop. The 3rd generation Nemo Outdoor Multi is a compact benchmarking solution to be used with Nemo Outdoor. These two options are elaborated on below. The system is by default delivered with a car mounting kit that allows the unit to be semi-permanently mounted into a test car. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on different system technologies and networks with support for up to seven test devices such as mobiles. it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator.

all of the common components listed below will be included. . Common Components Carrying case Mobile holder panel. but can also be semi-permanently mounted into a test vehicle. for example.APPE NDI X 5 355 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI SYSTEM COMPONENTS Nemo Outdoor Multi comes in two options: with or without the case. on the car back seat. test terminals The mobile holder panel is by default attached to the lid of the multi carrying case. With the carrying case option. only some of the common components will be included in the package. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered without the case.

or it can also be used without the carrying case. see page 363. In the latter instance. Mounting plate The MMAC3 unit is attached to the mounting plate and placed either in the multi carrying case or alternatively can be attached to a location in the test vehicle.356 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual MMAC3 unit The MMAC3 unit is placed on the bottom layer of the carrying case. .

or it may overheat! . The inverter should be connected directly to the car battery. or alternatively for an Anritsu scanner or for any other device which uses the 110 or 220 voltage. The inverter converts +12V into +110V or +220V depending on the requirements of the market area. The operating voltage of the inverter is a constant +12V.APPE NDI X 5 357 Mascot 12V Pure Sine Wave Inverter The inverter provides power for the laptop on which Nemo Outdoor is running.  Note that the inverter should be taken out of the carrying case when in use.

If the MMAC3 unit is placed in the carrying case.12 ft) Function: Enables the Multi carrying case to be connected to the car 12V socket.12 ft) Function: is used to connect the MMAC3 unit to the car 12V socket when you want to use the MMAC3 without the carrying case. Product code Cable External power cable description Length: 4m (13.2) are meant for the Multi carrying case and two for the MMAC3 unit (3. it is directly connected to the connector panel of the multi carrying case.4). The MMAC3 cables are only needed if you want to mount the MMAC3 unit into the car instead of keeping it in the carrying case. and one cable for fixed installation in the test vehicle. The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector. 1046-C-025 1041-C-040 Length: 5m (16. . The cable is equipped with a Neutrik lockable connector. Two of the cables (1.358 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Power cables Nemo Outdoor Multi comes with four external power cables. Both the carrying case and the MMAC3 unit have one cable to attach the unit to the car 12V socket. 1041-C-038 Length: 4m (13.40 ft) Function: used when multi carrying case unit is used for fixed installation in a test vehicle.

it will come mounted into the case. Laptop The Nemo Outdoor Multi system runs on a single laptop with Nemo Outdoor installed on it.APPE NDI X 5 359 1041-C-039 Length: 4m (13. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for more details. The car 12V socket provides a constant +12V. Optional components Scanner It is possible to use one PCTEL EX or PCTEL EX mini scanner at a time with Nemo Outdoor Multi. The laptop is connected to the sine wave power inverter. If the scanner has been delivered with the carrying case. . The power inverter converts 12V to 110V or 220V depending on the requirements of the market area. and connected to the MMAC3 USB port.12 ft) Function: You can use this external power cable for the MMAC3 unit for fixed installation in a car in instances when you want to use the MMAC3 unit without its carrying case.

. The test terminals are mounted onto the terminal holder panel. so not part of the default package. for example. However. the mobile holder panel can alternatively also be removed from the lid and semi-mounted. MMAC3 WITH CASE When Nemo Outdoor Multi is purchased with the carrying case. When attached to the lid.360 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual USB Soundcard for Voice Quality measurements If you have purchased a TerraTec USB sound card with your Nemo Outdoor Multi. it is possible to use external antennas. and a middle panel divides the case into two parts. The MMAC3 carrying case consists of three main parts: lid. onto the test vehicle back seat. and grooves on the inside leading the cables into the case and to the MMAC3 unit. all of the common components mentioned above are included. please refer to the Voice Quality guide for further instructions. The optional components remain optional. the mobile holder panel is covered with soft padding which has openings for the test terminals. Lid The case lid holds the mobile holder panel. top level and bottom level. When Nemo Outdoor Multi is delivered with the carrying case option. External antennas The external antennas can be placed on the middle panel which has a special magnet board to keep them in their place.

The USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors are meant for external devices such as the GPS devices. Both the MAIN POWER and MMAC3 POWER switches must be turned on when the Multi system is in use. The MAIN POWER switch turns on the Multi system when it is connected to either the car +12V socket or the car battery. the optional scanner or optional USB soundcard for Voice Quality measurements. The MMAC3 USB connector is connected to the laptop USB port with a USB data cable. However it makes it possible to measure up to approximately 45-60 minutes without external power supply. Most of the time it is recommended that both the MMAC3 POWER and the MAIN POWER switches are turned on when the Multi system is in used. If only MMAC3 POWER switch is turned on. Please remember to connect the data cable to same USB port in the laptop after its initial installation. depending on whether it is to be connected to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. There are two cables available in the system. Connector Box  The MMAC3 POWER switch turns on the MMAC3 unit.  Note that the lid must always be open when performing measurements. This way the MMAC3 unit with its devices are connected to the car power source and with the laptop PWR CONNECTOR is meant for the Nemo Outdoor Multi main external power cable. The back-up battery is intended for short power failures. The switch also provides power for the optional scanner.APPE NDI X 5 361 The mobile holder panel can support up to six test terminals which can be secured in place with the help of Velcro tapes. The MMAC3 unit with the test terminals and other devices connected to it are connected to the MMAC3 USB connector’s other end underneath the connector box. The Nemo Outdoor application supports up to five test mobiles at the time of printing this manual. MMAC3 unit uses its internal back-up battery. or otherwise the system may overheat.     .

The straps can be tightened. 3) Straps for holding cables in place during the transportation of the carrying case.362 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Carrying case The Multi measurement system comes divided into two levels by a middle panel. . Bottom level Below the middle panel you will find the following items: 1) MMAC3 unit 2) Optional USB soundcard for voice quality measurements 3) Optional scanner 4) Test terminal car chargers 5) Lockable USB bushings for the test terminal data cables Top level The top level holds the following items: 1) Mascot DC to AC 12V pure Sine Wave Inverter for the laptop 2) Magnet board for external antennas.

See below. In this case the components included in the package are as follows.and right.  Note that you should use separate cigarette lighter sockets in the car for the MMAC3 multi unit and for the laptop. otherwise the car fuse risks burning. .hand sides of the carrying case. MMAC3 WITHOUT CASE The MMAC3 unit can also be delivered on its own.APPE NDI X 5 363 4) You can lift the middle panel by the handles on the left. without the case. MMAC3 unit The MMAC3 unit is placed on the mounting plate.

 Note that the belt is no longer included in the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi package. USB A to USB B data cable .364 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Mounting plate Belt The belt holds the MMAC3 unit in its place on the mounting plate.

APPE NDI X 5 365 External power cable Screws USB bushing .

MMAC3 unit 2.2x16 9. USB-A to USB-B cable 3 m 5.366 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Mobile holder panel Item 1. Screw DIN 7981C 4. USB bushing 10. Hex Nut DIN 985 M4 8. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16 7. Belt 4. Mounting plate 3. Mobile holder panel Code MMAC3 1041-P-00 1041-P-01 1041-C-038 1041-P-033 800-0324-818 . External power cable 6.

.  Compiling the MMAC3 system 1. Screw DIN 7985 M4x16) in the holes shown below. 6. This enables you to attach the MMAC3 unit on a surface in the test vehicle. Attach the screws (see above.APPE NDI X 5 367 IN-VEHICLE SETUP & INSTALLATION Without Carrying Case The graph below shows the different components of the MMAC3 system.

Place the MMAC3 box into the mounting plate. 14.368 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 13. The MMAC3 unit is now ready to be used once all the cables and test devices have been attached to it. .

.APPE NDI X 5 369 With Carrying Case  Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use. otherwise it may risk overheating! Below you will see the system in a graph.

370 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Compiling the MMAC3 system 1. There are two ways of connecting the Multi system to a power source in the car: either to the car 12V socket or to the car battery. Connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to a power source in the car. These two options are listed below. Lift the clasp and turn it to open the case. There are a total of six locks on three sides of the carrying case. 358. connect the cigarette lighter end of the cable to the car 12V socket. Open the case locks. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector. 15. lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released. and pull it out. . Next. and push and turn the grey part of the plug until it locks to place. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box. a) Non-fixed installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system to the car 12V socket using the external power cable with the code 1046-C-025 (see cable 1 on p.). Connect the plug of the power cable to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box.

the mobile antennas can interfere with the GPS receiver. 17.1900 MHz.98”)  = 37 cm (14. =c/f c = 300E6 (m/s) f = frequency (Hz) 450 MHz 800 MHz 900 MHz  = 66 cm (25. 99”) 1800 MHz  = 17 cm (6. 16. Antennas should be installed as symmetrically as possible and at least one wavelength from the roof corners and roof windows.56”)  = 33 cm (12. When you want to remove the cable from the connector box. second scanner etc to the USB EXT1 and USB EXT2 connectors.1575 MHz  = 19 cm (7.29”) 2100 MHz  = 14.7”) GPS antenna 1565. . especially within the following frequency range 1800. and push and turn the grey part of the cable until it locks to place.69”) 1900 MHz  = 16 cm (6. lift and turn the plug until it is released and you can pull it out. The middle panel contains an iron board which is meant for the antennas. However. Connect the cable plug (code 1041-C-040) to the PWR CONNECTOR in the connector box. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector.48”) With a GPS antenna. distance from the corner is not important.APPE NDI X 5 371 b) Fixed Installation You can connect the Nemo Outdoor Multi system directly to the vehicle battery. The GPS antennas are placed on the vehicle roof in order to maximize the RF qualities of the antenna. Attach the other end of the cable to the car battery. Connect the possible optional USB devices such as GPS.5 cm (5. and two wavelengths from each other.

It is possible to use external antennae with the carrying case. Place the middle panel back in the carrying case. or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. Be careful not to pinch the cables with metal parts in any way that would damage them. 19. in which event the antennas are attached directly to the test terminals. Turn on the Multi system. The MMAC3 Power switch provides power solely for the MMAC3 unit.372 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Place all antenna away from roof racks or any other obstructions. Take the Mascot DC to AC power inverter out of the carrying case and place it on a steady surface in the vehicle. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate. 18.  . it means that the device is off. Connect the power cable that came with it directly to the car battery.    Green light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that it is using the internal back up battery power source. Bring the cables from the antennas into the vehicle. The Main PWR switch provides power for the whole system when the system is connected to the vehicle. When the light is off.

All drivers can be found on the CD that comes with the delivery. 23.APPE NDI X 5 373 20. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware. When tightening the screw the USB cable with the bushing is locked in place to the MMAC3 unit. If the system was purchased without a laptop it is recommended to install all required drivers for all test devices. install also the driver that comes with the scanner before connecting the USB data cable to the laptop. . Windows will automatically recognize the device. Connect the test terminals to the USB connectors in the MMAC3 unit one by one. Check that each phone has a SIM card in it and that the battery is in place. Attach one end of the data cable to a port in the laptop and the other to the MMAC USB port. Once installation with the first terminal is done proceed with next one until all terminals and test devices are installed. and the USB cable inserted in the USB connector in the MMAC3 unit. Connect the test terminals to the MMAC3 box and to the laptop. where you should be able to see the Generic USB Hub under Universal Serial Bus controllers. Each phone’s USB cable is secured in a bushing which keeps the data cable securely in place. Especially when the installation process is done for the first time. 21. See the phone’s manual for further instructions on how to do this. 22. If the optional scanner is included and reassembled inside the carrying case. The bushing is closed with screws. it is a lot easier to handle the installation process one terminal at a time. Connect the PC to the MMAC3 USB connector using the B data cable. Please refer to the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further instructions on how to connect each phone to the computer (via the MMAC3 unit) and on how to set up a dial-up connection and add the device to Nemo Outdoor on the laptop.

not for scanners! If a scanner is connected with the socket.  Note that these power sockets are meant solely for test terminal use. 5. Unscrew the Torx screw. Nemo Outdoor Multi is now ready to be used for measurements. On the back side there are two USB connectors: one USB B connector which is already connected to the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel. Install the lower part of the USB bushing to the USB port. install the top part of the USB bushing to the USB port and if needed use a bit of force to press it together with the lower part. to the laptop. 3. The optional soundcard can be connected. Use a torx screw to tighten and lock the data cable to the MMAC3 unit. pull out the data cable from the USB port. 2. please refer to the Nemo Outdoor WCDMA Scanner User Guide for instructions on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor. pull out the lower part of the USB bushing and store the parts to a secure place for future use. After that. Please tighten the screw as tight as possible till the connection is secure. Pull out the screw and pull out the top part of USB bushing. Plug in the USB data cable to a USB port in the MMAC3 unit. The MMAC3 unit has six USB A connectors at the front for terminals. for example. Next. the GPS device and the optional scanner. . However. the fuse risks overheating. it can be used for other USB devices as well. See the Nemo Voice Quality Guide for further instructions on how to set up the voice quality system. and the other which is a USB A connector meant primarily for the optional scanner. Next. 4. 2.374 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Removing data cable with USB bushing from MMAC3 1. and press the data cable from the top so that the data cable fits inside the lower part of the USB bushing as shown in the picture above. If you have purchased an optional scanner. The MMAC3 unit is connected to the laptop through the MMAC3 USB connector in the connector panel.  Installing data cable with USB bushing to MMAC3 1.

0. In addition.0 compliant ports (Out) Main Power Switch/LED Neutrik +12V Lockable Power Connector (NL2MP)  Complies with the following standards   300 019-2-5 V3. Benchmarking measurements can be performed on various system technologies and networks with support for up to six test mobiles/USB modems.1 standard (random. voice quality calls and data transfers simultaneously. a scanner and a sound card. The 4th generation Nemo Multi Lite is a compact and cost-effective benchmarking solution for use with Nemo Outdoor. it is recommended to run Nemo Outdoor as administrator. Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Technical Specifications  Interfaces     One USB 2. the system in combination with the Nemo Outdoor Multi -option allows the use of different combinations of measurement modes such as voice calls. The system is connected to a single laptop. bump and shock) vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC. Right-click the Nemo Outdoor shortcut or item in the Start menu and select Run as administrator. ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III .0 class T5.0 compliant B port (In) Seven USB 2. saving space in the test vehicle during drive testing and adding to the ease of use of the system.APPE NDI X 6 375 APPENDIX 6 NEMO OUTDOOR MULTI LITE MANUAL  Please note that if you are running multi data measurements on a Windows 7 laptop.

7 .7 USB data cable must be connected to PC.3V DC Configuration No devices No devices TerraTec Charging phone x 1 Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via car charger 2 Nokia terminals charged via car charger 3 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 4 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 5 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers 6 Nokia terminals charged via car chargers Not charging Charging Charging phone x 2 3.2 Charging phone via USB x 3 3.7 2.85 No devices No devices TerraTec Idle mode Idle mode Sound card connected One Nokia terminal charged via USB port 2 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 3 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 4 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5 Nokia terminals charged 0.35 1. max 8A Outputs: +12VDC: 0.3V DC measured) Charging phone via USB x 1 2.376 Nemo O ut door User M a nual    IP Rated: IP67 EN60529:1991 IEC60529:1989   Lockable USB data cable connections Automatic Pressure Equalization Valve Power Specification    Input: +12VDC nominal (11.2 4.3 .8V DC (11.7 2.2 Not charging Charging Minimum operating voltage +10.7 Charging phone via USB x 4 Charging phone via USB x 5 4.05 Charging phone x 4 4.45 Charging phone x 3 4.15VDC range).85 Note Input Voltage +12V DC Minimum operating voltage +11.2 2.25 Charging phone x 6 5.35 1.8A/socket or total 5A Back-up battery capacity: Li-ion 2500 mAh Operating mode Required power (A) 0. Otherwise USB charging does not work Charging phone via USB x 2 3.65 Charging phone x 5 5.

APPE NDI X 6

377

via USB ports Charging phone via USB x 6 6 Nokia terminals charged via USB ports 5.2

Measurement time with back up battery with sound card and six terminals

~3.5 minutes

“Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals “Device not connected” appears in Nemo Outdoor UI. Actual measurement time with back-up battery varies depending on the voltage level of test terminals.

Measurement time with back up battery without sound card with six terminals

~20 minutes

Note that if the same power source is shared with Multi Lite and the PC, the power should always be turned on first in the Multi unit, and only after that on the PC (e.g., if a +12V cigarette lighter socket is used as power source).

Computer Requirements
      PC (IBM or Dell recommended) with Windows® XP Professional (32 - bit) or Windows® Vista (32 bit) For multi data and voice quality measurements Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher 512MB RAM minimum, 1GB RAM recommended 100MB of free hard disk space for installation and use, 1GB recommended For up to four channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.00GHz or higher required For up to six channel voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Quad Core processor Q9100 2.26GHz or higher required

378

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite System Components

Case
Pelican case 1520
 Interior 45.9 x 32.7 x 17.1 cm

APPE NDI X 6

379

(18.06" x 12.89" x 6.72")  Exterior 50.2 x 40 x 18.8 cm (19.78" x 15.77" x 7.41")  Weight ~ 10.3kg (22.7lbs) (without test terminals and antennas)

Lid organizer
  Place for CD, dongle, antennas, USB extension cable (max. 3m), etc. Gas spring

Middle part
    Place for up to six terminals Fixed holders, 4 pcs Movable holders with hinge, 2pcs Fan

380

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Bottom part
     2500mAh back-up battery PCB/Charger Cigarette lighter sockets Industrial seven port USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card (optional)

APPE NDI X 6

381

Exterior
 Carbine hooks (2pcs)

Optional components
  Scanner Sound card

Laptop with Nemo Outdoor

Note that from version 5.4 onwards, Nemo Outdoor requires a new dongle which cannot be used with any previous versions of Nemo Outdoor.

382

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Setting Up the System
 Multi Lite first-time installation
Upon your purchase of the Multi Lite case and test devices, you will receive the system semiconfigured. This means that the data and audio cables as well as the optional sound card have been set up for you, so there is no need for you to access the bottom part of the case. However, you will need to set up and connect your test devices with Nemo Outdoor. The following instructions will guide you through this process. 1. Open the case latches. 2. Insert the copy protection dongle attached to the case lid organizer to your computer. 3. Next, turn on the PC and run the Nemo Outdoor installation CD.   Note that you should make sure that the PC meets the computer requirements mentioned above. Note that prior to connecting the test devices to the PC, make sure that the drivers for the terminal data cables, sound card and scanners have been installed. Refer to the Nemo Outdoor Scanner Guide on page 453 and to the separate Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide document for instructions. In the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide you will find terminal-specific instructions regarding the drivers. At this point, only focus on driver installation. The dial-up installation will be performed later on. 4. Connect the Multi Lite power cable to the power connector next to the power switch on the connector panel. Adjust the plug to fit the grooves in the connector, push and turn it to the left until it locks to place. Similarly, when you want to remove the cable connector from the connector panel, lift and turn the grey part of the plug until it is released, and pull it up. 5. Connect the other end of the cable to the car +12V socket. 6. Connect the USB extension cable to the USB data cable coming from USB hub, and the other end to the PC (max. 3m long) to the laptop.

7. Switch on the Multi unit from the connector panel. Even though the Multi unit can derive power from the laptop, it is not powerful enough for uninterrupted power supply. 8. Attach the test terminals to their mobile holders one by one.

APPE NDI X 6

383

 

Note that with Nokia N85, N85US, N96, N96US, N97, N97US, 6720, and 6720US terminals, after initial connection to a USB port, the terminal will always have the same COM ports. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements, it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. Holders 1-4 are reserved for Voice Quality measurements. For example, the voice quality cable for terminal 1 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 1, the voice quality cable for terminal 2 will be attached to sound card audio connector line 2, and so forth. See page 439 for more information. 9. The layout of the mobile holder configuration is as shown in the image below.

10. Start Nemo Outdoor on the PC. 11. Connect the data cables to the test terminals one by one, and follow the dial-up connection instructions in the Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide. Note that the same terminal type can use the same dial-up connection with Nemo Outdoor. Instructions for how to add the device in Nemo Outdoor is included in the dial-up instructions. 12. Connect the chargers to the test terminals, and the other end to the +12V power sockets in the Nemo Multi Lite connector panel. Note also that some terminals are charged via a USB port.

384

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Note that only phones can be connected to the cigarette lighter sockets in the Multi Lite panel. The scanner must at no time be connected to the +12V cigarette lighter socket. If a scanner is connected to one of the sockets, the fuse risks overheating! 13. If you purchased a scanner, connect the scanner USB cable to the laptop. See Nemo Outdoor Scanner Guide (see p. 453) for more information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor.

 

Note that the scanner data cable is connected to the laptop, not to the USB 2.0 hub at the bottom of the Multi Lite case. Note that the lid of the carrying case must be open at all times when the system is in use, otherwise it may risk overheating! 14. In case you change your test terminals to a different model, or need to change data cables or audio cables for any other reason, see below.

Changing Data Cables
1. Disconnect the terminals from the laptop and remove the data cables from the terminals by pulling them out. 2. Use the hex key in the Multi Lite lid organizer pouch to unscrew and remove the middle panel in the case. There are four screws (DIN 912 hex head screws) in the middle panel, and one screw (DIN 912 hex head screw) on either side of the case for attaching mobile holders.

APPE NDI X 6

385

3. After removing the screws in the middle panel, lift it from the right-hand side of the case when you are facing it, and attach it to the case lid as shown in the picture sequence below.

1)

2)

386

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3)

4)

4. After removing the middle panel, you will see the USB 2.0 hub (Digi Hubport 7C) in the upper right-hand corner. 5. Turn the thumb screws as illustrated in the picture below to open and remove the hub clamp cover.

APPE NDI X 6

387

6. Move the hub in the direction shown by the red arrow and lift to remove the cover.

7. Once the cover is removed, you can remove the USB data cables.

8. Next, change the data cables for the new test terminals. If the data cable driver is different from the one used earlier, remember to install the new driver before connecting the data cable to the laptop. Consult the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for instructions. 9. Place and screw the hub clamp cover back into place with the thumb screws, and push the USB 2.0 hub back into its original place. 10. Insert the data cables through the round PGSD-4 openings in the middle panel. They will be connected to the terminals later on after the phones are attached to the mobile holders.

11. If you also need to change audio cables, proceed to the following section.

72“) Weight (Multi Lite without terminals and antennas) Carry-on luggage Back up battery (Li-ion 2500mAh) / charger Industrial USB 2.2 x 40 x 18. Changing audio cables 1. You can now proceed with measurements.89" x 6.06" x 12. attach and screw the middle panel back into place.7lbs) Yes* Yes Yes Yes Nemo Outdoor Multi 6 1 internal 6 Yes 60. and the TerraTec sound card * Max.3 x 9.0 x 8.4") ~25kg (55lbs) No Yes Yes Yes Electrical parts between Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite and Nemo Outdoor Multi are identical including USB hub.0 class T5. Nemo Outdoor Multi Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite Max. remove the case middle panel as instructed above.0 x 24.1 x 20.4 x 51. 415) for more details regarding the sound card setup. 3. 2.2 x 20. If you have not already done it.1 standard vibration test EMC test directive 95/54/EC.7 x 17. Remove the audio cables from the TerraTec sound card.41" ) Interior dimensions 45.1 cm (18. number of voice quality terminals Pure sine wave inverter (300W) Exterior dimensions 6 1 external 6 No 50.0 hub. allowance varies depending on air lines . PCB. Start with measurements.77" x 7.388 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 12.9 x 18. charger.8 cm (19. Nemo Outdoor Multi Lite vs.78" x 15. 13. If you are done with changing cables. ECE regulation No 10/02 and ISO 7637-2 III ~10. number of terminals Max. Digi Hubport 7C Comply: 300 019-2-5 V3.3 x 45.8 cm (21.6 cm (24.3kg (22.9 x 32. number of scanners Max. Refer to the Nemo Voice Quality Guide (p.0.8") 55. back-up battery.

the TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card and with the Maya44 USB sound card. Nemo Outdoor supports voice quality measurements with three options: with the Nemo Audio Module. runs in real-time on a DSP board. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6 Fire USB sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor. It is supported with the Nemo Outdoor platform. the Nemo Audio Module (EVOQ). For a list of supported terminals.2 and it produces a PESQ score that is mapped on an EMOS (Estimated Mean Opinion Score) scale. and CDMA2000. you can connect up to 6 test terminals with Nemo Outdoor Multi.VOICE QUALITY GUIDE Nemo Voice Quality is an option for the Nemo Outdoor measurement system. . CDMA2000. 1-4 mobiles. Nemo Outdoor supports mobile-to-mobile and mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. mobileto-mobile and fixed-to-mobile measurements. and TD-SCDMA technologies. The measurement is based on the ITU-T recommendations P. Also measurements based on the WBAMR codec are supported. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. The measurements enable the assessment of the quality of voice during voice calls as perceived by end-users. With all options. and it supports the USB 2. WCDMA.e. 1-6 mobiles. the Nemo audio module.0 audio system. For a list of supported terminals.APPE NDI X 7 389 APPENDIX 7 . and the GSM. the Maya44 sound card. 1-6 audio modules. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Nemo Audio modules (EVOQs) consists of Nemo Outdoor.862. 1-4 mobiles. EVOQ. The Nemo Voice Quality system with the Maya44 sound card consists of Nemo Outdoor. four channels. WCDMA. the TerraTec sound card. If you combine the TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards. and optionally Nemo Outdoor Multi. The supported technologies are GSM. the TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound card and the Maya44 sound card it is possible to perform two types of voice quality measurements.1 and P862. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. please see the Voice Quality data sheet. i.

Voice Quality mobile-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Modules Voice Quality with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card . These measurements present the combination of the uplink quality of the transmitting terminal and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. one terminal is calling another and the mobiles send a test sample.390 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual In mobile-to-mobile measurements.

APPE NDI X 7 391 In mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile measurements. the uplink quality of the terminal at the server end. These measurements present the downlink quality of the terminal at the Nemo Outdoor end. Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with the Nemo Audio Module Mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile with TerraTec DMX 6 Fire Sound Card . and the downlink quality of the receiving terminal. a terminal calls a fixed number (PSTN) that is connected to a Nemo Server with the Audiotest option.

it takes up to 30 seconds for the server to hang up the line automatically. Nemo Outdoor sends the same sample to the server. Along with the test samples. The measurement file on server side is closed when the line is dropped. or after a user-defined time that can be adjusted via the Nemo Server Manager application. with mobile-to-fixed-line testing synchronization tone is sent first from the mobile/ EVOQ/sound card audio module to the server. when busy tone detection has not been performed. This time the server recognizes the sample. e. If the server does not detect the line drop. the server answers the call and Nemo Outdoor/EVOQ/sound card audio module starts sending the configured test sample. . After receiving the test sample. After the identification.g. non-degraded sample to Nemo Outdoor that records it and calculates the PESQ score (MOS DL). and stores the result there. opens a measurement file.5 seconds of incoming audio. The server records 1. They are used for synchronization purposes and do not affect the PESQ score. short synchronization tone is sent. For example.392 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual VOICE QUALITY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Mobile-to-Fixed Line When Nemo Outdoor calls a fixed line that is connected to Nemo Server. or until Nemo Outdoor or Nemo Server ends the call. calculates the score (MOS UL). records it for the duration of the identified sample. the server sends the identified. after which it compares the recorded sample and chooses the best matching sample from the default samples unless sample forcing is not used on server side. The synchronization tone is always sent from the side which sends the audio sample. The test goes on alternating until a call drops.

Refer to the Nemo Outdoor user manual for detailed instructions. The change and description above applies to firmware version 2. NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – NEMO AUDIO MODULE (EVOQ)  Setting Up the System This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. and the setup exemplified with a picture.8 and Nemo Server 2. . PSTN lines of Nemo Server must be calibrated before use.APPE NDI X 7 393 Mobile-to-Mobile The same logic is used also in mobile-to-mobile testing as with mobile-to-fixed line. Busy call detection wizard of Nemo Server must be done before use.0. In the following four parts. the terminal-specific cables will be listed.0. and later. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software first. Terminal-Specific Hardware for Voice Quality Testing The image below exemplifies the voice quality module and cable setup.    Note that the synchronization algorithm has been changed for the EVOQ audio module.

394 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Note that all audio cables need to be inserted with the red dot facing upwards. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) 4) Nokia DKU-2/CA-86US v.2 audio/ data cable (420008-00) -Ground Type: Differential Ground (425000-01) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. 6630. also 10014900 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. 6680. Product Code 100244-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia terminals compatible with CA-86US v. . -If the number of terminals exceeds two. N75 and N80.2 data cables including: -6230i.

RCA Female. .Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ.APPE NDI X 7 395 Product Code 100245-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95 series terminals including: Nokia 95 and Nokia 95US. If the number of terminals exceeds two. also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required.

Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) 2. Included are Nokia 3500.396 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Product Code 100246-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia 3500 and 612x series terminals.5mm 4-P-RCA male audio cable (420042-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (425000-02) 1) 2) 3) 4)  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. Configuration 1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: 1) Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) 2) EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) 3) EVOQ Data Cable (RS232RJ45) (420007-00) 4) EVOQ. If the number of terminals exceeds two. . RCA Female. also 100149-00 or 100150-00 and 100251-00 are required. 6120 and Nokia 6121.

3. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3. Configuration -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) 425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2. 100249-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8100 terminal.5mm angle 100248-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8000 terminal. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required. 100250-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG-VX8300 terminal.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.5mm. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.APPE NDI X 7 397 Product Code 100247-00 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG LHD-200E terminal.5mm.5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.3. RCA Female. .5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.5mm.3.3. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.

5mm. -1 x Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) with required accessories including: -Voice Quality Box (EVOQ) (425000-00) -EVOQ USB Power Cable (420005-00) -EVOQ PS/2 Power Cable (420006-00) -EVOQ Data Cable (RS232-RJ45) (420007-00) -Audio adapter plug 2.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. and that the YELLOW RCA female connector must be connected to the WHITE RCA male connector.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) 3) EVOQ.5mm. If the number of terminals exceeds two or more.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 1) 1) Audio adapter plug 2. also 100149-00 or 100243-00 and 100251-00 are required.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00)  Note that the WHITE RCA female connector must be connected to RED RCA male connector. .5mm angle (426000-00) -Audio cable 3.3.KX 206 terminal.5 mm 2X RCA male (420045-00) -EVOQ.3. RCA Female.398 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual (426000-00) -Audio cable 3. RCA Female. RCA Female-Lemo Audio Cable (420037-00) -Ground Type: Common Ground (42500002) 100255-00 Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with LG.

APPE NDI X 7 399  Note that also the EVOQ PS/2 power cable (420006-00) can alternatively be used with the voice quality box instead of the USB power cable shown in the example picture. the light will blink red a few times before turning green when it is reconnected. insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk with the Edgeport/8 driver file into the CD-ROM drive. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC2 Multi device. Green: This light indicates that the serial ports are successfully set up and the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8) is operating normally. amber. There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will blink red.  Red: This light signifies the loss of USB communication with the host. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically. . The following section will provide information on how to connect the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device. Switch on the computer. Connect the USB cable to the Multi holder and the other end to your computer. If the loss is due to unplugging the unit. Amber (orange): This light signifies serial port activity on the MMAC2 (Edgeport/8). Switch on power in Multi holder from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit. Otherwise. The red will also blink during installation until the installation is complete. which may need to be reinstalled. the light indicates a problem with the (Edgeport/8) drivers. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer. The amber light may also flash briefly during installation. or green. 2. Please observe the led during installation and use as it will indicate whether the Multi unit is working properly or not. 3.  Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi Device When there are two or more audio modules in use. the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements.    Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi device: 1.

Double-click on Ports. 5. Windows will detect the new Edgeport/8 device. etc. Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab click the Device Manager button). Wait until the process is finished. Windows® 2000 may find many new devices.  Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e. Click Yes in the Digital Signature Not Found dialog if it appears. If not.. Port2 is the second new COM port (e. . COM50). start from the beginning. There should be eight new COM ports. Drivers are found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD-ROM. COM49). Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel.g.g..400 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4.

g. Connect the trace cable between the audio module and the MMAC unit. there are eight new COM ports. COM49). . 1.  Port numbers are arranged so that the port marked as Port1 on the multi device is the first of the new COM ports (e. As described in the Multi device set-up. Port2 is the second new COM port (e.APPE NDI X 6 401   Connecting Voice Quality Devices . Insert plug A in a serial port on the MMAC unit and plug B on the connector marked COM on the audio module.g..MMAC2 Please complete the Nemo Outdoor MMAC2 Multi installation first as the Voice Quality devices are connected to the COM port provided by the Multi mobile holder.. COM50). etc.

plug B to a free USB port on your computer/MMAC unit. and plug C to the connector marked Phone on the audio module.402 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 2. . Insert plug A to the test terminal. Use the three-headed DKU-2 trace/audio cable to connect the test terminal and the audio module.

A green led should light up.APPE NDI X 6 403 3. . Insert the A plugs to the connectors marked Power on the audio modules and B plug in the front panel of the MMAC unit. The Phone Properties dialog is opened. Start Nemo Outdoor. 4. Connect the power cable between the audio modules and the MMAC unit. In the Configuration Manager. click Add and select the device.

the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle). . 6. Modems tab).g. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number. COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port. select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. e. Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port. Go to the Device Manager. COM52 in the example below. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options. In the VQ Device Port.404 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5. For example..

If you have several mobiles and audio modules. make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination. Switch off alert and warning tones.APPE NDI X 6 405 7.  . The test terminal will start and initialize the audio module.5/3.  Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. 8. Click OK.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals). Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or to second highest level with N95 and other ‘2. You are now ready to start the measurements.

The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi option without the carrying case. after initial connection to a USB port. Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements.406 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Connecting Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device When there are two or more audio modules in use. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. 6720. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. N97US. N96. the Nemo Outdoor Multi device is required for measurements. N97. N96US. . N85US. and 6720US terminals. This chapter describes the installation of the MMAC3 Multi device.   Note that with Nokia N85.

2. Windows will detect the USB hub automatically. 3. Before connecting the Multi device to your computer. Red light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the internal back-up battery power source. Connect the USB cable to the Multi and the other end to your computer. Low voltage can occur if the power source cannot supply enough power to all devices connected to the multi carrying case. Yellow light indicates that the MMAC3 is on and that the voltage level is too low to operate.APPE NDI X 6 407 The graph below illustrates the MMAC3 Multi system with the carrying case option. Switch on power in Multi from the power switch at the back of the Multi unit.   Installing and connecting the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi device: 1. Switch on the computer. red. insert the Nemo Outdoor installation CDROM disk into the CD-ROM drive.    Green light indicates that the MMAC3 unit is on and that it is using the external +12V power source. it means that the device is off. . There is a status led at the back of the Multi unit which will show green. as described below. or that it is on but the internal backup battery is empty. yellow or no light depending on the power usage of Nemo Outdoor Multi. When the light is off.

However. below you will find instructions on how to connect the voice quality devices with MMAC3 Multi unit. Double-click on System and in the Hardware tab. click on the Device Manager button). Double-click on the Universal Serial Bus Controllers item. For instructions on how to set up the MMAC3 system.408 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4. Go to the Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel). refer to the Nemo Outdoor manual. . You should be able to see the Generic USB Hub item.

APPE NDI X 6 409  Connecting EVOQ audio modules with MMAC3 The voice quality system is shown below. . The graph shows the system on the whole.

and plug B in the COM port in the voice quality (EVOQ) box. The black arrows above indicate the screws that go in the slots underneath the voice quality (EVOQ) box to keep it in place. The voice quality plate is attached to the MMAC3 unit with screws (see the red arrows). three voice quality (EVOQ) modules. One end of the A to B data cable (C) goes to Edgeport. and the other end to the laptop computer.410 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The following picture shows the setup with an MMAC3 Multi unit. and one voice quality test mobile. 2. Insert plug A of the serial cable in a serial port in the Edgeport box. 1. the voice quality plate. . an Edgeport. Please refer to the Nemo Server manual for information on how to connect the Voice Quality system with the server.

The Phone Properties dialog is opened. In the Configuration Manager. click Add and select the device. Start Nemo Outdoor. The voice quality boxes are all connected to the back of the MMAC3 unit (D). 25.APPE NDI X 6 411 24. The MMAC3 unit is connected to a power source through a power cable (E). . Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual for information on how to connect the MMAC3 unit to a power source.

. COM52 in the example below. Under Ports you see eight Edgeport items. In the VQ Device Port. Count to the fourth item and check the COM port number. Select the port with the smaller number as the modem port and the port with the bigger number as the trace port. 27. the serial cable is connected to port number 4 in the Multi unit (in the front and middle).g.412 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 26. Modems tab). Go to the Device Manager.. Select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. e. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options. select the COM port where the serial cable of the audio module is connected. For example. COM59 as trace port and COM58 as modem port.

The table below shows the terminal model and ground type. If you have several mobiles and audio modules. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. 29. 6121. Nokia 7376. . 6630. Remember to check that the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is at minimum. Terminal Nokia terminals 6230i. Click OK. 6720 LG VX8X00 series Differential Ground Yes Common Ground Jumper J9 in place No  Yes Yes Yes Yes If the purchased voice quality system includes both differential and common ground terminals. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume to minimum (or level 4 with N95 and other ‘2.APPE NDI X 6 413 28. The test terminal will start and initialize the terminal used with the EVOQ module. Do not select anything in the Dial-Up Connection fields. 6680.5mm jack plug’ headset connected terminals). 3500. The terminals are either used by common ground cables or differential ground cables.  Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. 6651. N80 Nokia N95. Switch off alert and warning tones. make sure that you select the correct ports for each mobile + audio module combination. 6650. 6120. the module needs to be modified accordingly. the EVOQ modules are by default set for differential ground. N75.5/3.

Remove the cover from EVOQ module by unscrewing the four M4*6 screws. 2.414 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Disassembling the EVOQ Module 1. Install jumper J9 in place as shown in the picture below.0. 3. Remove the pc board from the box by unscrewing the screws shown in picture 2. . Make sure you are ESD protected to avoid damaging the pc board.

3 mm jack) 48V phantom power -20 dB pad switch 1 instrument input with gain control (6.0 GHz Intel or AMD CPU Windows XP SP2 or Windows XP X64 or Windows Vista or Windows Vista X64 512 MB RAM 1 free USB 2. Place the cover on top of the box and tighten the screws.1 Surround Expander 1 headphone jack (6.APPE NDI X 6 415 Assembling the EVOQ Module Place the pc board back into the box and tighten the screws.3 mm jack) 4 analogue inputs (cinch) 1 phono input (RCA cinch) with RIAA equaliser and gain control 6 analogue outputs (cinch) Stereo to 5. NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – TERRATEC SOUND CARD Nemo Voice Quality – TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Technical Data                     USB 2.0 support Control panel for Windows XP SP2 / Vista System Requirements o o o o o 2.3 mm) with separate volume controller 1 optical digital input/output (TOS Link) 1 coaxial digital input/output (cinch) 1 MIDI interface In/Out (5-pin DIN) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (input 1/2) 24 bit / 192 kHz A/D converter with 105 dB (A) SNR* (input 3/4) 24 bit / 192 kHz D/A converter with 114 dB (A) SNR* (outputs 1-6) WDM driver for Windows XP SP2 / Vista ASIO 2.0 audio system 1 microphone input with gain control (combo XLR / 6.0 port CD/DVD drive .

0 GHz or AMD PCU.5mm stereo)  Setting up the system This chapter will describe the steps for setting up and configuring the voice quality measurement system. this is generally free of charge.3mm  3. The System Properties dialog appears. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB sound card driver. Please note that this specific version of the driver needs to be used. Right-click the My Computer icon and choose Properties from the context menu.8m 1 Adaptor (6. 3. You can also enter the System Properties dialog by going to Start | Settings | Control Panel | System. 1. power can be switched on in the sound card. . For Windows.5mm mono) 1 Adaptor (6. 2. ensure that your Windows XP version is up to date.416 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Scope of delivery o o o o o DMX 6Fire USB Power supply USB cable 1. Please install the Nemo Outdoor software and the DMX 6Fire USB driver first. the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2. The installation wizard will now display its welcome message. Double-click on the installation file. Before you start. If this is not the case.com) to update your system. It is important for Windows XP Service Pack 2 (SP2 for short) or Windows Vista to be installed on your computer.  Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the hardware requirements stated above. or more powerful. Installing the DMX 6Fire USB Driver in Windows XP  Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete.3mm  3. However. please contact Microsoft (www. in which you can check your current service pack version.microsoft.

If Nemo Multi hardware is used. 5. select Browse.0 port using the cable provided.APPE NDI X 6 417 4. 6.. and choose the corresponding directory. If you prefer another folder. sound card can be connected also to the Multi unit.. The default destination for the installation is specified in the following window. . Then. Click Continue Anyway to continue. The driver is now installed in the system. click Install. You can disregard the safety warning without concern. you can connect the DMX 6Fire USB to your computer's USB 2. Windows XP will automatically recognize the device as new hardware and open the driver installation dialogue. and as soon as the message below appears.

10. You do not have to search for the driver online. a new system restore point is set. This concludes part 1 of the installation. select Install the software automatically [Recommended] and confirm with Next. the drivers that make the controller a USB audio device are installed. Here. The next window asks about the driver for the DMX 6Fire USB hardware. you can safely ignore the message that the software did not pass the Windows Logo test. Click Finish to complete the installation of the drivers. Next. 11. The Windows Found New Hardware Wizard asks what driver to use for the new hardware component. This returns you to the installation wizard. Then.418 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 7. . now. just to be safe. Nothing to be concerned about—this is a standard precaution. Again. 8. 12. too. 9. as only the drivers for the USB controller have been installed. select Install the software automatically to install the second batch of drivers. so click Finish.

6121. 14. N95 US.APPE NDI X 6 419 13. N85. C5 LG C680 LG KX206. 6120. Once the drivers have been installed. . 15. N85 US. N96. N97US Nokia 6720(US). Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button. N97. Note that the volume level of the test terminals needs to be adjusted according to the table below during a voice call: Terminal Nokia 3500. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7 16. C676 LG VX8350. N95. Start TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB Control Panel from Start | TerraTec | DMX6FireUSB. N96 US. After installation remember to check that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls are adjusted to the minimum and the PAD switches are in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. the DMX 6Fire USB should appear in the device manager with the following entries.

19.420 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 17. Remember to also pay attention to the bottom part of the panel. This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/WCDMA terminals. With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E terminals the TerraTec control panel settings are different from other terminals. From the control panel set the settings as in the screen shots below. Input settings:     Set Input ½ and Input ¾ levels to +5dB Set the Waveplay ½ and Waveplay ¾ levels to -5dB (with Datang and Leadcore: -13dB. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals. and with Samsung SGH-U800: -5db -> -10db) Unset all routing buttons at the bottom of the panel except set Waveplay 1/2 routing to 1/2 and Waveplay 3/4 routing to ¾ Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore LC 8130E needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. 18. unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. Output settings:  Set all Output levels and Master to 0dB .

You do not need to select anything in the dial-up connection fields unless you are also performing data transfers. In this case please refer to the Nemo Outdoor Dial-Up Networking Setup Guide for further information. .g. 22. select the Sound card channel item. e. Now you can start Nemo Outdoor. COM100 as trace port and COM101 as modem port. 21. From Miscellaneous | Asio | Asio Latency. Select the port with the bigger number as the modem port and the port with the smaller number as the trace port. in Nemo Outdoor add a terminal by going to Measurement | Add New Device | Phone In the Phone Properties dialog select the two ports assigned to the mobile as Trace Port and Modem Port. You will see a list of numbered options from channel 1 onwards. Next.. Otherwise there may be breaks in the measurement files. You can check the ports from the Phone and Modem Options dialog (Start | Settings | Control Panel | Phone and Modem Options.0ms 384 samples) and close the Asio Latency window.  Note that if there is a system that measures acceleration in the laptop and which causes the hard disk to stop when jolted.APPE NDI X 6 421 20. Next. Select the channel based on to which LINE IN and LINE out jack you connected the audio cable in the sound card. With the Lenovo T61 laptop you can turn this system off by going to Start | ThinkVantage Productivity Center and selecting Security | Protection and Recovery | Protect my hard-drive [ ] Enable Active Protection System. it should be turned off. You can leave the DMX control panel open or close it. select Maximum (8. Modems tab).

Note that if you are using more than two mobiles for voice quality measurements. Refer to page 105 for more information on voice quality settings. Note that when you are using a separate 300W inverter. 24. Click OK in the Measurement Properties dialog. For example. Please refer to the Nemo Outdoor MMAC3 Multi manual in Appendix 5 for information on the Nemo Outdoor Multi system. Select Measurement Properties | Voice number | Properties. You are now ready to perform voice quality measurements.   Note that you need to add and configure each mobile separately. if the computer is connected to the inverter during a measurement. This further risks an interruption in the reception of MOS values. Nemo Outdoor Multi is needed. make sure that you select the correct channel for each mobile.  .422 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 23. it is recommended that the computer and sound card be connected to the inverter prior to starting measurements. If you have several mobiles. it is possible that it causes a temporary supply voltage disconnection.

it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer.0 sound card with required accessories including: -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2. an Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. ELFA 69-715-27 (499048-02) -Inverter Mascot 9984 12V/ 220V 150W for sound card.0 sound card  NOTE! Use this code only when voice quality system is sold with Nemo Outdoor Multi (100149-00 or 10024300) or without multi hardware. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously.0 Sound Card    Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one USB sound card can be connected to the computer at a time Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results. try closing the unnecessary ones. if you have many applications running on the laptop. With Nemo Multi Lite use code 100318-00 Configuration 1) 1 x Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2.5mm ELFA 80-361-47 (499048-04) -Terratec Cover 1180-p-030 (42700101) -Terratec Strain Relief 1180-p031(427001-02) -Line Mic4 adapter (427000-01)  .0 sound card -USB A to B data cable -220V power supply -Terratec DMX 6Fire USB driver (427001-00) -Inverter Mascot 2285 12V/ 220V 300W for sound card and computer. Next. First. ELFA 69-717-09 (499048-05) -PWR Cable for Inverter (4m) (499048-03) -Extension cord for sound card ELFA 42-223-76 (419009-00) -Flat head screw driver 3.APPE NDI X 6 423 Required Hardware with TerraTec DMX 6Fire USB 2.0 Sound Card Product Code 100256-01 Product Name Terratec DMX 6Fire USB 2. try the following. First of all.

and the PAD switches need to be in the OFF position in the TerraTec Sound Card front panel. N96 and N96US Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) . Nokia N85(US)/N95(US)/N96(US)/6720(US). the terminals always take up the same number in both LINE IN and LINE OUT. The A to B USB cable is connected to the USB connector. It is not recommended that other devices be connected to it to ensure sufficient power supply. N95US. Note that the A to B USB cable should be connected directly to the laptop! Do not connect the cable to the multi hardware (if used). The Mascot 9984 inverter is only meant to be used with the sound card.  At the back of the TerraTec Sound Card:    The power cable is connected to the POWER connector and the other end of the power cable is connected to the inverter. Note that the GAIN1 and GAIN2 controls need to be adjusted to the minimum.  The red RCA lead is connected to LINE IN 1 and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT 1.424 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that when used in a vehicle. the sound card should only be used with the two power inverters provided by Anite Finland. When there are more than one test terminal in use. and the other end of the cable is connected directly to the laptop. In case of overload the user risks receiving erroneous measurement results. The Mascot 2285 inverter is meant to be used with the sound card and the laptop. N97(US) Product Code 100257-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with Nokia N95.

The red RCA lead will be connected to LINE IN X and the black RCA lead to LINE OUT X connector. 6720 and 6720US.female) (42004600) 2) 1 x audio cable CA-75U (420047-00) The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter (1) and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead. N97. Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male. . N97US. N85US. 100257-03 Voice Quality with Nokia N85. Note that the red audio cable (CA-75U) connector will remain unused.APPE NDI X 6 425 2) Audio cable CA-75U included in the terminal sales package.

pin.RCA male audio cable (420042-00) 3) RCA male audio cable (420042-00) The yellow audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the white audio connector to the red RCA lead. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable Line In connector in the sound card. The red audio cable connector will remain unused. .Nokia 6120. Configuration Includes: 1) 1 x RCA cable extension leads (male-female) (42004600) 2) 1 x 2. 6121 and Nokia 3500.426 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. Nokia 3500 and 612X Product Code 100258-01 Product Name N612x/3500 audio cables/ adapter package.5mm 4. as shown below.  Note that the volume on the Nokia N85/N95/N96/6720/N97 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call. and the yellow audio connector to the line mic adapter.

. and the yellow audio connector to the Line mic adapter.  Note that the volume on the Nokia 612X and 3500 needs to be adjusted to level 8 during a voice call. In this case the white audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card.APPE NDI X 6 427 You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. as shown below.

. Configuration     Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. Note that the volume on the LG VX8350 and VX8360 terminals needs to be adjusted to the maximum (8/8) during a voice call. Note that the volume on LG C676 and KX206 needs to be adjusted to level 4 (4/7) during a voice call. and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter (colors visible on the inside of the connectors). LG KX256. Note that the volume on the Huawei C7600 terminal needs to be adjusted to maximum level (7/7) during a voice call.428 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual LG CDMA/VX8350/VX8360/Huawei C7600 (EVDO) Product Code 100259-01 Product Name CDMA audio cable/adapter package for LG C680. The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) Note that the volume on LG C680 needs to be adjusted to level 3 (3/8) during a voice call. LG VX8350/VX8360 and Huawei C7600.5mm3. LG C676. LG KX206.

and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter which is connected to the sound card LINE OUT/ANALOG OUT connector(s) (colors visible on the inside of the connectors).APPE NDI X 6 429 Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore LC 8130E Product Code 100260-01 Product Name Datang DTM 8120/ Leadcore 8130E audio cable/adapter package. .5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3. Configuration Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (42004500) The red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN/ANALOG IN connector in the sound card.5mm3. Below you see examples for both the TerraTec and Maya sound cards.

.430 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the sound card.

This way you can adjust the waveplay settings separately for the Datang terminal without affecting CDMA or GSM/ WCDMA terminals. unset the LINK buttons below the input/waveplay settings and you can change waveplay settings by channel. If the system is used simultaneously with other terminals.APPE NDI X 6 431  Note that the volume on the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals needs to be adjusted to level 2 (2/ 5) during a voice call. . With the Datang 8120 and Leadcore 8130E terminals the Terratec control panel settings are different from other terminals.

.5mm angle (426000-00) 2) Audio cable 3.5mm3. The red RCA extension lead will be connected to the sound card’s LINE IN connector and the black RCA extension lead to the LINE OUT connector.5mm AAET554CBEBSTD (419004-01) Note that the volume on the Samsung SGH-U800 terminal needs to be adjusted to 3 / 7 during a voice call.432 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Samsung SGH-U800 Product Code 100259-02 Product Name Nemo Outdoor Samsung audio cable/adapter package for the following Samsung models: SGH-U800 Configuration  Includes: 1) Audio adapter plug 2. The white (see inside the connector) audio connector is attached to the Line mic adapter and the red audio connector to the red RCA lead.5mm 2X RCA male 4260543 (420045-00) 3) Samsung S20-Pin Multi-Adapter 2.

and the white audio connector to the Line mic adapter. N97. N85. as shown below. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. TERRATEC DMX 6FIRE SOUND CARD WITH NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the TerraTec DMX 6Fire Sound Card and with Nemo Outdoor Multi. 6720 and 6720US terminals. N96. N96US. N97US. .APPE NDI X 6 433 You can also connect the Line mic adapter directly to the TerraTec sound card. after initial connection to a USB port. N85US. In this case the red audio connector is directly connected to the applicable LINE IN connector in the sound card.  Note that with Nokia C5.

  NEMO OUTDOOR VOICE QUALITY – MAYA44 USB SOUND CARD Technical Specifications                4 input channels and 4 output channels with RCA connectors -10dBV input / output level (unbalanced) optical S/PDIF digital output with Miniplug connector headphone output (1/8" connector) with 60mW amplifier ASIO 2. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi. However. it may result from too high CPU usage on the computer. If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used. or more powerful. Next. If you suspect that the reported MOS values are too low and you are using multiple terminals and a scanner simultaneously. Proceed with testing with 1-4 terminals without using the scanner simultaneously for optimal MOS results. try closing the unnecessary ones.00GHz or higher is required Note that it is very important for the laptop to fill the following hardware requirements: the laptop needs to have Core Duo Processor 2.00GHz or higher is required for voice quality measurements. sound cards from other manufacturers can be connected simultaneously to the same laptop with Maya44. First of all. Note that the USB sound card can handle the maximum of four terminals simultaneously Note that only one Maya44 USB sound card can be connected to a computer at a time. XP and Vista compatible with all major DJ software applications compatible with all major professional audio applications compact. disconnect the scanner and try testing with a single terminal to see if the MOS values improve. try the following.0 GHz or AMD PCU. an Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2. place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down. Note! If terminals report lower than expected MOS values in Voice Quality measurements. if you have many applications running on the laptop. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. .0 and CoreAudio support (4 inputs / 4 outputs) MME / WDM support (2 inputs / 2 outputs) standard USB connection to PC compatible with Windows 2000. portable and lightweight design Note that for voice quality measurements with USB sound card Intel® Core Duo processor T2500 2.434 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements. First.

APPE NDI X 6 435 Maya44 sound card components .

power can be switched on in the sound card. The driver installation file is found on the Nemo Outdoor installation CD in Nemo Outdoor\Drivers and Specific Softwares\Maya44 USB driver.exe to start the installation. However. and click OK. 5. The installation wizard may prompt you to remove and reconnect the sound card. Click on Install the driver. Double-click on Setup. Select I accept the agreement in the License Agreement dialog. 6. 8. Windows should automatically detect the Maya44 sound card. 3. Click Exit in the Installation finished dialog. 9. 4. Choose the language of your preference.436 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Installing the Maya44 USB Connectivity Driver  Do not connect the USB connectivity cable to your PC until the driver installation is complete. and click on Install. do as instructed. 2. In such a case. 1. A dialog appears suggesting you connect the Maya sound card to a USB slot in your PC. . 7.

7 and Maya 44 2. The AudioDevice on USB Bus 2. and Universal Serial Bus controllers. Once the drivers have been installed. video and game controllers.7 items should appear under Sound. 11. .8. go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware and click the Device Manager button.8. The driver installation is now finished. respectively.APPE NDI X 6 437 10.

And below the Input and Output settings clarified.exe. The line mic adapter goes to Analog Out. . From the picture below you will see the right configuration. The numbering in Analog Out and Analog in should be the same for each terminal. If the device is not connected. and the White cable to Analog in. go to the installation folder and click on Maya44Panel. If the device is connected. connect your test terminals to Maya sound card. 16. the following dialog appears. 13. Configure the settings as in the image below. 14. the following control panel dialog appears. terminal 1 will take up Analog Out 1 and Analog In 1 connectors. 15.438 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 12. For example. Next. Next.

N96US. and 6720US terminals. N85. Up to 6 test terminals can be connected to Nemo Outdoor Multi with this configuration.APPE NDI X 6 439 17.  Note that with Nokia C5. after initial connection to a USB port. Set the Monitor In 1+2 and 3+4 to mute. N97. N96. . Hence. MAYA44 SOUND CARD WITH TERRATEC DMX SOUND CARD AND NEMO OUTDOOR MMAC3 MULTI Below you can see a graph illustrating the Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality system with the Maya44 and TerraTec DMX 6Fire sound cards. N97US. and the Output slide control all the way up as in the image. and with Nemo Outdoor Multi or Nemo Multi Lite. the terminal will always have the same COM ports. N85US. set the Input settings slide control to between 7 and 8. 6720. 18.

If Nemo Multi Lite hardware is used. The Maya44 sound card can be placed on the middle panel as shown in the image above. place the terminal(s) to holder(s) screen facing down.   . During transportation it can be placed in the pouch at the bottom of the case lid. Particularly in Voice Quality measurements it is important that the terminals should always be connected to the same holder in Nemo Outdoor Multi to ensure reliability in audio measurements. four VQ terminals are connected to TerraTec and two VQ terminals to the Maya44 sound card. Note that a Quad-core computer must be used with voice quality measurements if the number of VQ terminals is more than four. The TerraTec sound card is located at the bottom of the Multi Lite casing. When using Nemo Outdoor Voice Quality with TerraTec and Maya44 sound cards.440 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that with Multi and Voice Quality measurements. it is recommended that you attach a label with a number from 1-6 on each Nokia terminal to denote which holder it should be connected to in Nemo Outdoor Multi.

Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4 or to the second highest level with N95.   Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements.5 seconds have to be different in each sample Mobile-to-Mobile VQ Measurements  Making mobile-to-mobile voice quality measurements: 1. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Test sample requirements:       8kHz sampling rate 16-bit linear PCM signal scaled to 90% of full scale band-pass filtered with corner frequencies at 250Hz and 3500Hz minimum duration of each sample: 2 seconds maximum duration of each sample: o o EVOQ module: 6 seconds TerraTec sound card: 10 seconds Server-side limitations that do not affect mobile-to-mobile testing are:   maximum of nine samples total in server test-sample folder the first 1.APPE NDI X 6 441 MAKING VOICE QUALITY MEASUREMENTS After software installations and hardware setup you are ready to start the measurements. please read the requirements below. You will receive some default test samples along with Nemo Outdoor but if you wish to use your own samples. Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below:  . as it may impair sample flow from the terminal. Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Switch off the alert and warning tones. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 40).

i. C676 LG VX8350. 6121.e. 3. Open the Measurement Properties. Define the voice quality settings for the first mobile. Script dialog for the first mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). . N97. N95 US. N96. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Leadcore LC 8130E Samsung SGH-U800 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2/5 3/7 2. N96 US. C5 LG C680 LG KX206. the mobile that you are calling from. In the Script Editor. 6120.442 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Terminal Nokia 3500. N85. click Add and select Voice Call from the menu. N85 US. N95. N97US Nokia 6720(US).. 4. Click on the Script Editor button to create a new script.

Select the Voice quality option.APPE NDI X 6 443 5. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:     Define the phone number of the second mobile. Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones.. Click OK. i. . Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field.e. the mobile that you are calling.

444 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. 7. 9. Define the voice quality settings for the second mobile. i.. the mobile that you are calling to. double-click on the End a voice call item to define whether end command type is normal or forced.e. 8. Open the Measurement Properties dialog for the second mobile (Measurement | <device> | Measurement Properties). Finally click Close. . Click Save and type a file name for the script. In the Script Editor dialog. Define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter.

click the Properties button next to the Voice Number field.APPE NDI X 6 445 10. . Configuration dialog. In the Measurement Properties.

Define a Prefix for the received files. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field.. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. i. An empty line graph window opens. Select the audio parameters. 13. the mobile that you are receiving calls from. Click OK. The prefix will be added at the beginning of the file name of all received files. Select the same file as for the other mobile.e. In the Voice Call Properties dialog:      Define the phone number of the first mobile. Select the Voice quality option Select Request voice call callback if you want the application to send callback command to Nemo Server using DTMF tones. 12. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. . Select Data | Line Graph | New.446 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 11. and drag them in the graph window. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view.

 Making mobile-to-fixed-to-mobile voice quality measurements: 1. See Appendix 1 for detailed instructions. Remember to check that with the EVOQ audio modules the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set to level 4. Click the Start Recording button. as it may impair sample flow from the terminal.APPE NDI X 6 447 14. Switch off the alert and warning tones. Connect the Nemo audio modules and test mobiles to the Nemo Outdoor measurement system (see page 40). Make a test call and adjust the terminal headset volume. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement.   Note that the mobile must NOT be in silent mode during measurements. Mobile-to-Fixed-to-Mobile VQ Measurements  Please complete the Nemo server installation before continuing. Beeping during a measurement will lower the score. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. .

448 Nemo O ut door User M a nual  Remember to check that with the TerraTec Sound Card the audio (earphone) level of the test mobile is set according to the table below: Terminal Nokia 3500. select Start Voice Call from the Measurement menu or by clicking the Device Commands button. If you are performing measurements manually. N95 US. the voice quality measurement is run. 3. Set the time between calls parameter to one minute. C676 LG VX8350. N95. Define the voice quality settings in the Voice Call Properties dialog:   Select one of the default test samples. N97. With each voice call. N97US Nokia 6720(US). N85. Define the voice quality settings for the mobile. Make sure that the server has the same samples in its reference sample folder (see Nemo Server installation guide for details). 6121. click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement. If you are using scripts. . C5 LG C680 LG KX206. 5. 6120. N85 US. N96 US. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. N96. VX8360 Datang DTM 8120 Huawei C7600 Volume level 8 / 10 10/10 3/8 4/7 8/8 2/5 7/7 2. 4.

APPE NDI X 6 449   Open the Measurement Properties. click Add and select Voice Call from the menu. Click the Script Editor button to create a new script. 6. In the Script Editor. In the Voice Call Properties dialog: . Script dialog for the mobile (Measurement | <device> | Script Properties). 7.

Please make sure that the same reference file exists also on the server. define how many times you would like to repeat the script by editing the Repeat Script parameter. i. Select the Voice Quality option. Click OK.e. ..450 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual    Define the phone number of the fixed end. the server that is answering the calls and sending back the samples. Select one of the default test samples in the Reference sample filename field. 8. In the Script Editor dialog.

11. Each parameter is shown as its own layer in the Layers view. 10. Select the audio parameters. In the Parameters view type audio in the filtering field at the top of the view. Select Data | Line Graph | New. . Finally click Close. Open a line graph for viewing the voice quality data. and drag them in the graph window. An empty line graph window opens.APPE NDI X 6 451 9. Click Save and type a file name for the script.

.452 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 12. Click the Start Recording button. Nemo Outdoor will run through the script and make the voice quality measurements. Click the Start Scripts button to start the measurement.

For other voltages or line frequencies contact Anite for the correct supply.SCA NNE R G UI D E 453 APPENDIX 8 .240VAC 50/60Hz.6 A The estimates given for the scanner assume maximum utilization of the processing capabilities. Actual power requirements will vary depending number of downconverters installed and the receiver tasking. DC operation for the standalone receiver can be achieved by connection to a vehicle 12-volt system. The maximum power requirement of the scanner is 50 Watts. The AC power supply is designed to work with 100 . The standard AC supply is rated at 130 Watts. . Platform configuration/Module Basic system w/ single downconverter Two downconverter system 12 VDC current requirement 3. AC operation for the standalone receiver is achieved by using the optional AC power supply.SCANNER USER GUIDE CONNECTING DEVICES Connecting Nemo FSR1 Scanner Nemo FSR1 scanner is powered by 10 to 16 VDC. The following table is provided to budget the system current requirements for various configurations.0 A 3.

3. Go to Control Panel | Network and Internet | Network and Sharing Center. . RF input RF input GPS connector Status LEDs Ethernet ports Serial port 2. Connect an antenna cable to scanner RF input.454 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Connecting the Nemo FSR1: 1. connect an antenna in both RF inputs (see picture below). If you are measuring with two downconverters. Click on Change adapter settings. Connect Ethernet cable(s) to the scanner Ethernet port(s) and to the Nemo Outdoor laptop.

Click OK and Close. 5. select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) and click Properties. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog. .SCA NNE R G UI D E 455 4. Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties. Select Use the following IP address and type in the IP address of the scanner in the IP address field.

except Anritsu MS2721B DVBH Analyzer. RF2 input only supports WCDMA scanning. the bootloader is running and the module needs to be reloaded Connecting Anritsu Scanners  These instructions apply to all Anritsu scanners. The status LEDs at the front panel display how the scanner is functioning.e. If you are measuring with a dualmode scanner that supports both GSM and WCDMA. Switch power on. EEPROM not readable GPS Locked GPS Unlocked Ethernet link connected Ethernet link disconnected If all four LEDs are amber. . EEPROM not readable Receiver B enabled Receiver B disabled i. use the RF1 input (see picture).e. LED Name RxA RxB Status Active All LEDs LED Color Green Amber Green Amber Green Amber Green Red Amber Description Receiver A enabled Receiver A disabled i. Connect the antenna cable to scanner RF Input. 1. The default address and name settings of the scanner are generally suitable for most users. There is no need to configure these settings when using the Nemo FSR1 scanner with Nemo Outdoor. 8. Connect the power cable to the scanner and to a power source.456 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 6. Fuse Fans Power connector Power switch 7.

SCA NNE R G UI D E 457 2.  The following steps apply to Anritsu ML8720B and ML8720C scanners. 3. Connect the battery cable to the battery and to a power source. If you are measuring with the Anritsu ML8740A or Anritsu ML8740B scanner. Connect the null modem cable to the scanner COM port that can be found below the power switch. The Battery led of the scanner should turn green. . see step 12. 4.

The Power led should light up. If you are measuring with the Anritsu ML8740A or Anritsu ML8740B scanner. Insert the Anritsu installation CD in your PC. 11.458 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 5. Use the arrow keys and the Sel button to select Interface and Behavior. Connect the null modem to one of the PC COM ports 6. change them using the arrow keys and the Sel button (note that the selected item will be underlined as soon as you use the arrow buttons to switch to another line). If not. press the F4 button (Cancel). To exit the dialog and save the modified settings. press the F5 button (OK). .        COM1 Protocol: Direct COM1 Baud Rate: 38400 or 57600 or 115200 COM1 Stop Bit(s): 1 COM1 Data Length: 8 COM1 Parity: None The baud rate 115200 is the fastest option. Check that the settings are as follows. It is needed when starting the device. wait until the scanner has started 8. 7. Turn the power on in the scanner. Press the Menu button in the scanner. Note! Memorize the baud rate. 9. 12. 10. The scanner should now start. To exit the dialog without saving. see the following steps.

Select the Install the software automatically option and click Next. 14. Please wait while the New Hardware Wizard installs the software. 16. 15. When the installation is complete. 17. not this time option and click Next. Select the No. click Continue Anyway. Switch the scanner on. .SCA NNE R G UI D E 459 13. If a warning message appears. The New Hardware Wizard will start automatically. click Finish. The installation will start. Connect the USB cable to the scanner USB port found in the front panel and to the PC.

Expand the Universal Serial Bus controllers item. Exit the dialog by clicking OK.460 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 18. 19. Double-click on Area Scanner. Area Scanner should be on the list. go to Device Manager (Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager). Check that the Device Status field displays This device is working properly. . To check that the installation was successful.

SCA NNE R G UI D E 461 .

4. The installation starts automatically. and the Take ownership of files or other objects policy has to be enabled for this user on this PC. and run the installation from the hard drive. 2.exe to your local drive before installing the driver. This may take a couple of minutes. 1. Click Next>> on the welcome page.462 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Connecting the Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer/Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer scanner  Installing the driver: Please follow the following steps to install the NI-VISA 4. 3. Double-click on the file and unzip the contents to your hard-drive. . 5.0 driver. To install the driver the user must have administrative rights to its PC. Copy the executable file visa400full.

7. . Select the destination folder for the driver and click Next>>. 8. Select I accept the License Agreement(s) in the following page and click Next>>. Click Next>> in the following dialog and wait for the installation to finish. 9. Click Next>> in the Features dialog. and Finish in the Installation Complete dialog. Note that you may need to restart your computer for the installation to take effect.SCA NNE R G UI D E 463 6.

168.0. You need to type in an IP address out of the range 192. select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on Properties.Connect the scanner with your PC through a network cable.255.14. start the scanner by pressing on the green On/Off button. and right-click on Local Area Connection. Insert one end of the network cable in the network cable connector in the scanner. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs. Go to Start | Control Panel | Network Connections. and the other end to the network cable connector in your PC.464 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 10.0. as those addresses are reserved for the scanner. Type in. Select Use the following IP address. for example. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.10. 192. Next. type 255.Next.0. Next.192. 12. 11.0. and select Properties. . 13.11 . you need to make some changes to your PC’s network card properties.0 in the Subnet mask field.168. Press on Shift and then System (8) button on the scanner.168.

Since 192. you can use. Type in the same IP address for both IP and Gateway from those reserved for the scanner (192. 19. 18.168. You can move to different directions on the screen through the grey buttons.168. If you entered 192. Click Next. select Anritsu LAN 2. select System Options | Ethernet Config by using the grey buttons next to the screen. On the menu to the right of the screen. select one of Anritsu LAN 1-4 ports depending on which IP address you entered on the device. See page 513 for more information on how to perform DVB-H measurements. Press Enter and restart the device by clicking twice on the On/Off button.192. Antenna gain and Cable loss fields do not affect the scanner. so they can be left as they are.168.0.SCA NNE R G UI D E 465 14. the Anritsu LAN 4 port will be used here.168. etc. If the Subnet field is not automatically filled when filling the IP and Gateway fields.0. 16. .0.12.0. Here the selected IP address will be 192.255 for it. and select Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H or Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer. Go to Measurement | Add device | Scanner.  Note that the Baud rate. See page 514 for instructions regarding settings for the Spectrum Analyzer.14). Select the Set the IP Address Manually using the following Settings by pressing the top-most grey button immediately under the Esc button.14. 15. 17. start Nemo Outdoor. select Anritsu LAN 1.168.14 was selected earlier.0.In the Scanner Properties dialog that appears.11 .168. Click OK. 255. if you selected 192.255.0.11.255. When the scanner has restarted. for example.

Plug the antenna cable in the FR IN B port in your DRT scanner. 7. and connect it with the scanner. Go to Start | Control Panel | Network Connections on your PC. The unit is powered by connecting the power cable and powered off by disconnecting the power cable. Insert the power cable in the connector marked DC IN. the power cable should be the last one connected and the first one disconnected. 2300/2500MHz or the 3500MHz antenna. 1.  Note that you can only select one of the antennas. When connecting cables to the unit. You must select between the antennas at this point. and connect the other end with the PC. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog. select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) | Properties. Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties. 6. 3.466 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Connecting the DRT Wimax 4301A+ Scanner  Note! The DRT 4301A+ scanner does NOT have an On/OFF switch. . 2. 5. and place the GPS antenna on a visible spot. Connect the scanner’s GPS antenna cable to the scanner’s GPS port. 4. Insert one end of the RJ-45 cable in the DATA jack in the scanner.

DRT WIMAX 2500 or DRT WIMAX 3500 depending on which band you choose to measure at the time.255.0 in the Subnet mask field. . select Use the following IP address.SCA NNE R G UI D E 467 8. and type 192.255. In the General tab. A green light will turn on in the scanner.1 in the IP address field. Go to Measurement | Add New Device | Scanner. 9. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs.5. Now connect the scanner’s power cable. 10. Select DRT WIMAX 2300. Start Nemo Outdoor.168. 11. The scanner is now on. and 255.

. Connect the antenna cable to the scanner RF Input. so they can be left as they are.468 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 12. Connecting the PCTEL LX CDMA/EVDO/GSM/WCDMA Scanner 1. Click OK to exit the dialog. Go to page 537 for more information on conducting WIMAX measurements with the DRT scanner. select DRT LAN in the Port drop-down menu. In the Scanner Properties dialog. Antenna gain and Cable loss fields do not affect the scanner.  Note that the Baud rate. 13. 14.

Connect the scanner power cable to the scanner serial port (Data). When connecting the scanner power cable. 5. Connect the serial cable to one of the COM ports in the PC. 4. Connect the scanner power cable to a cigarette lighter in the car. the scanner is working properly and using baud rate of 115200 . the scanner is working properly and using a baud rate of 38400 If the led blinks orange and black for a while and then turns green. Connect the scanner GPS antenna cable to the scanner GPS input (above RF Input). 3. check the Power led:   If the led is first orange for a while and then turns green. The scanner cable is split into a serial cable connector and a power cable connector.SCA NNE R G UI D E 469 2.

1. 2.0.msi installer file to start the driver installation.470 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  If the led is red.    Right click on the folder and select Properties. In this case connect the GPS to the PCMCIA serial port adapter.0. To install the driver the user must have administrative rights to its PC. the scanner is not working properly.2.46B to your local drive before installing the driver. Double-click on the SeeGull EX VCP Device Driver. Clear the Read-only attributes and click OK.  If there is only one port in the PC by default. and run the installation from the hard drive. Connect the GPS power cable to a cigarette lighter. . and the Take ownership of files or other objects policy has to be enabled for this user on this PC. Switch the power off and on again. 2.   Connecting External GPS to PCTEL LX EVDO/GSM/WCDMA Scanner Note that you cannot use both the integrated and an external GPS receiver at the same time. the device may be overheated. Connect the GPS serial cable to a PC serial port. Connecting PCTEL EX scanners Installing the SeeGull EX VCP Device Driver Please follow the following steps to install the VCP device driver. Copy the folder /SeeGull EX VCP driver_v. Let it cool down for a while.  Note! Memorize the baud rate. If this occurs after usage. this port should be reserved for the scanner. 1. subfolder and files as below and click OK. Select Apply changes to this folder. It is needed when starting the device. 3.

and click Install. . power and GPS connectors in the front panel.SCA NNE R G UI D E 471 4. Select the destination folder for the driver in the Destination Folder window. 5. Click Finish in the InstallationShield Wizard Completed window to exit the wizard. Remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna. and Click Next. 6. 7. Click Next in the SeeGull Welcome window that appears.

Connect the power cable to the Power connector in the front panel. It does not matter which antenna cable goes to which RF connector. . Connect the antenna cables.472 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 8. Connect the other end of the cable to a cigarette lighter socket. 9. The SYS indicator in the front panel will light up.

Connect the GPS antenna to the connector marked GPS.SCA NNE R G UI D E 473 10. . 12. Connect the other end of the USB data cable to your PC. Windows will automatically detect the device. Connect the USB data cable to the USB port in the front panel. 11.

474

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Connecting the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA DualMode Scanner
1. Remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna and GPS connectors in the front panel.

2. Connect the power cable to the Power and Data connector in the front panel. Connect the other end to a USB port on your computer and to a power source. The green Power indicator in the scanner front panel will light up.

SCA NNE R G UI D E

475

3. Connect the antenna cables. Note that the antenna cables and the connectors in the scanner front panel are color coded. The OP042 cable marked with yellow is connected to the RF1 connector marked with yellow (connector on the left). The OP039 cable marked with blue is connected to the RF2 connector marked with purple (connector in the middle).

4. Connect the GPS antenna to the connector marked GPS (connector on the right).

5. Windows will have detected the new device and will install the required drivers. Insert the PCTEL installation CD. 6. Select No, not this time in the Welcome dialog.

476

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

7. Select Install from a list of specific location and click Next.

8. Select Include this option in the search and browse to folder D:\EdgeportUSB\Edgeport Vendor Data\driver vx.x. Click Next to start the installation.

9. When the installation is finished, click Finish. Windows will automatically install some additional drivers and report when the device is ready to be used.

SCA NNE R G UI D E

477

Connecting the PCTEL MX GSM/WCDMA Scanner
Installing the SeeGull MX Device Driver
Please follow the following steps to install the device driver. 1. To install the driver the user must have administrative rights to its PC, and the Take ownership of files or other objects policy has to be enabled for this user on this PC. 2. Browse to folder seegull mx driver\MX winusb driver. For 32-bit operating system run DPInst.exe from “install x86” folder and for 64-bit operating system run DPInst.exe from “install x64” folder. 3. The PCTEL USB Device Installer window will appear. Click Next. 4. If a Windows Security message appears, click Install. 5. Click Finish in the installation completed window. 6. Remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna, power and GPS connectors in the front panel.

478

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

7. Connect the power cable to the PWR connector in the front panel. Connect the other end of the cable to a cigarette lighter socket. The Status indicator in the front panel will light up.

8. Connect the antenna cables. The label on the scanner lists the frequencies of the radio modules connected to each specific port, labeled RF1 to RF8. The antenna ports that require antenna connections are identified by their “frequency” on the label. Since each SeeGull MX is configured to minimize the number of ports necessary for use, some ports may be inactive for a particular configuration and are indicated by a blank box.

SCA NNE R G UI D E

479

9. Connect the GPS antenna to the connector marked GPS. 10. Connect the USB data cable to the USB port in the front panel. Connect the other end of the USB data cable to your PC.

11. Windows Vista and Windows 7 will automatically detect and install the device. 12. With Windows XP a Found new Hardware window will appear. Select No, not this time in the Welcome window. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click Next. Finally click Finish. 13. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager and select Ports. Memorize the port number for the PCTEL Communications Port item, as you will need it later on.

Connecting PCTEL PCT Scanners
 Installing PL2303 Prolific DriverInstaller Driver
1. Run the PL2303_Prolific_DriverInstaller_vx.x.exe (x refers to the version number) file on the installation CD. 2. Click Next in the Welcome window that appears.

480

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

3. Click Finish to finish the driver installation. 4. Next, remove the yellow plastic caps from the antenna and GPS connectors in the front panel of the PCTEL PCT scanner.

5. Connect the antenna cable in the RF Input connector.

6. Connect the data cable to the Data connector. Connect the other end of the USB data cable to your PC.

SCA NNE R G UI D E

481

7. Connect the power cable to the Power connector in the front panel. Connect the other end of the cable to a cigarette lighter socket.

8. Windows automatically detects the new hardware. 9. Go to Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager and select Ports. Memorize the port number for the Prolific USB-to-Serial Comm Port item, as you will need it later on.

482

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML Scanner
 Note that your PC must have a FireWire (IEEE1394) port in it and a 32-bit PC FireWire controller card for you to be able to connect a Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ Scanner

Driver installation:
1. First, install the TSMxDriverInstall.exe file on the installation CD. 2. Click Run to run the installation file.

3. Click Next in the Welcome window that appears.

SCA NNE R G UI D E

483

4. Next, connect the antenna cable to the RF Input connector in the Rohde & Schwarz scanner.

5. Connect the FireWire cable to one of the IEEE ports and the other end to your PC or a FireWire adapter in the PC.

484

Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual

6. Next, connect the power cable to the DC IN connector and the other end to a power source.

7. Windows automatically detects the new hardware. Select No, not this time and click Next in the Welcome window that appears.

Go to Device Manager from Start | Control Panel | System | Hardware | Device Manager. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended). and click Next. Click Finish to finish the installation. 10. . 9. You should see the Rohde & Schwarz TSMx Devices item.SCA NNE R G UI D E 485 8. and the applicable Rohde & Schwarz scanner model under it.

connect the network cable connector to the LAN connector in the scanner. connect antenna cables to the RF1 and RF2 input connectors.486 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Connecting the Rohde & Schwarz TSMW Scanner 1. See chapter System Priority Order with R&S TSMW Scanners on page 488 for information on connecting the antennas to the correct ports. Next. 2. .  Note that the network port in the computer to which the cable is connected should be at least 1 Gbps. First.

0.0 in the Subnet mask field. You need to type in an IP address within the range of 192. select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on Properties. and right-click on Local Area Connection.1 . In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog.0.SCA NNE R G UI D E 487 3. The default IP address for the scanner is 192. Go to Start | Control Panel | Network Connections. so it should be avoided.168. you need to make some changes to your PC’s network card properties.2. and select Properties. or with the applicable cigarette lighter adapter. . and the other end of the cable to a power source. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs. Connect the power cable to the DC IN port in the scanner.255. to a cigarette lighter socket. 4. Next. Next.0.255.Connect the power cable either to a Mascot power supply. type 255.168.168.255. Select Use the following IP address.192.

The CDMA and EVDO systems are counted as one system.2.1 192. for example WCDMA.168. The resource slot number defines in how many processes one RF port is divided. When only one system (except LTE) is measured.168. The second LTE carrier is allocated to RF port #1. etc. In the Local Area Connection Properties dialog that opens. The device is now connected to the computer. for example GSM and WCDMA. Both ports.488 Nemo O ut door User M a nual 5. Next. In the Local Area Connection Status dialog. select Properties. carriers are arranged in order from lowest frequency number to the highest. go to Start | Control Panel | Network and Internet | Network and Sharing Center. it is set to be measured via RF port #1 with 100% of its resources. When three systems are measured simultaneously. individual carriers are allocated to the two RF ports.255. the systems are again allocated in the priority order for the two RF ports. In this case RF port #1 is shared by two systems: GSM and CDMA. whereas WCDMA system is set to be measured via RF port #2 with 100% of its resources. when measuring two or more LTE carriers. In this case priority refers to the order in which systems are allocated to RF port #1 and RF port #2. System Priority Order with R&S TSMW Scanners Multiple cellular technologies (systems) are measured in a parallel manner. . third carrier is again allocated to RF port #1 and the fourth carrier to RF port #2. After that.0. 100% of RF port #2 resources are allocated to WCDMA measurements. so it should be avoided. WCDMA and CDMA. the other system is allocated to RF port #1 and all LTE carriers are allocated to RF port #2. GSM is set to be measured via RF port #1 with 100% of its resources. The different systems are arranged in a priority order as shown in Figure 4. RF #1 and RF #2.0. If the measurement setup includes an odd number of other systems in addition to LTE.0 in the Subnet mask field. However. With LTE.255. The default IP address for the scanner is 192. the first LTE carrier is allocated to RF port #2. Select Local Area Connection in the View your active networks list. In Windows 7.0. type 255. Click on Properties. Select Use the following IP address.255. if the measurement setup includes only one other system in addition to LTE. When two systems are measured simultaneously. GSM has higher priority over WCDMA. Each system gets 50% of the RF port #1 resources. Click OK and Close to exit the dialogs. carriers (frequencies) are allocated to the RF ports so that the first carrier is allocated to RF port #1 and the second carrier to RF port #2. etc. You need to type in an IP address within the range of 192. 6. for example GSM.168. Nemo Outdoor handles priority and allocates the RF ports automatically. and Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) in the This connection uses the following items view. have 100% of available resources. See Starting Devices below for information on how to connect the scanner with Nemo Outdoor. select the Networking tab. For example.

SCA NNE R G UI D E 489 Spectrum scanning is counted as one of the systems. Spectrum scanning always has the highest priority and it is set to be measured via RF port #1. . The resource slot number defines in how many processes one RF port is divided.

From the list select Nemo FSR1 and click Next. Start Nemo Outdoor from the Start menu. Starting Nemo FSR1 Scanner 1. select Nemo Scanner LAN as the Port and click OK. From the Measurement menu.490 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual STARTING DEVICES  Starting Nemo Outdoor: 1. Do not load any previous device configuration if asked. In the Scanner Properties dialog. 4. select Add New Device. 2. . 3. Nemo Tools submenu. Click on Scanner. 2.

Click on Scanner. If the status field displays. A green light should be blinking. 3.SCA NNE R G UI D E 491 5. For Anritsu ML8720C without the GSM option: Anritsu ML8720C UMTS 2100 and click Next. and click Next. If the device is started but not scanning. For Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer: Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H. the start up did not succeed. From the Measurement menu. . 6. For Anritsu ML8740A and Anritsu ML8740B with the GSM option: Anritsu ML8740A/ML8740B GSM/UMTS and click Next. check that you have selected channels to be scanned. Starting Anritsu Scanners 1. check that you are in online mode (click the Work Offline/Online button ). For Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer: Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer. select Add New Device. Device is not started. From the list select:        For Anritsu ML8720B: Anritsu ML8720B UMTS 2100 and click Next. For Anritsu ML8740A and Anritsu ML8740B without the GSM option: Anritsu ML8740A/ ML8740B UMTS 2100 and click Next. 2. For Anritsu ML8720C with the GSM option: Anritsu ML8720C GSM/UMTS and click Next. and click Next. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. Check the cable connections and the settings and try again. If the dialog did not close. open it from the View menu. If the Device Info window is not visible.

6. If the status field displays. Device is not started.492 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4. 5. Anritsu ML8740B.  The next step is not valid for the Anritsu ML8740A. Set the baud rate to the one used by the scanner and click OK.g. or Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer scanner.. Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H. A green light should be blinking. the start up did not succeed. Check the cable connections and the settings and try again. In the Scanner Properties dialog. . If the dialog did not close. check that you are in online mode (click the Work Offline/Online button ). This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. If the Device Info window is not visible. set the COM Port to the port the scanner is connected to (ML8720B/ML8720C)/select the USB port (e. Anritsu USB1)/or select the Anritsu LAN 1-4 with Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H depending on which IP address was selected for the scanner. The dialog will be closed and the scanner should now be connected to the system. open it from the View menu. Note that the baud rate must be the same that you chose when you were connecting the scanner. 7.

2. if you want to make measurements with the 3500MHz (WiMAX) band. set the COM Port to DRT LAN. From the Measurement menu. From the list select:    DRT WIMAX 2300. select Add New Device. Click on Scanner. 4. In the Scanner Properties dialog.APPE NDI X 9 493 Starting DRT Scanners 1. 3. if you want to make measurements with the 2300 MHz (WiMAX) band. DRT WIMAX 2500. DRT WIMAX 3500. if you want to make measurements with the 2500MHz (WiMAX) band. .

Click on GPS.    Note that you cannot use both the integrated and an external GPS receiver at the same time.494 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Note that the no changes need to be made to the Baud rate. 1. A check mark will appear next to the command when it is activated. If scanner does not send any results after 30 seconds. Starting PCTEL Scanners  Starting the GPS: With the PCTEL LX WCDMA scanner you can use either the GSP receiver integrated into the scanner or an external GPS. and Cable loss fields. Click OK. 3. To be able to make Top-N preamble scanning the scanner receiver must acquire a GPS fix at least 30 seconds before starting the Nemo Outdoor application in online mode. In the Device Info window a green light should be blinking. Antenna gain. 6. 2. See the next chapter for further instructions on how to make measurements. . 5. They should be correct by default. From the list. it is advised to open the configuration file in offline mode. select the GPS model that you have connected to the PC and click Next. Set the parameters (see the GPS User Manual for instructions). See page 496 for instructions on how to enable the integrated GPS receiver. From the View menu activate Device Info. select Add New Device. it is advised to send a reset command to the scanner via the user interface. This means that the GPS is working properly. From the Measurement menu. If the existing configuration file includes a PCTEL WiMAX scanner. 4. The GPS Properties dialog is opened. The view will return to the Nemo Outdoor main window. Note that with the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA scanner the Internal GPS receiver should be activated only in UMTS mode.

From the list select:                         For PCTEL LX UMTS 1700/2100 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 1700/2100. select PCTEL EX UMTS 850/1900. and click Next.. and click Next. For PCTEL EX LTE 1800/2600 scanner. For PCTEL LX UMTS 2100 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 2100.APPE NDI X 9 495  Starting the PCTEL LX/EX/PCT GSM/WCDMA/1xEV-DO/LTE Scanner: 1. For PCTEL LX 1xEV-DO 850 scanner: PCTEL LX EVDO 800. For PCTEL LX CDMA/EV-DO 850 scanner. and click Next. Click on Scanner. For PCTEL EX LTE 2100/2600 scanner. PCTEL EX mini series scanners: o o For WCDMA 2100. select PCTEL EX LTE 700ABC. For PCTEL EX 900/1800 WCDMA/TD-SCDMA 2000. and click Next. select PCTEL EX 900/1800 UMTS TDSCDMA 2000. select PCTEL EX LTE 700C. select Add New Device. . and click Next. and click Next. select PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700C.. select CDMA2000 850/1900 EVDO 850/1900. and click Next. For PCTEL PCTEL EX GSM 1900 & WCDMA 2100 AWS scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 1900 UMTS AWS. For PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700BC scanner. For PCTEL LX UMTS 850 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 850. For PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700C scanner. and click Next. For PCTEL EX LTE 700C scanner. and click Next.. and click Next. 3. From the Measurement menu. For WCDMA 850/1900. For PCTEL EX GSM 850/1900 & WCDMA 850/1900 scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 850/1900 UMTS 850/1900. and click Next. For PCTEL EX LTE 2100 scanner. and click Next.. For PCTEL LX 1xEV-DO 450 scanner: PCTEL LX EVDO 450.. and click Next. select PCTEL LX EVDO 800. and click Next. For PCTEL EX WIMAX scanner: PCTEL EX WIMAX. select PCTEL EX LTE 2100/2600. and click Next. and click Next. and click Next. select PCTEL EX LTE 1800/2600. For PCTEL EX LTE 700ABC scanner. and click Next. and click Next. and click Next. and click Next. For PCTEL LX UMTS 1900 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 1900. For PCTEL EX CDMA/EV-DO 850/1900 scanner. For PCTEL EX WCDMA 2100 AWS&GSM 850/ 1900 scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 850/1900 UMTS AWS... For PCTEL LX 1xEV-DO 1900: PCTEL LX EDVO 1900. For PCTEL LX UMTS 850/1900 scanner: PCTEL LX UMTS 850/1900. select PCTEL EX LTE 2100. and click Next. and click Next. and click Next. For PCTEL EX GSM 900/1800 & WCDMA 900/2100 scanner: PCTEL EX GSM 900/1800 UMTS 900/2100. 2. select PCTEL EX UMTS 2100. and click Next. select PCTEL EX LTE AWS/700BC.

Check the cable connections and the settings and try again. 6. . For WCDMA AWS. set the COM Port to the port the scanner is connected to.. After the PCTEL LX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. select the PCTEL USB item. and click Next. and click Next. 8. and click Next. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. For PCTEL PCT GSM 900/1800 scanner. select PCTEL PCT GSM 900/1800. 4. 2.  Enabling integrated GPS receiver for PCTEL LX WCDMA/PCTEL EX WiMAX scanner 1.. In the Scanner Properties dialog.. A green light on the PCTEL scanner in the Device Info window should be blinking. In the Measurement Properties dialog click the Advanced button. See chapter Starting Measurement (page 501) for instructions on making your own scanner configuration. Set the baud rate to the one used by the scanner and click OK. A check mark will appear next to the command when it is activated. 7. select PCTEL PCT UMTS 2100. select PCTEL MX and click Next. The dialog will be closed and the scanner should now be connected to the system. select PCTEL EX UMTS 900/2100. 5.496 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual o o    For WCDMA 900/2100. the start-up did not succeed. and click Next. select PCTEL EX UMTS AWS. From the View menu activate Device Info. With MX scanners. If the dialog did not close.. For PCTEL MX scanners. For PCTEL PCT UMTS 2100 scanner. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.

   Note that you cannot use both the integrated and an external GPS receiver at the same time. . If the existing configuration file includes a PCTEL WiMAX scanner. select Yes for the Enable Integrated GPS Receiver option and click OK.APPE NDI X 9 497 3. it is advised to open the configuration file in offline mode. In the Advanced Properties dialog. it is advised to send a reset command to the scanner via the user interface. 4. To be able to make Top-N preamble scanning the scanner receiver must acquire a GPS fix at least 30 seconds before starting the Nemo Outdoor application in online mode. If scanner does not send any results after 30 seconds. The integrated GPS receiver is now enabled. Note that with the PCTEL LX GSM /WCDMA scanner the Internal GPS receiver should be activated only with UMTS mode.

3.g.. From the View menu activate Device Info. COM 3 and COM 4). . 7. Click on Scanner. From the list select PCTEL LX UMTS 2100 and click Next. 2. Select the COM port with the smaller number and click OK. select Add New Device. Click on Scanner. In the Scanner Properties dialog. A check mark will appear next to the command when it is activated. From the Measurement menu. 5. In the Scanner Properties dialog. Port field you should see two consecutive COM ports (e. select Add New Device. From the list select PCTEL LX GSM 900/1800 and click Next.. 6. COM 3 and COM 4). From the Measurement menu.g. 4. Port field you should see two consecutive COM ports (e.498 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Starting the PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA dual-mode scanner 1. Select the COM port with the bigger number and click OK.

2. Device is ). . This means that the devices are working properly and scanning using the default settings. In the Advanced Properties dialog. 3.   Note that you cannot use both the integrated and an external GPS receiver at the same time. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.   Enabling integrated GPS receiver for PCTEL LX GSM/WCDMA dual-mode scanner Note that with the PCTEL dual-mode scanner the integrated GPS receiver needs to be enabled only for one scanner. After the PCTEL LX scanners are connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. 4. not started. select Yes in the Enable Integrated GPS Receiver option and click OK.APPE NDI X 9 499 8. A green light should be blinking in the Device Info for both devices. 1. check that you are in online mode (click the Work Offline/Online button 9. Note that with the PCTEL LX GSM /WCDMA scanner the Internal GPS receiver should be activated only with UMTS mode. The GSM and UMTS scanners will appear as separate devices and must be configured individually. If the status field displays. The integrated GPS receiver is now enabled. In the Measurement Properties dialog click the Advanced button.

. In the Scanner Properties dialog.500 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Starting Rohde & Schwarz Scanners 1. 2. Start Nemo Outdoor. select R&S IEEE1394A in the Port drop-down menu. From the list select the applicable R&S scanner. select Add New Device.. From the Measurement menu. Click on Scanner. 3. and click Next. 4.

GSM page. Channel style defines the style of the measured channel. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. 2. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. In the Measurement Properties dialog you can select the channels to be scanned: 3. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. For GSM the option is 200 kHz. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. . On the Frequency scanning.  RX Level Average: the data reported is the average RX level. Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. click the Select Channels button to select the GSM channels to be scanned. in dB. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.APPE NDI X 9 501 STARTING MEASUREMENT Nemo FSR1 Scanner GSM+UMTS Scanning 1. of the number of samples.

the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If the values are below the threshold. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. the options are Narrow Band (200kHz) and Wide Band (3. . Channel style refers to the style of the channel. For UMTS scanners.  To set pilot scanning settings: 1. the pilots are not reported. In aggregate method.502 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. In the Measurement Properties dialog. 2. TOP-N Pilot Scanning . The Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode/Scanning. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold.UMTS Unknown Pilot scanning can be used for scanning unknown pilots or the strongest pilots. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result.  Note that some of the options are enabled/disabled in this dialog according to the selected scanner model. go to the Pilot scanning page.84MHz). CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No.

  In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can be decoded from BCCH messages. Cell information decoding. If enabled. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. Cell information decoding is supported only in WCDMA. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. weak pilots may be undetected. The maximum number is 32.APPE NDI X 9 503 Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has been purchased with the scanner. . Mobile Network Code. S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. In high speed mode. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog where you can select channels for pilot scanning.

The table displays the channel numbers. 4. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. . You can add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and clicking the Add button. UMTS page. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz. In the Measurement Properties. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog.504 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  To select channels: 1. You can remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove button. The Select Channels dialog is opened. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. 6. Pilot scanning. the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by five. If you know the frequency but not the channel number. 2. not the frequencies. 7. 3. After making the appropriate settings. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. 8. click the Top-N Configuration button. 5. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds.

If you select GSM channels. 3. you can select either GSM or UMTS channels to be scanned. On the Frequency scanning. click the Select Channels button to select the GSM channels to be scanned. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. Data mode defines the type of measurement data computed from each sample. For GSM the options are 200 kHz and 30 kHz narrow. If you do not select GSM channels. 2. you can select a maximum of one UMTS channel. you can select for scanning both GSM and UMTS channels. you can select one or two UMTS channels. In the Measurement Properties dialog you can select the channels to be scanned:   If the scanner supports only one carrier. . GSM page. If the scanner supports two carriers. Note that the available selection depends on the scanner type. Channel style defines the style of the measured channel.APPE NDI X 9 505 Anritsu Scanners GSM+UMTS Scanning 1.  Note that the scanner reports the 32 strongest channels from the selected GSM channels.

RX Level 90%: the data reported is the 90th percentile RX level. BSIC Threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. in dB. Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window. in dB. in dB. RX Level Standard Deviation: the data reported is the standard of deviation of the number of samples reported as an integer. of the number of samples. of the number of samples. in dB. RX Level Minimum: the data reported is the minimum RX level. in dB. of the number of samples. RX Level Maximum: the data reported is the maximum RX level.506 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual        RX Level Average: the data reported is the average RX level. in dB. of the Number of samples. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. RX Level 10%: the data reported is the 10th percentile RX level. of the number of samples. BCCH C/I option is available with PCTEL and Rohde&Schwarz GSM scanners only. RX Level 50%: the data reported is the 50th percentile RX level. Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. . of the number of samples. 4. Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file.

 Note that some of the options are enabled/disabled in this dialog according to the selected scanner model. In aggregate method. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. 4. In the Measurement Properties dialog. the options are Narrow Band (200kHz) and Wide Band (3. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Number of fingers defines the maximum number of fingers used for RAKE in measurement.84MHz). The Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode/Scanning.APPE NDI X 9 507 TOP-N Pilot Scanning . If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. . Measurement period defines the time in milliseconds for which the scanner measures and then reports the result. For Anritsu scanners. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. For UMTS scanners. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA.UMTS Unknown Pilot scanning can be used for scanning unknown pilots or the strongest pilots. only Wide Band is available.  To set pilot scanning settings: 3. go to the Pilot scanning page. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

If enabled. Set a value (in dB) to decide a valid path from the noise floor (average value).508 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Selective level determines a valid path. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. a drop-down menu will appear from where you can select Top-N Search Configuration. Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. Finger option enables and disables Finger measurements for the scanner. If you press the arrow. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. . The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog where you can select channels for pilot scanning. The Channel number field provides a list of channels that can be selected for scanning. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. Group specifies the group number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 63.  Please note that the Top-N Search Configuration dialog is available for Anritsu UMTS scanners only. Rake threshold determines a valid path (in dB). In the Top-N Search Configuration dialog you can limit the search performed by the scanner and consequently speed up the search.

. not the frequencies. Secondary code specifies the secondary scrambling code. click the Top-N Configuration button. two channels can be selected.APPE NDI X 9 509 Cell specifies the cell number for the primary scrambling code in the range of 0 to 7.  With the Anritsu ML8720B single carrier scanner only one channel can be selected. The table displays the channel numbers. SCH performs a three-step search with P-SCH and S-SCH. If you are measuring with the Anritsu ML8720B-03 dual carrier scanner. Set the Number of Scrambling codes value. This defines how many strongest pilots are to be reported by the scanner. 10. In the Measurement Properties.  To select channels: 9. Channelization code specifies the channelization code. The maximum is 32 pilots. Search method defines how the search is performed. If you know the frequency but not the channel number.  To select pilot parameters: 1. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz. The Select Channels dialog is opened. 2. P-CPICH (primary common pilot channel) searches with P-CPICH. Select the TOP-N Mode option. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by five. Limit range should be set from 0 to 0. UMTS page. Pilot scanning.

12. You can remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove button.  To select search parameters: 1. You can add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and clicking the Add button. . UMTS page.510 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 11. 13. Press down the Top-N Configuration button and select Top-N Search Configuration. Pilot scanning. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. Open the Measurement Properties.

The cell number is the division modulus. . The Top-N Search Configuration dialog opens. The group number is the scrambling code divided by 8. cell 4. Set the Cell search range. SCH means that the P-CPICH are searched using P-SCH and S-SCH. Select the Search Method.   In pilot scanning mode. the RSSI is always measured for each channel.  Note that the P-CPICH method is much slower than the SCH method. SC (scrambling code) 12 = group 1. 12. 5. 4. 10.APPE NDI X 9 511 2. SC (scrambling code) 12 = group 1. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. 8. 7. In pilot scanning mode the P-CPICH Ec/N0 and RSCP are always measured for each scrambling code. P-CPICH means that the P-CPICH are searched without using P-SCH and S-SCH. 9. After making the appropriate settings. Click OK to accept the settings and to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. For example. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. PN threshold defines the limit above which Ec/N0 peaks must go if Aggregated data processing method is used. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. 11. 6. cell 4. 3. The Secondary Code and the Channelization Code ranges should be set from 0 to 0 for scanning only the P-CPICH. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. Set the Group search range. For example. Data processing method defines how the scanner will process samples before reporting.

Anritsu Scanners Pilot Scrambling Code Scanning or Known Scrambling Code Scanning can be used to scan known pilots. Select channels in the Selected channel numbers table by clicking the Select button. For each selected channel. 1.512 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Pilot Scrambling Code Scanning . Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. . Data processing method defines how the scanner will process samples before reporting. select scrambling codes. The Select Scrambling Codes dialog is opened. two channels can be selected. 7. Go to the Measurement Properties. If you are measuring with the Anritsu ML8720B-03 dual carrier scanner. Select a channel and click the Select button below the Selected scrambling codes table. When using an Anritsu scanner in Pilot Scanning mode. 8. 6. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. 4. The Known Scrambling Code Scanning will from now on be referred to as Normal Pilot Mode. 5. Clear the TOP-N mode option and click the Select Channels button. you can define the measurement period.  With the Anritsu ML8720B single carrier scanner only one channel can be selected. 2. It defines the time period from which results are gathered and processed before reporting. Pilot scanning. UMTS page .  In Pilot Scanning Mode the RSSI is always measured for each channel. 3.

9. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. 1. DVB-H page. 10.850 MHz.APPE NDI X 9 513  In Pilot Scanning Mode the P-CPICH Ec/N0 and RSCP are always measured for each scrambling code. Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer scans frequencies between (DVB-H) 474 . A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. DVB-H Scanning DVB-H scanning can be performed with the Anritsu MS2721B DVB-H Analyzer scanner. select a frequency to be measured. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. 11. 2. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. After making the appropriate settings. . Pilot scanning. In the Measurement Properties.

This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. After making the appropriate settings.514 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. 1. In the Measurement Properties dialog. go to the Spectrum scanning page. 2. 4. Spectrum Analyzer Measurements DVB-H scanning can be performed with the Anritsu MS2721B Spectrum Analyzer scanner. . A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. 5. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file.

If you manually define the center frequency and bandwidth. hence slightly decreasing background noise. 6. 3 Hz. . Define a name in the Enter Frequency Set Name field and click OK. 300 kHz. 100 Hz .1GHz. and RBW is adjusted automatically. It is automatically adjusted to the closest value of 1 Hz. When signal volume is lower than -50dBm. selecting the Use preamplifier functionality in the Measurement Properties dialog can increase the scanner’s measuring sensitivity.  With Anritsu MS2721B spectrum analyzer the supported frequency range is from 9 kHz to 7.. it is recommended that it is not selected when signal volume is higher than -50dBm. Define the start and stop frequencies within which the measurement will be performed. Click the arrow in the button and select Save as Predefined Set. 7. 1 MHz.APPE NDI X 9 515 3. 5. If you manually define the start and stop frequencies. 3 MHz. Select your option in the Add to scanning list menu. However. You can add scanning sets in the Predefined scanning sets field through the Add to Scanning List button. you can either select to add the frequencies to the scanning list or save them as a predefined set. 4. or save them as a predefined set.3 MHz. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option and click on Add. Select Set center frequency and bandwidth to define the center frequency and the bandwidth to be measured. RBW is between 1 Hz . Select your option in the Add to scanning list menu. you can either select to add them to the scanning list. 30Hz. 10 Hz. The sample count is fixed to 551..

This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings.516 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 8. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. 10. The name appears in the Predefined scanning sets field along with the chosen frequency and/or bandwidth information selected in the Reporting field. After making the appropriate settings. . click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. 9. 11.

After the scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor.APPE NDI X 9 517 PCTEL Scanners Frequency Scanning – PCTEL GSM/UMTS Scanners Frequency scanning can be used to scan band power. The received signal should be above the noise level in order to find out the center frequency. In the Channel style field. go to the Frequency scanning. In the Measurement Properties dialog. 3. The options are narrow band (200 kHz) and wide band (3. . open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. select the channel width. 1.84 MHz). It is also useful for checking that the band is deselected and for finding out the center frequency. UMTS page.  To find out the center frequency used. The center frequency will stand out in Frequency Scanning mode. set the Channel Style to 200 kHz and select all the channels in the frequency region where the carrier should exist. for example. all channels allocated to an operator. 2.

Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. 10. 11. Click the Select Channels button to open the Select Channels dialog. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by five. Add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and clicking the Add button. The table displays the channel numbers. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz. . 7. 8.518 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. not the frequencies. 9. 6. 5. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. If you know the frequency but not the channel number. Click OK and OK to close the Measurement Properties dialog and to re-start the scanner with the new settings. Remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove button.

define the Channel style. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. . 2. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. By clicking the Advanced button on the General page. On the Frequency scanning page. Here you can enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver.APPE NDI X 9 519 Frequency Scanning – PCTEL EX LTE Scanner 1. This means you will not need an external GPS receiver in order to collect position data. After the scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor.

Alternatively.. you can access the Select Channels dialog. Select one band from the list or all of them. To remove channels from the Selected list.. By clicking the Advanced button. 5. After making the appropriate settings.items from current band. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. If all bands are selected. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. 2. . you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. 4. By clicking the Select Channels button. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. Frequency Scanning – PCT GSM Scanner 1. click the Remove All button. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . Here you can enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver. This means you will not need an external GPS receiver in order to collect position data. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. click the Add All button. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan.. items from every band. After the scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. 6. To remove all channels.520 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. To add channels to the Selected list. 7. click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list.. To select all available channels for scanning.

Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window.APPE NDI X 9 521 3. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. This option is available with PCTEL GSM scanners only. . Go to the Frequency scanning page. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list.. 5. Select one band from the list or all of them. you can access the Select Channels dialog.  Note that Sample size and Data mode are not enabled with PCT GSM frequency scanning . To remove channels from the Selected list. The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. To add channels to the Selected list. Alternatively. If all bands are selected..items from current band. click the Add All button. To remove all channels. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel.. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . To select all available channels for scanning. By clicking the Select Channels button.522 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. click the Remove All button. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. items from every band..

click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. This means you will not need an external GPS receiver in order to collect position data. . Sample size defines the number of samples taken from each channel before a measurement result is written to file. 2. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. 3. For EV-DO scanners. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. After the scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. After making the appropriate settings. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. 7. Frequency Scanning – PCTEL EVDO Scanners 1.APPE NDI X 9 523 6. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. Go to the Frequency scanning page. Here you can enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver. the options are 1250 kHz Normal and 30 kHz Normal. 8. By clicking the Advanced button.

To remove all channels.. Select one band from the list or all of them. click on a number in the Available list and then click the Add button or simply double-click a channel to add it to the Selected list. 6. click on the channel you want to remove and then click the Remove button or double-click the channel. Alternatively.524 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4.items from current band. 7. If all bands are selected. click the Remove All button. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All | . To select all available channels for scanning. 5. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . The Available view provides a list of channels that are available for scanning. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. You can select several channels simultaneously by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking on the channels you want to add or remove. After making the appropriate settings. To add channels to the Selected list. click the Add All button.. 8. . By clicking the Select Channels button. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking.. you can access the Select Channels dialog. To remove channels from the Selected list. An alternative method to select channels is to type the channel numbers in the field at the bottom of the dialog and to click Add. items from every band.. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning.

  In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. Go to the Pilot scanning page. In aggregate method. After the scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. The Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode. the pilots are not reported. weak pilots may be undetected. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher. Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning.UMTS Unknown Pilot scanning can be used for scanning unknown pilots or the strongest pilots.APPE NDI X 9 525 TOP-N Pilot Scanning PCTEL . CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No. 2. . 1. If the values are below the threshold. In high speed mode. Channel style refers to the style of the channel.

     With a PCTEL LX scanner a maximum of 8 channels can be selected in the pilot mode. Note that the PCTEL EX WCDMA scanner only supports the TOP-N mode.526 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. 2. Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling code. The maximum is 32 pilots. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. Remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove button. 3. UMTS page. not the frequencies. click the Top-N Configuration button.  To select pilot parameters: 1. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. With a PCTEL MX scanner 1 channel can be selected in the pilot mode. the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by five. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips. With a PCTEL LTE EX scanner a maximum of 15 channels can be selected in the pilot mode. With a PCTEL EX scanner a maximum of 15 channels can be selected in the pilot mode.  The table displays the channel numbers. With a PCTEL PCT scanner a maximum of 4 channels can be selected in the pilot mode. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. Add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and clicking the Add button. 4. Select the TOP-N Mode option. If you know the frequency but not the channel number. 2. Set the Number of scrambling codes value. If enabled. You can select up to 32 pilots for scanning. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. The Select Channels dialog is opened. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog.  To select channels: 1. Pilot scanning.   Note that with the PCTEL PCT Scanner the maximum number of pilots to be selected for scanning is 8. This defines how many strongest pilots are to be reported by the scanner. . In the Measurement Properties. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz. S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code.

High speed mode makes it possible to acquire more samples (max 32 pilots per channel).       TOP-N Pilot Scanning . Data processing method defines how the scanner will process samples before reporting. PN threshold defines the limit above which Ec/N0 peaks must go if Aggregated data processing method is used. 2. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning.    To select measured values: In Pilot Scanning Mode the RSSI is always measured for each channel. while High dynamic mode offers fewer samples (max 16 pilots per channel) with a larger dynamic range.APPE NDI X 9 527 3. EVDO Unknown Pilot scanning can be used for scanning unknown pilots or the strongest pilots. 2. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog.PCTEL EX/LX. Select the SIR option to enable P-CPICH SIR measurement. In the Measurement Properties. Select the Time of arrival option to enable time of arrival measurement. After the PCTEL LX/EX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. Select the Delay profile option to enable P-CPICH Delay Profile measurement. To improve on the accuracy of radio propagation models. By clicking the Advanced button. 4. . Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. 3. After making the appropriate settings. This means you will not need an external GPS receiver in order to collect position data. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. Select the S-SCH option to enable S-SCH Ec/N0 and RSCP measurement. In TOP-N pilot scanning mode the scrambling code for delay profile measurement cannot be selected. The Unknown Pilot Scan will from now on be referred to as TOP-N Pilot Mode.  To set general parameters: 1. 1. Select the Delay spread option to enable P-CPICH delay spread measurement. 2. In Pilot Scanning Mode the P-CPICH Ec/N0 and RSCP are always measured for each scrambling code. Pilot scanning page: Select the P-SCH option to enable P-SCH Ec/N0 and RSCP measurement. Here you can enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver. 1.

value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. 1:2. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. Pilot window mode defines the position of the chips that are searched for pilot across in regard to the ideal pilot position (0 chip delay for a given pilot). go to Pilot scanning page. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode.528 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. If the values are below the threshold. In the Measurement Properties dialog. If enabled. with ratio 1:4 every 4th sample is logged. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. and with ratio 1:8 every 8th sample is logged. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. . The available options are 1:1. 1:4 and 1:8. In aggregate method. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. the pilots are not scanned. with ratio 1:2 every second sample is logged.

This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. 5. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking.PCTEL EX Spectrum scanning is enabled on PCTEL EX scanners only in online mode. In the Measurement Properties dialog. After the PCTEL EX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. 2. Spectrum Scanning . the device needs to be added to Nemo Outdoor in online mode to activate the Spectrum scanning functionality 1. 4. Delay is defined as the measured difference between the expected arrival time (GPS time) and the actual arrival time of the maximum peak above the PN threshold. It is reported in chips. go to the Spectrum scanning page. . 6. After making the appropriate settings. Hence. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.APPE NDI X 9 529 Delay option enables/disables delay profile scanning.

The Predefined scanning sets can be used to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned. 5. and click Add. and click on Add to Scanning List. Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Stop frequency set by the user is only requested value but it is not necessarily used during the measurement. The maximum number of samples (points) is 2560. The Sample count field determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range. Select the Enable spectrum scanning option. . stop frequency is calculated based on start frequency and number of points. define the scanning frequencies in the Reporting view. Stop frequency = start frequency + (frequency spacing) * (number of points – 1). Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. Select a set from the list. To create new scanning sets. Frequency spacing is between the center frequencies and spacing between points is half of the resolution bandwidth. or saved as a predefined set also for later use.530 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. 6. the internal frequency range is defined with start frequency. As seen in the formula above. 4. resolution bandwidth (RBW) and number of points. The Add to Scanning List menu enables you to decide whether the new scanning set is added to the scanning list. All the points need to be within the frequency range of the requested RF Band. With PCTEL EX scanning receivers.

Nemo Outdoor does not read the supported frequency range from the scanning receiver. However.APPE NDI X 9 531 If the requested frequency range is not supported by the device. in the picture below the user has set start and stop frequencies as seen within the red area. and only frequency ranges supported by the scanning receiver are used to make spectrum analyzer measurements. Nemo Outdoor automatically adjusts the frequency range for the device. Click OK to return to the Spectrum scanning page. . For example. 7. The number of samples is used only for the frequency range supported by the scanning receiver. The number of samples is used only for green areas and the correct RBW is selected accordingly. the scanning receiver supports only frequency ranges shown by the green areas.

click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. After making the appropriate settings. 11. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. 9. By clicking the Advanced button. 2. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. LTE OFDM Scanning – PCTEL EX LTE OFDM scanning can be used for scanning Reference signal / Sync signals with a PCTEL LTE scanner and Nemo Outdoor. To remove items from the scanning list. 10. and select Remove All | Remove Selected Items. Alternatively. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. 1. . 12. click on Remove All to remove every item from the list.532 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 8. This means you will not need an external GPS receiver in order to collect position data. After the PCTEL LTE scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. select one or more. you will access the Advanced Properties dialog. The added frequency ranges will be added to the Scanning list. Here you can enable and disable the integrated GPS receiver. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file.

scanner will report results from N best cells. 1:2. The available options are 1:1. If enabled. With Autodetect selected. In aggregate method. Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. Sampling ratio option is available for PCTEL EX scanners only. with ratio 1:2 every second th th sample is logged. In the Measurement Properties dialog. and with ratio 1:8 every 8 sample is logged. .APPE NDI X 9 533 3. the scanner will automatically detect the appropriate signal type. RSSI threshold determines a valid path (in dB). 1:4 and 1:8. With ratio 1:1 all samples (Pilotscan events) are logged. Carrier refers to either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type. but the scanning accuracy will be diminished. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA. go to the Pilot scanning page. Subtracting the set value from a path with a maximum correlation value gives the lower limit of the valid path. with ratio 1:4 every 4 sample is logged. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. Number of cells field indicates the number of best cells you want the scanning to notify you of. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. Up to 16 sectors are reported with specific cell ID. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning. Cyclic prefix defines the type of signal the scanner is set to measure. CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated. By decreasing the sampling ratio you can decrease the output file size.

. Tf = 307200 Ts = 10 ms One half -frame. 153600 Ts = 5 ms One s lot. “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions. 30720 Ts D wPTS 30720 Ts Subframe #2 Subframe #3 Subframe #4 Subframe #5 Subframe #7 Subframe #8 Subframe #9 GP UpPT S D wPTS GP UpPT S . i. When you select LTE channels. select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the settings. Each radio frame of length Tf  307200  Ts  10 ms consists of two half-frames of length 153600 Ts  5 ms each. Tslo t=15360 Ts Subframe #0 One subframe . Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels where you can select channels for pilot scanning. Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD. GP and UpPTS.  Note that the available options are device specific. primary and secondary signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set. Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 30720 Ts  1 ms . Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the interference and noise from the same reference signal set. The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below where. In the LTE Channel Specific Settings dialog.e. The maximum number of channels that can be selected is device specific. One radio frame . “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS.534 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Time offset refers to the number of samples between P-SCH Primary Synchronization Signal arrival time with respect to receiver frequency reference that is derived from GPS reference time. for each subframe in a radio frame. Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure. you can also define some channel-specific settings. 4.

6. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. After making the appropriate settings. . 7.APPE NDI X 9 535 Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity): Uplink-downlink configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D 5. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning.

3. Clear the TOP-N mode option and click the Select Channels button. Select channels in the Selected channel numbers table by clicking the Select button. PN threshold defines the limit above which Ec/N0 peaks must go if Aggregated data processing method is used.  With a PCTEL scanner a maximum of 8 channels can be selected in the pilot mode. 7. 2. For each selected channel. The Select Scrambling Codes dialog is opened. go to the Pilot scanning page.PCTEL LX Known Scrambling Code Scanning can be used to scan known pilots. 6. 4. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. Data processing method defines how the scanner will process samples before reporting.536 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Pilot Scrambling Code Scanning . . 1. select scrambling codes. Select a channel and click the Select button below the Selected scrambling codes table. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. After the PCTEL LX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. The Known Scrambling Code Scanning will from now on be referred to as Normal Pilot Mode. 5. In the Measurement Properties dialog.  In Pilot Scanning Mode the RSSI is always measured for each channel. 8.

go to the Frequency scanning page. In the Measurement Properties dialog. After making the appropriate settings. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. You can enable or disable the integrated GPS receiver through the Advanced button. . After the DRT WIMAX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. 1. 10. 9. 3. It is also possible to use an external GPS device with the scanner. DRT Scanners Frequency Scanning Frequency scanning can be used to scan band power. 2. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file.APPE NDI X 9 537  In Pilot Scanning Mode the P-CPICH Ec/N0 and RSCP are always measured for each scrambling code. 11. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. It is also useful for checking that the band is deselected and for finding out the center frequency.

Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. 6. select the channel width. Select and add them in the Selected view by clicking on Add>>. 5. Add frequencies in the Selected list by selecting a frequency from the Available list and clicking the Add button. .538 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 4. 7. Remove frequencies from the Selected list by selecting a frequency and clicking the Remove button. 8. 11. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. In the Channel Style list box. 12. The options are Wide Band (5000 kHz) and Wide Band 2 (10000 kHz). 10. The table displays the available frequencies. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. Click the Select Frequencies button to open the Select Frequencies dialog. 9. After making the appropriate settings. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings.

The values range from 0 to 1023+32. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. After the DRT WIMAX scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. Number of preambles field defines how many preambles are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode.APPE NDI X 9 539 Pilot Scanning 1.285 nanoseconds. It is based on the requested reuse factor. Preamble delay refers to the number of samples between expected arrival time and actual arrival time of preamble with respect to GPS time reference. CINR refers to the Carrier to Interference and Noise ratio value. In aggregate method. 2. Top-N option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning.g. scanner will report results from N best preambles. -16. Each sample corresponds to 89. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. go to the Pilot scanning page. in dB *100 (e. In the Measurement Properties dialog. .. If enabled.34). Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated.

only the contribution of the desired segment is considered. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Frequencies dialog where you can select frequencies for scanning. 3. whereas the Reuse Factor 3 category of measurements will provide the signal quality of preambles within the same segment. In a Reuse Factor 1 measurement. The maximum number of frequencies that can be selected is device specific. As a broad guideline. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. contributions from all the three segments are considered in the measured parameters. The allocation of frequency sub-carrier into these three segments is done in such a way that e. and the CINRs are calculated only from the same segment.540 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Reuse factor refers to a system design parameter that can be manipulated to achieve the desired balance between the interference and the network coverage. measurements performed with Reuse Factor 1 will provide the signal quality of the all the detected preambles relative to each other. so that the CINRs are calculated from all the three segments. The WiMAX air interface modulating waveform has been divided into three segments (Segment 0. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. . When Reuse Factor 3 is selected.g. 1 and 2). a downlink signal on segment 0 will not interfere with the downlink signal on segment 1.

Frequency Scanning . Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file.Rohde & Schwarz Scanner. GSM 1. TSML and TSMW scanners you can perform GSM frequency scanning. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. any combination of the measurements or all of them simultaneously. UMTS TOP-N Pilot scanning. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. 5. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. and Spectrum scanning. In addition. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. After the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. It is possible to perform any of the measurements introduced below separately. EVDO TOP-N Pilot scanning. After making the appropriate settings. Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ/TSML/TSMW Scanner With Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ. GSM/UMTS scanning. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. CDMA TOP-N Pilot scanning. . 6. it is possible to perform CW scanning measurements with the TSMQ and TSML scanners and LTE measurements with the TSMW scanner.APPE NDI X 9 541 4.

Remove channels from the Selected list by selecting a channel and clicking the Remove button. You can also select one band at a time and add the bands you want to scan. BSIC threshold defines the minimum BSIC level that the scanner reports. Cell information decoding.. if only one band is selected you can remove only items from the current band through Remove All |. If you know the frequency but not the channel number. Mobile Country Code and Cell ID information can be decoded from BCCH messages. Select the BCCH C/I option to activate C/I measurements for the BCCH channel. If all bands are selected. not the frequencies. Note that this is only enabled in online mode and if the option has been purchased with the scanner. Click the Select Channels button to open the Select Channels dialog. items from every band. 5. L3 messages are written in the log file. 3. you have the possibility to select Remove All | . The table displays the channel numbers. This option is available with the PCTEL GSM scanner only. 4..542 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Selecting the BSIC decoding option displays BSIC value in a measurement window.. . 2. When the System information decoding option is selected. Alternatively.items from current band. Mobile Network Code. The channel spacing is always 200 kHz. Select one band from the Band list or all of them. the channel number can be calculated by multiplying the frequency in MHz by five..

Go to the Pilot scanning. TOP-N Pilot Scanning .Rohde & Schwarz Scanners. Click OK to return to the Measurement Properties dialog. UMTS 1. 2. 7. After making the appropriate settings. .APPE NDI X 9 543 6. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. UMTS page to define UMTS-specific Pilot scanning settings. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. the pilots are not reported. Channel style refers to the style of the channel. CPICH Ec/No threshold defines the minimum level for the CPICH Ec/No. Add channels to the Selected list by selecting a channel from the Available list and clicking the Add button. 10. 9. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. If the values are below the threshold. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. 8. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning.

S-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the S-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. In addition. value -30 dB is returned for WCDMA.80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. L3 messages are written in the log file. SSCH. scanner will report results from N best scrambling codes. weak pilots may be undetected. P-SCH defines if the selected scanner will measure the P-SCH Ec/N0 value for each scrambling code. In high speed mode. Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by scanner in Top-N mode. When the Missing neighbor detection option is selected. SIR (signal to interference ratio) defines if the selected scanner will measure the SIR value for each scrambling code. 3. You can view the missing neighbor information. in a grid view. and P-SCH. Delay spread and SIR are supported of the scanning options. Pilot measurement mode defines the measurement mode for pilot scanning. When the Neighbor list decoding option is selected.   In High speed mode scanning speed is higher but sensitivity is lower. . Time of arrival. After making the appropriate settings.  Note that the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ. Data processing method and CPICH Ec/N0 threshold are supported general settings. Delay profile option enables/disables delay profile scanning. for example. the NLIST (neighbor list) event is written in the log file for both GSM and WCDMA. Time of arrival defines if the selected scanner will measure the time of arrival for each scrambling code. Delay spread defines if the selected scanner will also measure the delay spread value (in chips) for each scanned scrambling code. If enabled. TSML-W. If there are no peaks above the PN threshold. When the System information decoding option is selected. the sum of all peak pilot Ec/Io values above the PN threshold is calculated.544 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Data processing method defines how the scanned data is processed by the scanner. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. Delay spread is determined as the difference between the last and first component to break the threshold set in PN Threshold. the missing neighbor information event (NMISS) is written in the log file. In aggregate method. The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (p. In High dynamic mode scanning speed is lower but sensitivity is higher. Top-N option enables/disables Top-N scrambling code scanning.  Note that with UMTS the maximum number of channels that can be scanned is 32 channels. TSML-GW and TSMW scanners support only TOP-N mode and High speed and High dynamic pilot measurement modes. The Channel number field provides a list of channels that can be selected for scanning. The time of arrival value is relative to GPS time and is measured in chips. and the maximum number of pilots per each channel is 32.

Number of pilots field defines how many pilots are reported by the scanner in TOP-N mode. 5. enables the scanner to decode PCH messages. CDMA page. 2. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. After the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. the pilots are not scanned. CDMA/EVDO  Note that the EVDO measurements can only be performed in a proper way when a CDMA 2000 channel is measured as well. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. Pilot Ec/I0 threshold defines the threshold level for the pilot Ec/I0.APPE NDI X 9 545 4. Overhead message decoding. TOP-N mode option enables/disables TOP-N scrambling code scanning.Rohde & Schwarz Scanner. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. the time relationship between the different PN offsets is resolved. If the values are below the threshold. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. 1. . In this way. when selected. TOP-N Pilot Scanning . go to the Pilot Scanning. In the Measurement Properties dialog.

546 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (p. Sync signal refers to the ratio between the synchronization channel. 2. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. primary and secondary signal received power and the interference and noise from the same synchronization signal set. 3. Go to the Pilot scanning. After making the appropriate settings. CINR option activates/deactivates Carrier to Interference and Noise Ratio measuring. Carrier refers to either reference signal power or sync signal power depending on the selected signal type. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning.. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file.e. LTE 1. i. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. 5. TOP-N Pilot Scanning .80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. . LTE page to define LTE-specific pilot scanning settings. 4. Open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties.  Note that the Rohde & Schwarz TSMQ scanner supports max 32 channels.Rohde & Schwarz TSMW.

GP and UpPTS. T slot=15360 Ts Subframe #0 One subframe . you can also define some channel-specific settings. select the channel from the Selected channels list and define the settings. One radio frame . “U” denotes the subframe is reserved for uplink transmissions and “S” denotes a special subframe with the three fields DwPTS. “D” denotes the subframe is reserved for downlink transmissions. When you select LTE channels. 153600 Ts = 5 ms One slot. The supported uplink-downlink configurations are listed in the table below where.APPE NDI X 9 547 Reference signal refers to the ratio between the reference signal received power (RSRP) and the interference and noise from the same reference signal set.  Note that the available options are device specific. 30720 Ts DwPTS 30720T s Subframe #2 Subframe #3 Subframe #4 Subframe #5 Subframe #7 Subframe #8 Subframe #9 GP UpPT S D wPTS GP UpPT S . for each subframe in a radio frame. Each radio frame of length Tf  307200  Ts  10 ms consists of two half-frames of length 153600 Ts  5 ms each. Uplink-downlink configuration refers to LTE TDD frame structure. In the LTE Channel Specific Settings dialog. Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 30720 Ts  1 ms . The Top-N Configuration button will open the Select Channels dialog (p. Frame structure type 2 is applicable to TDD.80) where you can select channels for pilot scanning. T f = 307200 T s = 10 ms One half -frame.

After making the appropriate settings. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning.548 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual Frame structure type 2 (for 5 ms switch-point periodicity): Uplink-downlink configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Downlink-to-Uplink Switch-point periodicity 5 ms 5 ms 5 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 5 ms 0 D D D D D D D 1 S S S S S S S 2 U U U U U U U Subframe number 3 4 5 6 7 U U D S U U D D S U D D D S U U U D D D U D D D D D D D D D U U D S U 8 U U D D D D U 9 U D D D D D D 3.Rohde & Schwarz Scanners 1. open the Measurement Properties dialog by selecting Measurement | <device> | General Properties. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. Spectrum Scanning . A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. After the Rohde & Schwarz scanner is connected and activated in Nemo Outdoor. 4. 5. . In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings.

. In the Measurement Properties dialog. go to the Spectrum scanning page.APPE NDI X 9 549 2.

The Sample count field determines the sample count measured for the given frequency range. If the sample count is set to 20. the user can set the start and stop frequency between 80MHz and 3000MHz.8kHz. With Rohde & Schwarz scanner receivers. Sample counts are divided to the frequency range defined by the user. power (RMS) is measured from a 1 MHz bandwidth. 4. Set center frequency and bandwidth defines the frequency range that will be scanned. define the scanning frequencies in the Reporting view. limit to 5000 samples. which sets the number of sample count max.1 sec.8 KHz ~ 78 samples are taken from each 1 MHz bandwidth. and the stop frequency is 100 MHz. In the Measurement Properties dialog. In case the selected frequency range and sample count require a frequency shift lower than 12. The sweep speed is 1 GHz / 0. the sample count is automatically decreased. It should be noted that the frequency shift cannot be lower than 12. if the start frequency is 80 MHz. The sweep speed.550 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual 3. . With the frequency shift of 12. the resolution bandwidth is fixed at 30 kHz. or saved as a predefined set also for later use. For example. the total measured bandwidth is 20 MHz. Click Add. resolution bandwidth and sampling rate are fixed. select the Enable spectrum scanning option. The Add to scanning list menu enables you to decide whether the newly created scanning set is added to the scanning list.8kHz.8 KHz. The TSMx device has a native frequency resolution of 12. To create new scanning sets. Set start and stop frequencies defines the frequency range that will be scanned.

8. The added frequency ranges will be added to the Scanning list. Click the Start Recording button to start recording the results in an output file. Click OK to access the Scanning list view. click OK and OK again and go to online mode to start the scanning. but the scanner did not find strong enough a CPICH in a short time period. and select Remove all | Remove selected items. 10. Alternatively. After making the appropriate settings. If a Scanner GPS locking failed error message appears in the Output window. and click on Add to scanning list.APPE NDI X 9 551 The Predefined scanning sets can be used to quickly select the frequency range to be scanned. select one or more. 6. This means that the device is working properly and scanning using the default settings. the scanner is working properly. . the scanner is working properly. The measurement will go on normally. Select a set from the list. but the scanner accuracy is not as good as it is when the scanner GPS has a fix. but the scanner GPS has no fix or is not connected. A green light on the scanner Device Info window should start blinking. Nevertheless. 7. 9. TROUBLESHOOTING If a Scanner synchronization failed error message appears in the Output window. To remove items from the scanning list. In TOP-N Mode this may take a few seconds. 5. the measurement will go on normally. click on Remove all to remove every item from the list.

Antivirus Filtering Disable the antivirus application and Windows firewall. 2. Go to Network Settings and choose the appropriate connection assigned for the device. It is recommended that the UAC settings are changed to “Never notify”. it might cause issues with data testing. .TROUBLESHOOTING DATA TRANSFER ISSUES PS CONNECTION WORKS BUT NO DATA UAC Settings If UAC (User Account Control) is set to always notify. Activate PS connection (activate PDP context). This can be done via User Account Control Settings. If the data transfer still does not work properly.552 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual APPENDIX 9 . it is highly recommended that Nemo Outdoor is started with administration rights by right-clicking the Nemo Outdoor icon and by selecting “Run as administrator”. please do the following: 1. A PS connection can be established but data transfers cannot be made. If UAC settings cannot be changed.

the issue can most likely be seen by observing link adaptation parameters.APPE NDI X 9 553 3. observe physical resource block allocation (PRB) and signal to noise ratio (SNR). When operating in the dynamic range of link adaptation. Command prompt FTP throughput. renamed. Values less than maximum may indicate other users in the cell. This comparison is recommended because command prompt FTP does not use any multithreading or other non-standard methods. Higher values indicate that the radio link is about to drop. In LTE networks. Requested throughput much higher than the actual measured throughput may indicate that there are other users sharing the radio resources of the cell or some other bottleneck in the network that prevents the mobile from getting the maximum achievable throughput. For example. average BLER (PDSCH BLER) should be higher than 0. Observe the MAC downlink/uplink residual BLER (%) values. in order to achieve the gain of HARQ retransmission scheme Residual BLER after all HARQ retransmissions should be 0%. low average CQI and high MAC-HS 3rd retransmission rate indicate an area of bad coverage or high interference. Also try different servers. read this document for troubleshooting throughput problems with various TCP based protocols. The file may hav e been mov ed. The link ed image cannot be display ed. Verify that the link points to the correct file and location. Try another FTP server for comparison. PRB affects throughput directly. For better results. Some HSPA USB interfaces may also install their own software which may affect to window size settings in registry. Other things that could help troubleshooting:    Disable any firewall and/or antivirus software that could reduce the throughput. keep Nemo Outdoor at the background measuring the mobile network while making the transfers. a bottleneck in the transmission network or not enough data to be sent (application does not need all the available bandwidth). In case low throughput values are monitored with Nemo Outdoor and also with third party applications. server or transmission problems. . or deleted. Low HS-SCCH usage rate (= high HSDPA DTX percentage ratio) points to capacity. Go to Connection Properties and check that antivirus NDIS filtering is unchecked. High PUSCH TX power values indicate a lack of uplink coverage. Low Data Throughputs In case lower data throughputs are received with Nemo Outdoor compared to third party applications. typically 10-20%.

pcap file and look at the (non FTP-DATA) TCP traffic in the middle of the transfer. Look at the Tcp tree. Make the same test again but this time make a connection using Nemo Outdoor. Window shows the current value. Double click the frame to get detailed frame info. Works also manually. only the trace port should be defined. For Nemo Outdoor 5. When configuring a device with Nemo Outdoor. script is always needed. The modem port and dial-up connection must be left blank.  . a script file with data connection commands can be used. not Attach/detach or PDP context activation or deactivation commands. As ports are left blank it is not possible to perform a manual PDP context activation or data transfer via Nemo Outdoor.554 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual    For Nemo Outdoor 5. Does not work manually. Script files should include only data transfer commands. Using Nemo Outdoor: 1.70 and later versions: Use the multithread feature of the FTP protocol to test simultaneous transfers. All Windows Versions  How to check the TCP window size from packet logs: Using Wireshark: 1. Start a data transfer and observe the application data throughput value. However. Check the . Window size value tells the current TCP window size used.  2. Look at the TCP traffic in the middle of an FTP transfer with PayloadLen=0: 3. Make a comparison test between Nemo Outdoor and the connection manager used with the device.60 and older versions: Run a script with simultaneous FTP transfers to see if the throughput increases. Open a packet grid window in Nemo Outdoor.

Look for the GetWindowSizeFromRegistry() function.  How to check TCP auto-tuning state: 1.  . Windows XP Check registry value of HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\System\CurrentControlSet\Services\TcpipParameters\TcpWindowSize. In most cases. Outdoor reads it and adjusts the manual window size based on this value. Window size not set. This registry entry can be removed. = Windows Vista/7 is using auto-tuning TCP window. However. Windows Vista/Windows7 Windows Vista/7 does not use static window sizes from the registry. the registry has been edited by a third party software or a USB mobile interface driver/software. etc. help desk.): 1.   If the TCP auto-tuning is disabled Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size 256 KB.  TCP Window size set to n = Value found from registry. 2.APPE NDI X 9 555 Using debug logs (for developers. If the registry value is missing. Nemo Outdoor will use its default window size which is 256 KB. They rely on dynamic window size which is handled by TCP auto tuning feature. The value can be changed manually or by using TcpOptimizer software. TCP Window size set to default: n = Value not found from registry. Packet log and/or debug log is always needed. Outdoor 5. TCP Auto-Tuning detected. if the same registry value that XP uses is set. Set to default. A measurement file (. Windows and Nemo Outdoor both use it if it exists.nmf) does not save window size info. Type ”netsh interface tcp show global”  3. Receive Window Auto-Tuning Level shows the current state. Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field.40 and newer checks the auto-tuning state and does not change any window sizes if auto-tuning is enabled.

Open command prompt by typing “CMD” to ”Search programs and files” field. This limits the TCP window size to 64KB. restricted: Recommended. However. To disable auto-tuning type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=disabled”. Somewhat restricted growth of the TCP receive window beyond its default value. Windows XP fix KB943198 (http://support. highlyrestricted: Recommended.556 Nemo O ut door Us er M a nual  Please note that administrator rights are required to change auto-tuning settings. 8. it can degrade performance in common scenarios. Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate most conditions. Right-click and select Run as administrator. Limits to 64 KB (65535). 4. type “netsh interface tcp set global autotuning=highlyrestricted”. It enables receive window values of over 16 MB. .com/kb/943198) is needed when using HSDPA category 6 or higher data transfer speeds with Nokia test terminals.  5. normal: Default value. To increase the maximum TCP window size that auto-tuning uses.microsoft. very conservatively. Below are all the values of auto-tuning level with explanations:      disabled: Uses a fixed value for the TCP receive window. only intended for research purposes). Outdoor sets its own default 256KB when auto-tuning is disabled. 7. experimental: Allows the receive window to grow to accommodate extreme scenarios (not recommended. Allows the receive window to grow beyond its default value.  6.

Limitations on Modifications. emulation. This EULA grants you the following rights: Software. Nothing in this license statement permits you to derive the source or assembly code of files provided to you in executable or object formats. and any "online" or electronic documentation. A license for the Software Product may not be shared or used concurrently on different computers. Adaptations and Other Changes. You may not modify. the associated media. not sold. By installing. identified above ("Software Product" or "Software"). you must acquire and dedicate a license for the Software Product for each Designated Hardware on which the Software Product is used or to which it is distributed. copying or otherwise using the Software Product. SOFTWARE PRODUCT LICENSE The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties. You also agree that you shall not have more than one copy of the Software Product in use at a time for any Designated Hardware in which the Software Product is to be used or to be distributed except as expressly provided for in this EULA. The Software Product is licensed. DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS. Separation of Components.READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement ("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single entity) and Anite Finland Ltd for the Anite Finland Ltd software product(s). However. You agree that the Software product is licensed to you to be used with the mobile phone(s) and software protection key designated by Anite Finland Ltd for such use ("Designated Hardware"). Decompilation and Disassembly. You may also store or install a copy of the Software Product in binary code form only over an internal network.APPE NDI X 10 557 APPENDIX 10 END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT . The Software Product includes computer software. adapt or otherwise make any changes to the Software Product except and only to the extent you are expressly permitted to do so under the applicable mandatory law notwithstanding this limitation or by Anite Finland Ltd's prior written consent. and distribute the Software Product to your other computers over an internal network. If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA. . You may use one copy of the Software Product in binary code form only on one computer at a time in order to conduct system measurements using the Designated Hardware at various locations to the extent necessary for the permitted operation of the application software but may not duplicate the Software Product. The Software Product is licensed as a single product. Storage/Network/Single Use. In such event. in whatever form. Anite Finland Ltd is unwilling to license the Software Product to you. you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA. or reverse engineering of all or any part of this product or its protection constitutes an unauthorized modification to the product and is specifically prohibited. you may not use or copy the Software Product. and you should promptly return the unused product(s) in their original packaging to the place of purchase within thirty days of the date of original purchase. GRANT OF LICENSE. any printed materials. as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. Removal. 2. 1. Its component parts may not be separated for use on more than one Designated Hardware and computer as designated above. Limitations on Reverse Engineering.

4. Rental. Duration and Termination. see libresample-license. including but not limited to any such notices contained in the physical and/or electronic media or documentation. audio. The Software Product is protected by copyright laws and international treaty provisions. http://www. please refer to http://www. photographs. -Ing.txt. Erlangen.opticom. and other patents and is provided under license from OPTICOM Dipl. Portions based on WinWAP technology. http://www. Anite Finland Ltd may use such information for its business purpose. You may not remove. printed materials. The Board of Trustees of the University of Illinois All Rights Reserved. For detailed license information. COPYRIGHT AND TRADEMARKS. and any copies of the Software Product. gpl-license. Anite Finland Ltd may provide you with support services related to the Software Product ("Support Services"). All title and copyrights in and to the Software Product (including but not limited to any images. in any of the runtime resources and/or in any web-presence or web-enabled notices. .pesq. Anite Finland Ltd may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this EULA. You may not copy the printed materials accompanying the Software Product. lease or lend the Software Product to any person or entity. M. music. Germany. This EULA is effective from the day you open the sealed media package or download and continues until termination. video.de. Software Transfer. For further information. incorporated into the Software Product). You may terminate this EULA at any time. In either event. SUPPORT SERVICES.winwap. including for product updates and development. are owned by Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers. the accompanying printed materials. You may not rent. 3. Keyhl GmbH. Without prejudice to any other rights.txt and lgpl-license. This Software Product is “Not for Resale" or "NFR" and your license only permits personal use and you may not sell or otherwise transfer the Software Product for value except as specified below.txt located in the Nemo Outdoor installation directory. Copyright Slob-Trot Software Oy Ab 2004. updates and component parts and verify to Anite Finland Ltd in writing that such has been done. Iperf copyright Copyright (c) 1999-2006. 2004. in the Anite Finland Ltd Setup Wizard dialogue or 'about' boxes. Any supplemental software code provided to you as part of the Support Services shall be considered part of the Software Product and subject to the terms and conditions of this EULA. code or other embodiments originally contained in or dynamically or otherwise created by the Software Product. You may not otherwise give or permanently transfer any or all of your rights under this EULA without the express prior written consent of Anite Finland Ltd which such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. US. With respect to technical information you provide to Anite Finland Ltd as part of the Support Services. you must destroy all copies of the Software Product and all associated media. animations.com Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) measurement technology included in this product is protected by copyright and by European. This software uses Libresample library distributed under LGPL license. modify or alter any Anite Finland Ltd copyright or trademark from any part of the Software Product.org. text and "applets".558 Nemo O ut door User M a nual Not for Resale.

and/or sell copies of the Software.ncsa. DUAL-MEDIA SOFTWARE. You may not use or install the other medium on any system. You may receive the Software Product in more than one medium. . to any person obtaining a copy of this software (Iperf) and associated documentation files (the "Software"). INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY. You agree to keep in confidence and not to disclose in any manner or form to any third party nor publish any such data or information related to the Software Product. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS". OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. Regardless of the type or size of medium you receive. CONFIDENTIALITY AND NON-DISCLOSURE. WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT. this list of conditions and the following disclaimers in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. to deal in the Software without restriction. but with not less than that due care exercised by a reasonably prudent person under the same or similar circumstances. WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND. copy. DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY. including without limitation the rights to use. ARISING FROM. free of charge. EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this Software without specific prior written permission. merge. modify.APPE NDI X 10 559 Iperf performance test Mark Gates Ajay Tirumala Jim Ferguson Jon Dugan Feng Qin Kevin Gibbs John Estabrook National Laboratory for Applied Network Research National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign http://www. You may not loan. Neither the names of the University of Illinois.uiuc. except as part of the permanent transfer (as provided above) of the Software Product. TORT OR OTHERWISE. this list of conditions and the following disclaimers. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE CONTIBUTORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM. You agree to protect all information and data provided to you by Anite Finland Ltd related to the Software Product with the same degree of care that you use to protect your own like data and information. NCSA. sublicense. rent. publish. you may use only that one medium that is appropriate for the systems you use to operate the Software Product. subject to the following conditions: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice. 5.edu Permission is hereby granted. lease or otherwise transfer the other medium to another user. distribute. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice. and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so. 6.

incidental. CUSTOMER REMEDIES. business interruption. In any case. misapplication or events beyond the control of Anite Finland Ltd including. or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252. with regard to the Software Product. at Anite Finland Ltd option. whichever is longer. Some states/jurisdictions do not allow disclaimers of or limitations on duration of an implied warranty. 8. fitness for a particular purpose. the accompanying written materials. tort law or otherwise. even if these limitations have the effect of exculpating a party from responsibility for its negligence. The Software Product and documentation are provided with Restricted Rights. Anite Finland Ltd disclaims all other warranties. fault or other conduct. Use. abuse. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. as applicable. loss of business profits.S. NO OTHER WARRANTIES. loss of business information. third party hardware that is not disclaimable are limited to three (3) months and one (1) year respectively. punitive or indirect damages for personal injury. To the extent that implied warranties are disclaimable. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. and (b) any third party hardware accompanying the Software Products will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of one (1) year from the date of receipt. special. acts of nature or acts of war. This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. U. including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability. LIMITED WARRANTY. so the above limitation may not apply to you. but not limited to Acts of God.560 Nemo O ut door User M a nual 7. even if Anite Finland Ltd has been advised of the possibility of such damages. Anite Finland Ltd warrants that (a) the Software Product will perform substantially in accordance with the accompanying written materials for a period of three (3) months from the date of receipt.Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52-227-19. Any replacement Software Products or hardware will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days. and any accompanying hardware. as applicable. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law. . The Limited Warranty contained herein is void if failure of the software or third party hardware has resulted from accident. duplication. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability and your exclusive remedy shall be. Anite Finland Ltd and its suppliers' entire liability under any provision of this EULA shall be limited to the amount actually paid by you for the Software Product and/or third party hardware accompanying the Software Product. Any implied warranties on the Software Product and. The Limitations of Liability contained in this Section apply to claims of every kind. 9. GOVERNMENTAL RESTRICTED RIGHTS. either (a) return of the price paid. they are disclaimed in paragraph 10. Anite Finland Ltd is not responsible for ensuring adequate backup and storage for your data or records. Because some states/jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of liability for consequential or incidental damages.277-7013 or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software . or (b) repair or replacement of the software or hardware that does not meet the Limited Warranty contained in this EULA and which is returned to Anite Finland Ltd. in no event shall Anite Finland Ltd or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever (including without limitation. 10. 11. consequential. You may have others which vary from state/jurisdiction to state/jurisdiction. or any other pecuniary loss) arising out of the use of or inability to use this Software Product. either express or implied. the above limitation may not apply to you. whether based on contract law. and non-infringement of third-party rights.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful